MegaRAID® SAS Software User Guide
MegaRAID® SAS Software User Guide
51530-00
Rev G
June 2012
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Revision History
Version and Date
Rev G, June 2012
Description of Changes



Rev F, March 2012




Rev E, December 2011







Rev C, September 2011





Rev B, July 2011


Updated Appendix A.
Updated Chapter 6, MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation.
Updated Chapter 5, MegaRAID Command Tool.
Updated content for Battery Learn cycle.
Removed references to EKM and LKM in WebBIOS.
Updated Appendix A.
Updated content in the chapter, Monitoring Controllers and their Attached Devices.
Added content for punctured blocks in MSM, WebBIOS, and CLI.
Added content for stopping and starting Popup process.
Removed references to EKM in MSM.
Updated the guide with content for LDAP Support.
Updated the product names.
Updated the WebBIOS chapter by enhancing the content.
Updated the CLI chapter with some commands and a note.
Updated the document with the new template.
Made enhancements to Chapter 5, MegaRAID Command Tool.
Made enhancements to Chapter 6, MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation.
Updated battery related terms in the Glossary.
Updated the controller list in Chapter 11, Using MegaRAID Advanced Software.
Updated the guide with VMware 5.0 information.
Updated the guide with CacheCade Pro 2.0 SSD Read/Write Caching software content.
NOTE For a history of all technical changes made to this guide for the previous releases, refer to Appendix C.
LSI and the LSI & Design logo are registered trademarks of LSI Corporation or its subsidiaries. All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective companies.
This final document describes a preproduction product and contains information that may change substantially for any final commercial release of the product. LSI Corporation makes no express or implied
representation or warranty as to the accuracy, quality, or completeness of information contained in this document, and neither the release of this document nor any information included in it obligates LSI
Corporation to make a commercial release of the product. LSI Corporation reserves the right to make changes to the product(s) or information disclosed herein at any time without notice. LSI Corporation
does not assume any responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any product or service described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by LSI Corporation; nor does the purchase,
lease, or use of a product or service from LSI Corporation convey a license under any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any other of the intellectual property rights of LSI Corporation or of third
parties. LSI products are not intended for use in life-support appliances, devices, or systems. Use of any LSI product in such applications without written consent of the appropriate LSI officer is prohibited.
This document contains proprietary information of LSI Corporation. The information contained herein is not to be used by or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of LSI Corporation.
Corporate Headquarters
Milpitas, CA
800-372-2447
Document Number: 51530-00
Copyright © 2012 LSI Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Email
[email protected]
Website
www.lsi.com
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1 SAS Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Serial-Attached SCSI Device Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Serial ATA III Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Solid State Drive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1 SSD Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Dimmer Switch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 UEFI 2.0 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 Configuration Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.1 Valid Drive Mix Configurations with HDDs and SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
15
16
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1 RAID Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 RAID Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 RAID Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Components and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Drive Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Fault Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.1 Multipathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.5 Copyback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.6 Background Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.7 Patrol Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.8 Disk Striping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.9 Disk Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.10 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.11 Disk Spanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.12 Hot Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.12.1 Global Hot Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.12.2 Dedicated Hot Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.13 Disk Rebuilds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.14 Rebuild Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.15 Hot Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.16 Drive States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.17 Virtual Drive States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.18 Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.19 Enclosure Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 RAID Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 Summary of RAID Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 Selecting a RAID Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3 RAID 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4 RAID 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5 RAID 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.6 RAID 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.7 RAID 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.8 RAID 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.9 RAID 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI Corporation
-3-
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
23
24
24
24
25
25
25
26
26
27
27
27
27
28
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Table of Contents
2.5.10 RAID 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 RAID Configuration Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1 Maximizing Fault Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2 Maximizing Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3 Maximizing Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 RAID Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1 RAID Availability Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Configuration Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 Number of Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
36
36
38
39
40
40
40
41
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.2 Starting the WebBIOS Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.3 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Main Dialog Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4 Managing Software Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.1 Managing MegaRAID Advanced Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.2 Reusing the Activation Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.3 Managing Advanced Software Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.4.4 Activating an Unlimited Key Over a Trial Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.4.5 Activating a Trial Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.4.6 Activating an Unlimited Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.4.7 Securing MR Advanced SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.4.8 Confirm Re-hosting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.4.9 Re-hosting Process Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.5 Creating a Storage Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.5.1 Using Automatic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.5.2 Using Manual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.5.2.1 Virtual Drive Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.5.2.2 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.5.2.3 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.5.2.4 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.5.2.5 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.5.2.6 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.5.2.7 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.5.2.8 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.5.2.9 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.6 CacheCade Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.6.1 Creating a MegaRAID CacheCade Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.6.2 Creating a MegaRAID CacheCade Pro 2.0 Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.6.2.1 Modifying CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drive Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.6.2.2 Enabling or Disabling SSD Caching on a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.6.2.3 Enabling or Disabling SSD Caching on Multiple Virtual Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.6.2.4 Enabling SSD Caching on New Virtual Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.6.2.5 Clearing Configurations on CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.6.2.6 Removing Blocked Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.7 Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.7.1 Enabling the Security Key Identifier, Security Key, and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.7.2 Changing the Security Key Identifier, Security Key, and Pass Phrase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.7.3 Disabling the Drive Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.8 Viewing and Changing Device Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.8.1 Viewing Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.8.1.1 Controller Information Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.8.2 Viewing Virtual Drive Properties, Policies, and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.8.3 Viewing Drive Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.8.4 Shield State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
LSI Corporation
-4-
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Table of Contents
3.8.4.1 Shield State Physical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.4.2 Logical View Shield State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.4.3 Viewing the Physical Drive Properties of a Drive in Shield State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.4.4 Viewing if Shield State Is Enabled in a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.5 Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.5.1 BBU Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.5.2 Setting the Learn Delay Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.5.3 Setting the Auto Learn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.6 Managing Link Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.7 Viewing Enclosure Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.8 SSD Disk Cache Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.8.1 Viewing Cache Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.9 Emergency Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.9.1 Emergency Spare for Physical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.10 Emergency Spare for Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.10.1 Setting Controller Emergency Spare Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.10.2 Viewing Controller Emergency Spare Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.10.3 Commissioned Hotspare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 Viewing and Expanding a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Recovering and Clearing Punctured Block Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11 Suspending and Resuming Virtual Drive Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12 Using MegaRAID Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.1 Recovery Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.2 Enabling the Recovery Advanced Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.3 Creating Snapshots and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.4 Creating Concurrent Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.5 Selecting the Snapshot Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.6 Viewing Snapshot Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.7 Restoring a Virtual Drive by Rolling Back to a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.8 Cleaning Up a Snapshot Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13 Non-SED Secure Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.1 Erasing a Non-SED Physical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.1.1 Drive Erase Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.2 Virtual Drive Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.2.1 Group Show Progress for Virtual Drive Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14 Viewing System Event Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15 Managing Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.1 Running a Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.2 Deleting a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.3 Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.3.1 Foreign Configurations in Cable Pull and Drive Removal Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.3.2 Importing Foreign Configurations from Integrated RAID to MegaRAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.3.3 Troubleshooting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.4 Importing Foreign Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.5 Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.5.1 Additional Drives Required for RAID-Level Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.5.2 Migrating the RAID Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.6 New Drives Attached to a MegaRAID Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16 WebBIOS Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.1 Power-Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.2 Power Save Settings – Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.3 Power-Save While Creating Virtual Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
112
113
114
115
117
118
118
119
120
123
123
123
124
124
124
125
125
126
128
128
129
130
130
133
137
139
140
142
143
145
145
147
148
149
150
151
152
152
153
155
156
156
156
157
157
157
158
159
162
162
163
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.1 Installing the MegaCLI Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.1.1 Installing the MegaCLI Configuration Utility Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
LSI Corporation
-5-
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Table of Contents
4.1.2 Installing the MegaCLI Configuration Utility on Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Novell NetWare, SCO, Solaris, FreeBSD, and MS-DOS Operating System Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Abbreviations Used in the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Pre-boot MegaCLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 CacheCade Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.1 Create a Solid State Drive Cache Drive to Use as Secondary Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.2 Delete a Solid State Drive Cache Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.3 Associate/Disassociate Virtual Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.4 Display CacheCade Pro 2.0 Configurations on a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.5 Create a RAID Drive Group for CacheCade Pro 2.0 from All Unconfigured Good Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.6 Remove Blocked Access on a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.7 Create RAID 0 Configuration with SSD Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.8 Create a RAID Level 10, 50, 60 (Spanned) Configuration with SSD Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.9 Delete Virtual Drives with SSD Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.10 Clear Configurations on CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.11 Create a CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drive with RAID Level and Write Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 Software License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 SafeStore Security Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.1 Use Instant Secure Erase on a Physical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.2 Secure Data on a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.3 Destroy the Security Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.4 Create a Security Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.5 Create a Drive Security Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.6 Change the Security Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.7 Get the Security Key ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.8 Set the Security Key ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.9 Verify the Security Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9 Controller Property-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.1 Display Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.2 Display Number of Controllers Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.4 Flush Controller Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.5 Set Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.6 Display Specified Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.7 Set Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.8 Set SAS Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.9 Set Time and Date on Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.10 Display Time and Date on Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.11 Get Connector Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.12 Set Connector Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10 Patrol Read-Related Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.1 Set Patrol Read Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.2 Set Patrol Read Delay Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.3 Set Patrol Read on Single, Multiple, or All Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11 BIOS-Related Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.1 Set or Display Bootable Virtual Drive ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.2 Select BIOS Status Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12 Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.1 Display BBU Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.2 Display BBU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.3 Display BBU Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.4 Display BBU Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI Corporation
-6-
165
166
167
167
167
168
169
169
169
170
170
170
170
171
172
172
173
173
173
173
174
174
175
175
175
175
176
176
176
176
177
177
177
177
178
178
180
181
181
182
182
182
182
183
183
183
184
184
184
185
185
185
185
186
187
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Table of Contents
4.12.5 Display Current BBU Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.6 Start BBU Learning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.7 Place Battery in Low-Power Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.8 Set BBU Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.9 Seal the Gas Gauge EEPROM Write Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13 Options for Displaying Logs Kept at the Firmware Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.1 Event Log Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.2 Set BBU Terminal Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14 Configuration-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.1 Create a RAID Drive Group from All Unconfigured Good Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.2 Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.3 Add RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.4 Clear the Existing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.5 Save the Configuration on the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.6 Restore the Configuration Data from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.7 Manage Foreign Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.8 Delete Specified Virtual Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.9 Display the Free Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15 Virtual Drive-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.1 Display Virtual Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.2 Change the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.3 Display the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.4 Manage Virtual Drives Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.5 Manage a Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.6 Schedule a Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.7 Manage a Background Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.8 Perform a Virtual Drive Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.9 Display Information about Virtual Drives and Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.10 Display the Bad Block Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.11 Recovering and Clearing Punctured Block Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.12 Display the Number of Virtual Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.13 Clear the LDBBM Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.14 Display the List of Virtual Drives with Preserved Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.15 Discard the Preserved Cache of a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.16 Expand a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16 Drive-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.1 Display Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.2 Set the Drive State to Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.3 Set the Drive State to Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.4 Change the Drive State to Unconfigured-Good . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.5 Change the Drive State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.6 Manage a Drive Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.7 Rebuild a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.8 Locate the Drives and Activate LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.9 Mark the Configured Drive as Missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.10 Display the Drives in Missing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.11 Replace the Configured Drives and Start an Automatic Rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.12 Prepare the Unconfigured Drive for Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.13 Display Total Number of Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.14 Display List of Physical Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.15 Download Firmware to the Physical Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.16 Configure All Free Drives into a RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration for a Specific Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.17 Set the Mapping Mode of the Drives to the Selected Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.18 Secure Erase for Virtual Drives and Physical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.19 Perform the Copyback Operation on the Selected Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17 Enclosure-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17.1 Display Enclosure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI Corporation
-7-
187
188
188
188
189
189
189
190
191
191
192
193
194
194
195
195
195
196
196
196
196
197
197
198
198
198
199
199
200
200
201
201
201
201
201
202
202
202
203
203
203
203
204
204
205
205
205
205
206
206
206
207
208
208
208
209
209
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Table of Contents
4.17.2 Display Enclosure Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17.3 Upgrade the Firmware without Restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18 Flashing the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18.1 Flash the Firmware with the ROM File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18.2 Flash the Firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.19 SAS Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.20 Diagnostic-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.20.1 Start Controller Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.20.2 Perform a Full Stroke Seek Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.20.3 Start Battery Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21 Recovery (Snapshot)-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.1 Enable the Snapshot Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.2 Disable the Snapshot Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.3 Take a Snapshot of a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.4 Set the Snapshot Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.5 Delete a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.6 Create a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.7 Delete a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.8 Roll Back to an Older Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.9 Display Snapshot and View Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.10 Clean the Recoverable Free Space on the Drives in a Virtual Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.11 Display the Information for a Specific View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21.12 Enable the Snapshot Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.22 Fast Path-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23 Dimmer Switch-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23.1 Display Selected Adapter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23.2 Set the Properties on the Selected Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23.3 Display the Power-Saving Level on the Virtual Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23.4 Add a RAID Level to a Specified Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23.5 Create a RAID Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23.6 Add the Unconfigured Drive to a Specified Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23.7 Display the Cache and Access Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.24 Performance Monitoring Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.24.1 Start Performance Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.24.2 Stop Performance Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.24.3 Save Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.25 Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.25.1 Display the Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.25.2 Display the MegaCLI Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.25.3 Display Help for MegaCLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.25.4 Display Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
210
210
210
210
211
211
211
211
212
212
212
212
213
213
213
214
214
214
215
215
215
216
216
216
216
217
218
218
218
219
220
221
221
221
221
221
222
222
222
222
Chapter 5: Using MegaRAID Advanced Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Appendix A Events and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Appendix B MegaCLI Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Appendix C History of Technical Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
LSI Corporation
-8-
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
NOTE Fujitsu RAID Controller
The Fujitsu RAID controller based on LSI MegaRAID technology and LSI SAS IC technology support most of the
functions described in this guide for the LSI MegaRAID SAS RAID controller. Operating systems released on the Fujitsu
RAID controller are documented in the controller data sheets.
Not released or unsupported features are as follows:












LSI MegaRAID Storage Manager is not released. Instead the Fujitus ServerView RAID Manager should be used.
Dimmer Switch III is not supported
A mix configuration of SAS and SATA devices or HDDs and SSDs within same virtual drive is not supported by
Fujitsu RAID controller.
Audible alarms are not supported
RAID level 00 is not supported
MegaSR controller on Fujitsu Primergy server has no RAID 5 option
JBOD is not a supported state. New drives are displayed as Unconfigured Good. Drives containing RAID
configuration data are reported with Foreign Config state or Unconfigured Bad.
SafeStore Encryprion is not supported
Emergency Spare is not supported
Pre-boot MegaCLI is not released
Snapshot and Recovery are not supported
Events listed in Appendix A are reported by Fujitsu ServerView RAID Manager
LSI Corporation
-9-
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 1: Overview
SAS Technology
Chapter 1: Overview
This chapter provides an overview of this guide, which documents the utilities used to configure, monitor, and
maintain MegaRAID® Serial-attached SCSI (SAS) RAID controllers with RAID control capabilities and the
storage-related devices connected to them.
This guide describes how to use the WebBIOS™ configuration utility, and the MegaRAID command line interface (CLI).
This chapter documents the SAS technology, Serial ATA (SATA) technology, MegaRAID CacheCade™ software, SSD
Guard™, Dimmer Switch™, UEFI 2.0, configuration scenarios, and drive types. Other features such as Fast Path and
SafeStore™ are described in other chapters of this guide.
NOTE This guide does not include the latest CacheCade and Enterprise Key Management System (EKMS) features.
1.1
SAS Technology
The MegaRAID 6Gb/s SAS RAID controllers are high-performance intelligent PCI Express-to-SAS/Serial ATA II
controllers with RAID control capabilities. The MegaRAID 6Gb/s SAS RAID controllers provide reliability, high
performance, and fault-tolerant disk subsystem management. They are an ideal RAID solution for the internal storage
of workgroup, departmental, and enterprise systems. The MegaRAID 6Gb/s SAS RAID controllers offer a cost-effective
way to implement RAID in a server.
SAS technology brings a wealth of options and flexibility with the use of SAS devices, Serial ATA (SATA) II devices, and
CacheCade SSD Read Caching software devices within the same storage infrastructure. These devices bring individual
characteristics that make each of these more suitable choice depending on your storage needs. MegaRAID gives you
the flexibility to combine these two similar technologies on the same controller, within the same enclosure, and in the
same virtual drive.
NOTE Carefully assess any decision to combine SAS drives and SATA drives within the same virtual drives. Avoid mixing
drives; this applies to both HDDs and CacheCade SSD Read Caching software.
The MegaRAID 6Gb/s SAS RAID controllers are based on the LSI® first-to-market SAS IC technology and proven
MegaRAID technology. As second-generation PCI Express RAID controllers, the MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers
address the growing demand for increased data throughput and scalability requirements across midrange and
enterprise-class server platforms. LSI offers a family of MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers addressing the needs for both
internal and external solutions.
The SAS controllers support the ANSI Serial Attached SCSI standard, version 2.1. In addition, the controller supports the
SATA III protocol defined by the Serial ATA specification, version 3.0. Supporting both the SAS and SATA III interfaces, the
SAS controller is a versatile controller that provides the backbone of both server environments and high-end
workstation environments.
Each port on the SAS RAID controller supports SAS devices or SATA III devices using the following protocols:




SAS Serial SCSI Protocol (SSP), which enables communication with other SAS devices
SATA III, which enables communication with other SATA III devices
Serial Management Protocol (SMP), which communicates topology management information directly with an
attached SAS expander device
Serial Tunneling Protocol (STP), which enables communication with a SATA III device through an attached
expander
LSI Corporation
- 10 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
1.2
Chapter 1: Overview
Serial-Attached SCSI Device Interface
Serial-Attached SCSI Device Interface
SAS is a serial, point-to-point, enterprise-level device interface that leverages the proven SCSI protocol set. SAS is a
convergence of the advantages of SATA II, SCSI, and Fibre Channel, and is the future mainstay of the enterprise and
high-end workstation storage markets. SAS offers a higher bandwidth per pin than parallel SCSI, and it improves the
signal and data integrity.
The SAS interface uses the proven SCSI command set to ensure reliable data transfers, while providing the
connectivity and flexibility of point-to-point serial data transfers. The serial transmission of SCSI commands eliminates
clock-skew challenges. The SAS interface provides improved performance, simplified cabling, smaller connectors,
lower pin count, and lower power requirements when compared to parallel SCSI.
SAS controllers leverage a common electrical and physical connection interface that is compatible with Serial ATA
technology. The SAS and SATA II protocols use a thin, 7-wire connector instead of the 68-wire SCSI cable or 26-wire
ATA cable. The SAS/SATA II connector and cable are easier to manipulate, allow connections to smaller devices, and do
not inhibit airflow. The point-to-point SATA II architecture eliminates inherent difficulties created by the legacy ATA
master-slave architecture, while maintaining compatibility with existing ATA firmware.
1.3
Serial ATA III Features
The SATA bus is a high-speed, internal bus that provides a low pin count (LPC), low voltage level bus for device
connections between a host controller and a SATA device.
The following list describes the SATA III features of the RAID controllers:







1.4
Supports SATA III data transfers of 6Gb/s
Supports STP data transfers of 6Gb/s
Provides a serial, point-to-point storage interface
Simplifies cabling between devices
Eliminates the master-slave construction used in parallel ATA
Allows addressing of multiple SATA II targets through an expander
Allows multiple initiators to address a single target (in a fail-over configuration) through an expander
Solid State Drive Features
The MegaRAID firmware supports the use of SSDs as standard drives and/or additional controller cache, referred to as
CacheCade software. SSD drives are expected to behave like SATA or SAS HDDs except for the following:





High random read speed (because there is no read-write head to move)
High performance-to-power ratio, as these drives have very low power consumption compared to HDDs
Low latency
High mechanical reliability
Lower weight and size
NOTE Support for SATA SSD drives applies only to those drives that support ATA-8 ACS compliance.
LSI Corporation
- 11 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 1: Overview
Dimmer Switch Features
You can choose whether to allow a virtual drive to consist of both CacheCade software devices and HDDs. For a virtual
drive that consists of CacheCade software only, you can choose whether to allow SAS CacheCade software drives and
SATA CacheCade software drives in that virtual drive. For virtual drives that have both CacheCade software and HDDs,
you can choose whether to mix SAS and SATA HDD drives with SAS and SATA CacheCade software devices in various
combinations.l
NOTE Support for SATA SDD drives applies only to those drives that support ATA-8 ACS compliance.
1.4.1
SSD Guard
SSD Guard, a feature that is unique to MegaRAID, increases the reliability of SSDs by automatically copying data from a
drive with potential to fail to a designated hot spare or newly inserted drive. Because SSDs are more reliable than hard
disk drives (HDDs), non-redundant RAID 0 configurations are much more common than in the past. SSD Guard offers
added data protection for RAID 0 configurations.
SSD Guard works by looking for a predictive failure while monitoring the SDD Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and
Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.) error log. If errors indicate that a SSD failure is imminent, the MegaRAID software
starts a rebuild to preserve the data on the SSD and sends appropriate warning event notifications.
1.5
Dimmer Switch Features
Powering drives and cooling drives represent a major cost for data centers. The MegaRAID Dimmer Switch feature set
reduces the power consumption of the devices connected to a MegaRAID controller. This helps to share resources
more efficiently and lowers the cost.
Dimmer Switch I – Spin down unconfigured disks. This feature is configurable and can be disabled.
Dimmer Switch II – Spin down Hot Spares. This feature is configurable and can be disabled.
Dimmer Switch III – This new feature spins down any Logical Disk after 30 minutes of inactivity, by default, if the array
can be spun up within 60 seconds. This feature is configurable and can be disabled.
1.6
UEFI 2.0 Support
UEFI 2.0 provides MegaRAID customers with expanded platform support. The MegaRAID UEFI 2.0 driver, a boot
service device driver, handles block IO requests and SCSI pass-through (SPT) commands, and offers the ability to
launch pre-boot MegaRAID management applications through a driver configuration protocol (DCP). The UEFI driver
also supports driver diagnostic protocol, which allows administrators to access pre-boot diagnostics.
LSI Corporation
- 12 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
1.7
Chapter 1: Overview
Configuration Scenarios
Configuration Scenarios
You can use the SAS RAID controllers in three scenarios:

Low-end, Internal SATA III Configurations
In these configurations, use the RAID controller as a high-end SATA III-compatible controller that connects up to 8
disks either directly or through a port expander. These configurations are mostly for low-end or entry servers.
Enclosure management is provided through out-of-band Inter-IC (I2C) bus. Side bands of both types of internal
SAS connectors support the SFF-8485 (SGPIO) interface.

Midrange Internal SAS Configurations
These configurations are like the internal SATA III configurations, but with high-end disks. These configurations
are more suitable for low-range to midrange servers.

High-end External SAS/SATA III Configurations
These configurations are for both internal connectivity and external connectivity, using SATA III drives, SAS drives,
or both. External enclosure management is supported through in-band, SCSI-enclosed storage. The configuration
must support STP and SMP.
The following figure shows a direct-connect configuration. The Inter-IC (I 2C) interface communicates with peripherals.
The external memory bus provides a 32-bit memory bus, parity checking, and chip select signals for pipelined
synchronous burst static random access memory (PSBRAM), nonvolatile static random access memory (NVSRAM), and
Flash ROM.
NOTE The external memory bus is 32-bit for the SAS 8704ELP and the SAS 8708ELP, and 64-bit for the SAS 8708EM2,
the SAS 8880EM2, and the SAS 8888ELP.
6$66$7$,,'HYLFH
%LW0HPRU\
$GGUHVV'DWD
%XV
6$66$7$,,'HYLFH
6$6
3&,([SUHVV
5$,'&RQWUROOHU
6$66$7$,,'HYLFH
, &
,QWHUIDFH
)ODVK520
36%5$0
1965$0
,&
6$66$7$,,'HYLFH
3&,([SUHVV,QWHUIDFH
Figure 1 Example of an LSI SAS Direct-Connect Application
LSI Corporation
- 13 -
B
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 1: Overview
Configuration Scenarios
The following figure shows an example of a SAS RAID controller configured with an LSISASx12 expander that is
connected to SAS disks, SATA II disks, or both.
3&,([SUHVV,QWHUIDFH
3HULSKHUDO
%XV
6$65$,'&RQWUROOHU
/6,6$6
3&,([SUHVVWR6$652&
)ODVK520
1965$0
,&8$57
ELW''5''5
ZLWK(&&
,QWHUIDFH
6'5$0
6$66$7$
'ULYHV
/6,6$6[
([SDQGHU
6$66$7$,,
'ULYHV
/6,6$6[
([SDQGHU
6$66$7$,,
'ULYHV
6$66$7$,,
'ULYHV
6$66$7$,,
'ULYHV
B
Figure 2 Example of an LSI SAS RAID Controller Configured with an LSISASx12 Expander
LSI Corporation
- 14 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
1.7.1
Chapter 1: Overview
Configuration Scenarios
Valid Drive Mix Configurations with HDDs and SSDs
You can allow a virtual drive to consist of both SSDs and HDDs. For virtual drives that have both SSDs and HDDs, you
can choose whether to mix SAS drives and SATA drives on the CacheCade software devices.
You can choose whether to allow a virtual drive to consist of both CacheCade software devices and HDDs. For a virtual
drive that consists of CacheCade software only, you can choose whether to allow SAS CacheCade software drives and
SATA CacheCade software drives in that virtual drive. For virtual drives that have both CacheCade software and HDDs,
you can choose whether to mix SAS and SATA HDD drives with SAS and SATA CacheCade software devices in various
combinations.
The following table lists the valid drive mix configurations you can use when you create virtual drives and allow HDD
and CacheCade software mixing. The valid drive mix configurations are based on manufacturer settings.
Table 1 Valid Drive Mix Configurations
#
Valid Drive Mix Configurations
1.
SAS HDD with SAS SDD (SAS-only configuration)
2.
SATA HDD with SATA CacheCade software (SATA-only configuration)
3.
SAS HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA CacheCade software (a SATA HDD cannot be added)
4.
SATA HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA CacheCade software (a SAS HDD cannot be added)
5.
SAS CacheCade software with a mix of SAS and SATA HDD (a SATA CacheCade software cannot be added)
6.
SATA CacheCade software with a mix of SAS and SATA HDD (a SAS CacheCade software cannot be added)
7.
A mix of SAS and SATA HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA CacheCade software
8.
A CacheCade software cannot be added to a HDD, but a SAS/SATA mix is allowed.
NOTE Only one of the valid configurations listed in the above table is allowed based on your controller card
manufacturing settings.
NOTE The valid drive mix also applies to hot spares. For hot spare information, see Section Hot Spares.
LSI Corporation
- 15 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
1.8
Chapter 1: Overview
Technical Support
Technical Support
For assistance with installing, configuring, or running your MegaRAID 6Gb/s SAS RAID controllers, contact a Fujitsu
Technical Support representative.
Click the following link to access the Fujitsu Technical Support page:
http://ts.fujitsu.com/support
E-mail:
https://support.ts.fujitsu.com/contact/contactform/contactform.asp
Phone Support:
http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/contact/servicedesk/
LSI Corporation
- 16 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Description
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
This chapter describes Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID), RAID functions and benefits, RAID components,
RAID levels, and configuration strategies. In addition, it defines the RAID availability concept, and offers tips for
configuration planning.
2.1
RAID Description
RAID is an array, or group, of multiple independent physical drives that provide high performance and fault tolerance.
A RAID drive group improves I/O (input/output) performance and reliability. The RAID drive group appears to the host
computer as a single storage unit or as multiple virtual units. I/O is expedited because several drives can be accessed
simultaneously.
2.2
RAID Benefits
RAID drive groups improve data storage reliability and fault tolerance compared to single-drive storage systems. Data
loss resulting from a drive failure can be prevented by reconstructing missing data from the remaining drives. RAID
has gained popularity because it improves I/O performance and increases storage subsystem reliability.
2.3
RAID Functions
Virtual drives are drive groups or spanned drive groups that are available to the operating system. The storage space
in a virtual drive is spread across all of the drives in the drive group.
Your drives must be organized into virtual drives in a drive group, and they must be able to support the RAID level that
you select. Some common RAID functions follow:








Creating hot spare drives
Configuring drive groups and virtual drives
Initializing one or more virtual drives
Accessing controllers, virtual drives, and drives individually
Rebuilding failed drives
Verifying that the redundancy data in virtual drives using RAID level 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60 is correct
Reconstructing virtual drives after changing RAID levels or adding a drive to a drive group
Selecting a host controller on which to work
LSI Corporation
- 17 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.4
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Components and Features
RAID levels describe a system for ensuring the availability and redundancy of data stored on large disk subsystems.
See Section RAID Levels for detailed information about RAID levels. The following subsections describes the
components of RAID drive groups and RAID levels.
2.4.1
Drive Group
A drive group is a group of physical drives. These drives are managed in partitions known as virtual drives.
2.4.2
Virtual Drive
A virtual drive is a partition in a drive group that is made up of contiguous data segments on the drives. A virtual drive
can consist of an entire drive group, more than one entire drive group, a part of a drive group, parts of more than one
drive group, or a combination of any two of these conditions.
2.4.3
Fault Tolerance
Fault tolerance is the capability of the subsystem to undergo a drive failure or failures without compromising data
integrity, and processing capability. The RAID controller provides this support through redundant drive groups in
RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60. The system can still work properly even with drive failure in a drive group, though
performance can be degraded to some extent.
In a span of RAID 1 drive groups, each RAID 1 drive group has two drives and can tolerate one drive failure. The span of
RAID 1 drive groups can contain up to 32 drives, and tolerate up to 16 drive failures—one in each drive group. A RAID
5 drive group can tolerate one drive failure in each RAID 5 drive group. A RAID 6 drive group can tolerate up to two
drive failures.
Each spanned RAID 10 virtual drive can tolerate multiple drive failures, as long as each failure is in a separate drive
group. A RAID 50 virtual drive can tolerate two drive failures, as long as each failure is in a separate drive group. RAID
60 drive groups can tolerate up to two drive failures in each drive group.
NOTE RAID level 0 is not fault tolerant. If a drive in a RAID 0 drive group fails, the entire virtual drive (all drives associated
with the virtual drive) fails.
Fault tolerance is often associated with system availability because it allows the system to be available during the
failures. However, fault tolerance means that it is also important for the system to be available during the repair of the
problem.
A hot spare is an unused drive that, in case of a disk failure in a redundant RAID drive group, can be used to rebuild the
data and re-establish redundancy. After the hot spare is automatically moved into the RAID drive group, the data is
automatically rebuilt on the hot spare drive. The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild
occurs.
Auto-rebuild allows a failed drive to be replaced and the data automatically rebuilt by “hot-swapping” the drive in the
same drive bay. The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild occurs.
2.4.3.1
Multipathing
The firmware provides support for detecting and using multiple paths from the RAID controllers to the SAS devices
that are in enclosures. Devices connected to enclosures have multiple paths to them. With redundant paths to the
same port of a device, if one path fails, another path can be used to communicate between the controller and the
device. Using multiple paths with load balancing, instead of a single path, can increase reliability through redundancy.
LSI Corporation
- 18 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Applications show the enclosures and the drives connected to the enclosures. The firmware dynamically recognizes
new enclosures added to a configuration along with their contents (new drives). In addition, the firmware dynamically
adds the enclosure and its contents to the management entity currently in use.
Multipathing provides the following features:




Support for failover, in the event of path failure
Auto-discovery of new or restored paths while the system is online, and reversion to system load-balancing policy
Measurable bandwidth improvement to the multi-path device
Support for changing the load-balancing path while the system is online
The firmware determines whether enclosure modules (ESMs) are part of the same enclosure. When a new enclosure
module is added (allowing multi-path) or removed (going single path), an Asynchronous Event Notification (AEN) is
generated. AENs about drives contain correct information about the enclosure, when the drives are connected by
multiple paths. The enclosure module detects partner ESMs and issues events appropriately.
In a system with two ESMs, you can replace one of the ESMs without affecting the virtual drive availability. For
example, the controller can run heavy I/Os, and when you replace one of the ESMs, I/Os should not stop. The
controller uses different paths to balance the load on the entire system.
In the MegaRAID Storage Manager utility, when multiple paths are available to a drive, the drive information shows
only one enclosure. The utility shows that a redundant path is available to a drive. All drives with a redundant path
display this information. The firmware supports online replacement of enclosure modules.
2.4.4
Consistency Check
The consistency check operation verifies correctness of the data in virtual drives that use RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and
60. RAID 0 does not provide data redundancy. For example, in a system with parity, checking consistency means
computing the data on one drive and comparing the results to the contents of the parity drive.
NOTE It is recommended that you perform a consistency check at least once a month.
2.4.5
Copyback
The copyback feature allows you to copy data from a source drive of a virtual drive to a destination drive that is not a
part of the virtual drive. Copyback is often used to create or restore a specific physical configuration for a drive group
(for example, a specific arrangement of drive group members on the device I/O buses). Copyback can be run
automatically or manually.
Typically, when a drive fails or is expected to fail, the data is rebuilt on a hot spare. The failed drive is replaced with a
new disk. Then the data is copied from the hot spare to the new drive, and the hot spare reverts from a rebuild drive to
its original hot spare status. The copyback operation runs as a background activity, and the virtual drive is still
available online to the host.
Copyback is also initiated when the first Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) error occurs on
a drive that is part of a virtual drive. The destination drive is a hot spare that qualifies as a rebuild drive. The drive with
the SMART error is marked as “failed” only after the successful completion of the copyback. This situation avoids
putting the drive group in Degraded status.
NOTE During a copyback operation, if the drive group involved in the copyback is deleted because of a virtual drive
deletion, the destination drive reverts to an Unconfigured Good state or hot spare state.
LSI Corporation
- 19 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Order of Precedence
In the following scenarios, rebuild takes precedence over the copyback operation:


2.4.6
If a copyback operation is already taking place to a hot spare drive, and any virtual drive on the controller
degrades, the copyback operation aborts, and a rebuild starts. The rebuild changes the virtual drive to the
Optimal state.
The rebuild operation takes precedence over the copyback operation when the conditions exist to start both
operations. For example:
— The hot spare is not configured (or unavailable) in the system.
— Two drives (both members of virtual drives) exist, with one drive exceeding the SMART error threshold, and
the other failed.
— If you add a hot spare (assume a global hot spare) during a copyback operation, the copyback is aborted, and
the rebuild operation starts on the hot spare.
Background Initialization
Background initialization is a check for media errors on the drives when you create a virtual drive. It is an automatic
operation that starts five minutes after you create the virtual drive. This check ensures that striped data segments are
the same on all of the drives in the drive group.
Background initialization is similar to a consistency check. The difference between the two is that a background
initialization is forced on new virtual drives and a consistency check is not.
New RAID 5 virtual drives and new RAID 6 virtual drives require a minimum number of drives for a background
initialization to start. If there are fewer drives, the background initialization does not start. The background
initialization needs to be started manually. The following number of drives are required:


New RAID 5 virtual drives must have at least five drives for background initialization to start.
New RAID 6 virtual drives must have at least seven drives for background initialization to start.
The default and recommended background initialization rate is 30 percent. Before you change the rebuild rate, you
must stop the background initialization or the rate change will not affect the background initialization rate. After you
stop background initialization and change the rebuild rate, the rate change takes effect when you restart background
initialization.
2.4.7
Patrol Read
Patrol read involves the review of your system for possible drive errors that could lead to drive failure and then action
to correct errors. The goal is to protect data integrity by detecting drive failure before the failure can damage data. The
corrective actions depend on the drive group configuration and the type of errors.
Patrol read starts only when the controller is idle for a defined period of time and no other background tasks are
active, though it can continue to run during heavy I/O processes.
You can use the MegaRAID Command Tool or the MegaRAID Storage Manager software to select the patrol read
options, which you can use to set automatic or manual operation, or disable patrol read. See Section Controller
Property-Related Options, Controller Property-Related Options, and Section Running a Patrol Read, Running a Patrol
Read.
LSI Corporation
- 20 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.4.8
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Disk Striping
Disk striping allows you to write data across multiple drives instead of just one drive. Disk striping involves
partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size from 8 KB to 1024 KB. These stripes are
interleaved in a repeated sequential manner. The combined storage space is composed of stripes from each drive. It is
recommended that you keep stripe sizes the same across RAID drive groups.
For example, in a four-disk system using only disk striping (used in RAID level 0), segment 1 is written to disk 1,
segment 2 is written to disk 2, and so on. Disk striping enhances performance because multiple drives are accessed
simultaneously, but disk striping does not provide data redundancy.
Figure 3 Example of Disk Striping (RAID 0)
Stripe Width
Stripe width is the number of drives involved in a drive group where striping is implemented. For example, a four-disk
drive group with disk striping has a stripe width of four.
Stripe Size
The stripe size is the length of the interleaved data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of disk space and has 16 KB of data residing
on each disk in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB, and the strip size is 16 KB.
Strip Size
The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive.
2.4.9
Disk Mirroring
With mirroring (used in RAID 1 and RAID 10), data written to one drive is simultaneously written to another drive. The
primary advantage of disk mirroring is that it provides 100 percent data redundancy. Because the contents of the disk
are completely written to a second disk, data is not lost if one disk fails. In addition, both drives contain the same data
at all times, so either disk can act as the operational disk. If one disk fails, the contents of the other disk can be used to
run the system and reconstruct the failed disk.
LSI Corporation
- 21 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Disk mirroring provides 100 percent redundancy, but it is expensive because each drive in the system must be
duplicated. The following figure shows an example of disk mirroring.
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW'XSOLFDWHG
6HJPHQW'XSOLFDWHG
6HJPHQW'XSOLFDWHG
6HJPHQW'XSOLFDWHG
B
Figure 4 Example of Disk Mirroring (RAID 1)
2.4.10
Parity
Parity generates a set of redundancy data from two or more parent data sets. The redundancy data can be used to
reconstruct one of the parent data sets in the event of a drive failure. Parity data does not fully duplicate the parent
data sets, but parity generation can slow the write process. In RAID, this method is applied to entire drives or stripes
across all of the drives in a drive group. The types of parity are described in the following table.
Table 2 Types of Parity
Parity Type
Description
Dedicated
The parity data on two or more drives is stored on an additional disk.
Distributed
The parity data is distributed across more than one drive in the system.
RAID 5 combines distributed parity with disk striping. If a single drive fails, it can be rebuilt from the parity and the
data on the remaining drives. An example of a RAID 5 drive group is shown in the following figure. RAID 5 uses parity
to provide redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives. RAID 6 uses distributed
parity and disk striping, also, but adds a second set of parity data so that it can survive up to two drive failures.
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
1RWH3DULW\LVGLVWULEXWHGDFURVVDOOGULYHVLQWKHGULYHJURXS
Figure 5 Example of Distributed Parity (RAID 5)
LSI Corporation
- 22 -
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
B
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.4.11
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Disk Spanning
Disk spanning allows multiple drives to function like one big drive. Spanning overcomes lack of disk space and
simplifies storage management by combining existing resources or adding relatively inexpensive resources. For
example, four 20-GB drives can be combined to appear to the operating system as a single 80-GB drive.
Spanning alone does not provide reliability or performance enhancements. Spanned virtual drives must have the
same stripe size and must be contiguous. In the following figure, RAID 1 drive groups are turned into a RAID 10 drive
group.
NOTE Make sure that the spans are in different backplanes, so that if one span fails, you do not lose the whole drive
group.
*%
*%
*%
&DQ%H$FFHVVHG$V
2QH*%'ULYH
*%
&DQ%H$FFHVVHG$V
2QH*%'ULYH
B
Figure 6 Example of Disk Spanning
Spanning two contiguous RAID 0 virtual drives does not produce a new RAID level or add fault tolerance. It does
increase the capacity of the virtual drive and improves performance by doubling the number of spindles.
Spanning for RAID 00, RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60
The following table describes how to configure RAID 00, RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60 by spanning. The virtual drives
must have the same stripe size and the maximum number of spans is 8. The full drive capacity is used when you span
virtual drives; you cannot specify a smaller drive capacity.
Table 3 Spanning for RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60
Level
Description
00
Configure RAID 00 by spanning two contiguous RAID 0 virtual drives, up to the maximum number of
supported devices for the controller.
10
Configure RAID 10 by spanning two contiguous RAID 1 virtual drives, up to the maximum number of
supported devices for the controller. RAID 10 supports a maximum of 8 spans. You must use an even number of
drives in each RAID virtual drive in the span. The RAID 1 virtual drives must have the same stripe size.
50
Configure RAID 50 by spanning two contiguous RAID 5 virtual drives. The RAID 5 virtual drives must have the
same stripe size.
60
Configure RAID 60 by spanning two contiguous RAID 6 virtual drives. The RAID 6 virtual drives must have the
same stripe size.
NOTE In a spanned virtual drive (R10, R50, R60) the span numbering starts from Span 0, Span 1, Span 2, and so on.
LSI Corporation
- 23 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.4.12
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Hot Spares
A hot spare is an extra, unused drive that is part of the disk subsystem. It is usually in Standby mode, ready for service
if a drive fails. Hot spares permit you to replace failed drives without system shutdown or user intervention. MegaRAID
SAS RAID controllers can implement automatic and transparent rebuilds of failed drives using hot spare drives,
providing a high degree of fault tolerance and zero downtime.
The RAID management software allows you to specify drives as hot spares. When a hot spare is needed, the RAID
controller assigns the hot spare that has a capacity closest to and at least as great as that of the failed drive to take the
place of the failed drive. The failed drive is removed from the virtual drive and marked ready awaiting removal after
the rebuild to a hot spare begins. You can make hot spares of the drives that are not in a RAID virtual drive.
You can use the RAID management software to designate the hot spare to have enclosure affinity, meaning that if
drive failures are present on a split backplane configuration, the hot spare will be used first on the backplane side in
which it resides.
If the hot spare is designated as having enclosure affinity, it attempts to rebuild any failed drives on the backplane in
which it resides before rebuilding any other drives on other backplanes.
NOTE If a rebuild to a hot spare fails for any reason, the hot spare drive is marked as failed. If the source drive fails, both
the source drive and the hot spare drive are marked as failed.
The hot spare can be of two types:


2.4.12.1
Global hot spare
Dedicated hot spare
Global Hot Spare
Use a global hot spare drive to replace any failed drive in a redundant drive group as long as its capacity is equal to or
larger than the coerced capacity of the failed drive. A global hot spare defined on any channel should be available to
replace a failed drive on both channels.
2.4.12.2
Dedicated Hot Spare
Use a dedicated hot spare to replace a failed drive only in a selected drive group. One or more drives can be
designated as a member of a spare drive pool. The most suitable drive from the pool is selected for failover. A
dedicated hot spare is used before one from the global hot spare pool.
Hot spare drives can be located on any RAID channel. Standby hot spares (not being used in RAID drive group) are
polled every 60 seconds at a minimum, and their status made available in the drive group management software.
RAID controllers offer the ability to rebuild with a disk that is in a system but not initially set to be a hot spare.
Observe the following parameters when using hot spares:




Hot spares are used only in drive groups with redundancy: RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
A hot spare connected to a specific RAID controller can be used to rebuild a drive that is connected only to the
same controller.
You must assign the hot spare to one or more drives through the controller BIOS or use drive group management
software to place it in the hot spare pool.
A hot spare must have free space equal to or greater than the drive it replaces. For example, to replace an 500-GB
drive, the hot spare must be 500-GB or larger.
LSI Corporation
- 24 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.4.13
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Disk Rebuilds
When a drive in a RAID drive group fails, you can rebuild the drive by re-creating the data that was stored on the drive
before it failed. The RAID controller re-creates the data using the data stored on the other drives in the drive group.
Rebuilding can be done only in drive groups with data redundancy, which includes RAID 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 drive
groups.
The RAID controller uses hot spares to rebuild failed drives automatically and transparently, at user-defined rebuild
rates. If a hot spare is available, the rebuild can start automatically when a drive fails. If a hot spare is not available, the
failed drive must be replaced with a new drive so that the data on the failed drive can be rebuilt.
The failed drive is removed from the virtual drive and marked ready awaiting removal when the rebuild to a hot spare
begins. If the system goes down during a rebuild, the RAID controller automatically resumes the rebuild after the
system reboots.
NOTE When the rebuild to a hot spare begins, the failed drive is often removed from the virtual drive before
management applications detect the failed drive. When this occurs, the events logs show the drive rebuilding to the
hot spare without showing the failed drive. The formerly failed drive will be marked as “ready” after a rebuild begins to
a hot spare. If a source drive fails during a rebuild to a hot spare, the rebuild fails, and the failed source drive is marked
as offline. In addition, the rebuilding hot spare drive is changed back to a hot spare. After a rebuild fails because of a
source drive failure, the dedicated hot spare is still dedicated and assigned to the correct drive group, and the global
hot spare is still global.
An automatic drive rebuild will not start if you replace a drive during a RAID-level migration. The rebuild must be
started manually after the expansion or migration procedure is complete. (RAID-level migration changes a virtual
drive from one RAID level to another.)
2.4.14
Rebuild Rate
The rebuild rate is the percentage of the compute cycles dedicated to rebuilding failed drives. A rebuild rate of 100
percent means that the system gives priority to rebuilding the failed drives.
The rebuild rate can be configured between 0 percent and 100 percent. At 0 percent, the rebuild is done only if the
system is not doing anything else. At 100 percent, the rebuild has a higher priority than any other system activity.
Using 0 percent or 100 percent is not recommended. The default rebuild rate is 30 percent.
2.4.15
Hot Swap
A hot swap is the manual replacement of a defective drive unit while the computer is still running. When a new drive
has been installed, a rebuild occurs automatically if these situation occurs:


The newly inserted drive is the same capacity as or larger than the failed drive.
The newly inserted drive is placed in the same drive bay as the failed drive it is replacing.
The RAID controller can be configured to detect the new drives and rebuild the contents of the drive automatically.
LSI Corporation
- 25 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.4.16
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Components and Features
Drive States
A drive state is a property indicating the status of the drive. The drive states are described in the following table.
Table 4 Drive States
State
Online
Description
A drive that can be accessed by the RAID controller and is part of the virtual drive.
Unconfigured Good A drive that is functioning normally but is not configured as a part of a virtual drive or as a hot spare.
2.4.17
Hot Spare
A drive that is powered up and ready for use as a spare in case an online drive fails.
Failed
A drive that was originally configured as Online or Hot Spare, but on which the firmware detects an
unrecoverable error.
Rebuild
A drive to which data is being written to restore full redundancy for a virtual drive.
Unconfigured Bad
A drive on which the firmware detects an unrecoverable error; the drive was Unconfigured Good or the drive
could not be initialized.
Missing
A drive that was Online but which has been removed from its location.
Offline
A drive that is part of a virtual drive but which has invalid data as far as the RAID configuration is concerned.
Virtual Drive States
The virtual drive states are described in the following table.
Table 5 Virtual Drive States
State
Description
Optimal
The virtual drive operating condition is good. All configured drives are online.
Degraded
The virtual drive operating condition is not optimal. One of the configured drives has failed or is offline.
Partial Degraded
The operating condition in a RAID 6 virtual drive is not optimal. One of the configured drives has failed or is
offline. RAID 6 can tolerate up to two drive failures.
Failed
The virtual drive has failed.
Offline
The virtual drive is not available to the RAID controller.
LSI Corporation
- 26 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.4.18
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
Beep Codes
An alarm sounds on the MegaRAID controller when a virtual drive changes from an optimal state to another state,
when a hot spare rebuilds, and for test purposes.
Table 6 Beep Codes, Events, and Virtual Drive States
Event
Virtual Drive State
RAID 0 virtual drive loses a virtual drives
Offline
3 seconds on and 1 second off
RAID 1 loses a mirror drive
Degraded
1 second on and 1 second off
RAID 1 loses both drives
Offline
3 seconds on and 1 second off
RAID 5 loses one drive
Degraded
1 second on and 1 second off
RAID 5 loses two or more drives
Offline
3 seconds on and 1 second off
RAID 6 loses one drive
Partially Degraded
1 second on and 1 second off
RAID 6 loses two drives
Degraded
1 second on and 1 second off
RAID 6 loses more than two drives
Offline
3 seconds on and 1 second off
A hot spare completes the rebuild process and is N/A
brought into a drive group
2.4.19
Beep Code
1 second on and 3 seconds off
Enclosure Management
Enclosure management is the intelligent monitoring of the disk subsystem by software, hardware or both. The disk
subsystem can be part of the host computer or can reside in an external disk enclosure. Enclosure management helps
you stay informed of events in the disk subsystem, such as a drive or power supply failure. Enclosure management
increases the fault tolerance of the disk subsystem.
2.5
RAID Levels
The RAID controller supports RAID levels 0, 00, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60. The supported RAID levels are summarized in the
following section.
In addition, the RAID controller supports independent drives (configured as RAID 0 and RAID 00.) The following
sections describe the RAID levels in detail.
2.5.1
Summary of RAID Levels
RAID 0 uses striping to provide high data throughput, especially for large files in an environment that does not require
fault tolerance.
RAID 1 uses mirroring so that data written to one drive is simultaneously written to another drive. RAID 1 is good for
small databases or other applications that require small capacity but complete data redundancy.
RAID 5 uses disk striping and parity data across all drives (distributed parity) to provide high data throughput,
especially for small random access.
RAID 6 uses distributed parity, with two independent parity blocks per stripe, and disk striping. A RAID 6 virtual drive
can survive the loss of any two drives without losing data. A RAID 6 drive group, which requires a minimum of three
drives, is similar to a RAID 5 drive group. Blocks of data and parity information are written across all drives. The parity
information is used to recover the data if one or two drives fail in the drive group.
LSI Corporation
- 27 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups.
RAID 10, a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1, consists of striped data across mirrored spans. A RAID 10 drive group is
a spanned drive group that creates a striped set from a series of mirrored drives. RAID 10 allows a maximum of 8 spans.
You must use an even number of drives in each RAID virtual drive in the span. The RAID 1 virtual drives must have the
same stripe size. RAID 10 provides high data throughput and complete data redundancy but uses a larger number of
spans.
RAID 50, a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 5, uses distributed parity and disk striping. A RAID 50 drive group is a
spanned drive group in which data is striped across multiple RAID 5 drive groups. RAID 50 works best with data that
requires high reliability, high request rates, high data transfers, and medium-to-large capacity.
NOTE Having virtual drives of different RAID levels, such as RAID 0 and RAID 5, in the same drive group is not allowed.
For example, if an existing RAID 5 virtual drive is created out of partial space in an array, the next virtual drive in the
array has to be RAID 5 only.
RAID 60, a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 6, uses distributed parity, with two independent parity blocks per stripe in
each RAID set, and disk striping. A RAID 60 virtual drive can survive the loss of two drives in each of the RAID 6 sets
without losing data. RAID 60 works best with data that requires high reliability, high request rates, high data transfers,
and medium-to-large capacity.
NOTE The MegaSR controller supports the standard RAID levels – RAID 0, RAID 1,RAID 5, and RAID 10. The MegaSR
controller comes in two variants, SCU and AHCI, both supporting a maximum of eight physical drives. A maximum of
eight virtual drives can be created (using RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 only) and controlled by the MegaSR
controller. One virtual drive can be created on an array (a maximum of eight if no other virtual drives are already created
on the MegaSR controller), or you can create eight arrays with one virtual drive each. However, on RAID10, you can
create only one virtual drive on a particular array.
2.5.2
Selecting a RAID Level
To ensure the best performance, you should select the optimal RAID level when you create a system drive. The optimal
RAID level for your drive group depends on a number of factors:




2.5.3
The number of drives in the drive group
The capacity of the drives in the drive group
The need for data redundancy
The disk performance requirements
RAID 0
RAID 0 provides disk striping across all drives in the RAID drive group. RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy,
but RAID 0offers the best performance of any RAID level. RAID 0 breaks up data into smaller segments, and then
stripes the data segments across each drive in the drive group. The size of each data segment is determined by the
stripe size. RAID 0 offers high bandwidth.
NOTE RAID level 0 is not fault tolerant. If a drive in a RAID 0 drive group fails, the entire virtual drive (all drives associated
with the virtual drive) fails.
By breaking up a large file into smaller segments, the RAID controller can use both SAS drives and SATA drives to read
or write the file faster. RAID 0 involves no parity calculations to complicate the write operation. This situation makes
RAID 0 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance. The following table
provides an overview of RAID 0. The following figure provides a graphic example of a RAID 0 drive group.
LSI Corporation
- 28 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
Table 7 RAID 0 Overview
Uses
Provides high data throughput, especially for large files. Any environment that does not require fault tolerance.
Strong points
Provides increased data throughput for large files. No capacity loss penalty for parity.
Weak points
Does not provide fault tolerance or high bandwidth. All data is lost if any drive fails.
Drives
1 to 32
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
B
Figure 7 RAID 0 Drive Group Example with Two Drives
2.5.4
RAID 1
In RAID 1, the RAID controller duplicates all data from one drive to a second drive in the drive group. RAID 1 supports
an even number of drives from 2 through 32 in a single span. RAID 1 provides complete data redundancy, but at the
cost of doubling the required data storage capacity. The following table provides an overview of RAID 1. The following
figure provides a graphic example of a RAID 1 drive group.
Table 8 RAID 1 Overview
Uses
Use RAID 1 for small databases or any other environment that requires fault tolerance but small capacity.
Strong points
Provides complete data redundancy. RAID 1 is ideal for any application that requires fault tolerance and
minimal capacity.
Weak points
Requires twice as many drives. Performance is impaired during drive rebuilds.
Drives
2 through 32 (must be an even number of drives)
LSI Corporation
- 29 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
5$,'
5$,'
5$,'
5$,'
Figure 8 RAID 1 Drive Group
2.5.5
RAID 5
RAID 5 includes disk striping at the block level and parity. Parity is the data’s property of being odd or even, and parity
checking is used to detect errors in the data. In RAID 5, the parity information is written to all drives. RAID 5 is best
suited for networks that perform a lot of small input/output (I/O) transactions simultaneously.
RAID 5 addresses the bottleneck issue for random I/O operations. Because each drive contains both data and parity,
numerous writes can take place concurrently.
The following table provides an overview of RAID 5. The following figure provides a graphic example of a RAID 5 drive
group.
Table 9 RAID 5 Overview
Uses
Provides high data throughput, especially for large files. Use RAID 5 for transaction processing applications
because each drive can read and write independently. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity drive
to re-create all missing information. Use also for office automation and online customer service that requires
fault tolerance. Use for any application that has high read request rates but low write request rates.
Strong points
Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good performance in most environments. Provides
redundancy with lowest loss of capacity.
Weak points
Not well-suited to tasks requiring lot of writes. Suffers more impact if no cache is used (clustering). Drive
performance is reduced if a drive is being rebuilt. Environments with few processes do not perform as well
because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes.
Number of Drives in 3 through 32
this RAID level
LSI Corporation
- 30 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
1RWH3DULW\LVGLVWULEXWHGDFURVVDOOGULYHVLQWKHGULYHJURXS
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\±
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
B
Figure 9 RAID 5 Drive Group with Six Drives
2.5.6
RAID 6
RAID 6 is similar to RAID 5 (disk striping and parity), except that instead of one parity block per stripe, there are two.
With two independent parity blocks, RAID 6 can survive the loss of any two drives in a virtual drive without losing
data. RAID 6 provides a high level of data protection through the use of a second parity block in each stripe. Use RAID
6 for data that requires a very high level of protection from loss.
In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a virtual drive, the RAID controller uses the parity blocks to recreate all of the missing information. If two drives in a RAID 6 virtual drive fail, two drive rebuilds are required, one for
each drive. These rebuilds do not occur at the same time. The controller rebuilds one failed drive, and then the other
failed drive.
The following table provides an overview of a RAID 6 drive group.
Table 10 RAID 6 Overview
Uses
Use for office automation and online customer service that requires fault tolerance. Use for any application
that has high read request rates but low write request rates.
Strong points
Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good performance in most environments. Can survive the loss
of two drives or the loss of a drive while another drive is being rebuilt. Provides the highest level of protection
against drive failures of all of the RAID levels. Read performance is similar to that of RAID 5.
Weak points
Not well-suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes. A RAID 6 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data
for each write operation, which results in a significant decrease in performance during writes. Drive
performance is reduced during a drive rebuild. Environments with few processes do not perform as well
because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes. RAID 6
costs more because of the extra capacity required by using two parity blocks per stripe.
Drives
3 through 32
LSI Corporation
- 31 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
The following figure shows a RAID 6 data layout. The second set of parity drives is denoted by Q. The P drives follow
the RAID 5 parity scheme.
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\3±3
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\3±3
3DULW\4±4
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\3±3
3DULW\4±4
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\3±3
3DULW\4±4
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\3±3
3DULW\4±4
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
1RWH3DULW\LVGLVWULEXWHGDFURVVDOOGULYHVLQWKHGULYHJURXS
3DULW\4±4
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
B
Figure 10 Example of Distributed Parity across Two Blocks in a Stripe (RAID 6)
2.5.7
RAID 00
A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups. RAID 00
does not provide any data redundancy, but, along with RAID 0, does offer the best performance of any RAID level.
RAID 00 breaks up data into smaller segments and then stripes the data segments across each drive in the drive
groups. The size of each data segment is determined by the stripe size. RAID 00 offers high bandwidth.
NOTE RAID level 00 is not fault tolerant. If a drive in a RAID 0 drive group fails, the entire virtual drive (all drives
associated with the virtual drive) fails.
By breaking up a large file into smaller segments, the RAID controller can use both SAS drives and SATA drives to read
or write the file faster. RAID 00 involves no parity calculations to complicate the write operation. This situation makes
RAID 00 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance. The following table
provides an overview of RAID 00. The following figure provides a graphic example of a RAID 00 drive group.
Table 11 RAID 00 Overview
Uses
Provides high data throughput, especially for large files. Any environment that does not require fault tolerance.
Strong points
Provides increased data throughput for large files.
No capacity loss penalty for parity.
Weak points
Does not provide fault tolerance or high bandwidth.
All data lost if any drive fails.
Drives
2 through 256
LSI Corporation
- 32 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
5$,'
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
5$,'
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
5$,'
6HJPHQW
5$,'
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
5$,'
5$,'
B
Figure 11 RAID 00 Drive Group Example with Two Drives
2.5.8
RAID 10
RAID 10 is a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1, and it consists of stripes across mirrored drives. RAID 10 breaks up data
into smaller blocks and then mirrors the blocks of data to each RAID 1 drive group. The first RAID 1 drive in each drive
group then duplicates its data to the second drive. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter,
which is set during the creation of the RAID set. The RAID 1 virtual drives must have the same stripe size.
Spanning is used because one virtual drive is defined across more than one drive group. Virtual drives defined across
multiple RAID 1 level drive groups are referred to as RAID level 10, (1+0). Data is striped across drive groups to increase
performance by enabling access to multiple drive groups simultaneously.
Each spanned RAID 10 virtual drive can tolerate multiple drive failures, as long as each failure is in a separate drive
group. If drive failures occur, less than total drive capacity is available.
Configure RAID 10 by spanning two contiguous RAID 1 virtual drives, up to the maximum number of supported
devices for the controller. RAID 10 supports a maximum of 8 spans, with a maximum of 32 drives per span. You must
use an even number of drives in each RAID 10 virtual drive in the span.
NOTE Other factors, such as the type of controller, can restrict the number of drives supported by RAID 10 virtual
drives.
The following table provides an overview of RAID 10.
Table 12 RAID 10 Overview
Uses
Appropriate when used with data storage that needs 100 percent redundancy of mirrored drive groups and
that also needs the enhanced I/O performance of RAID 0 (striped drive groups.) RAID 10 works well for
medium-sized databases or any environment that requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderateto-medium capacity.
Strong Points
Provides both high data transfer rates and complete data redundancy.
Weak Points
Requires twice as many drives as all other RAID levels except RAID 1.
Drives
4 to 32 in multiples of 4 — The maximum number of drives supported by the controller (using an even number
of drives in each RAID 10 virtual drive in the span).
LSI Corporation
- 33 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
In the following figure, virtual drive 0 is created by distributing data across four drive groups (drive groups 0 through
3).
5$,'
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
'XSOLFDWH
5$,'
5$,'
5$,'
5$,'
5$,'
B
Figure 12 RAID 10 Level Virtual Drive
2.5.9
RAID 50
RAID 50 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 5. RAID 50 includes both parity and disk striping across
multiple drive groups. RAID 50 is best implemented on two RAID 5 drive groups with data striped across both drive
groups.
RAID 50 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then stripes the blocks of data to each RAID 5 disk set. RAID 5 breaks
up data into smaller blocks, calculates parity by performing an exclusive-or on the blocks and then writes the blocks
of data and parity to each drive in the drive group. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter,
which is set during the creation of the RAID set.
RAID level 50 can support up to 8 spans and tolerate up to 8 drive failures, though less than total drive capacity is
available. Though multiple drive failures can be tolerated, only one drive failure can be tolerated in each RAID 5 level
drive group.
The following table provides an overview of RAID 50.
Table 13 RAID 50 Overview
Uses
Appropriate when used with data that requires high reliability, high request rates, high data transfer, and
medium-to-large capacity.
Strong points
Provides high data throughput, data redundancy, and very good performance.
Weak points
Requires 2 times to 8 times as many parity drives as RAID 5.
Drives
8 spans of RAID 5 drive groups containing 3 to 32 drives each (limited by the maximum number of devices
supported by the controller)
LSI Corporation
- 34 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
5$,'
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Levels
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 3DULW\
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW 3DULW\
6HJPHQW
3DULW\ 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\ 6HJPHQW
3DULW\
6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
3DULW\ 6HJPHQW 6HJPHQW
5$,'
5$,'
5$,'
B
Figure 13 RAID 50 Level Virtual Drive
2.5.10
RAID 60
RAID 60 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 6, and includes both parity and disk striping across multiple
drive groups. RAID 6 supports two independent parity blocks per stripe. A RAID 60 virtual drive can survive the loss of
two drives in each of the RAID 6 sets without losing data. RAID 60 is best implemented on two RAID 6 drive groups
with data striped across both drive groups.
RAID 60 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then stripes the blocks of data to each RAID 6 disk set. RAID 6 breaks
up data into smaller blocks, calculates parity by performing an exclusive-or on the blocks, and then writes the blocks
of data and parity to each drive in the drive group. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter,
which is set during the creation of the RAID set.
RAID 60 can support up to 8 spans and tolerate up to 16 drive failures, though less than total drive capacity is
available. Two drive failures can be tolerated in each RAID 6 level drive group.
Table 14 RAID 60 Overview
Uses
Provides a high level of data protection through the use of a second parity block in each stripe. Use RAID 60 for
data that requires a very high level of protection from loss.
In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a RAID set in a virtual drive, the RAID controller uses the
parity blocks to re-create all of the missing information. If two drives in a RAID 6 set in a RAID 60 virtual drive
fail, two drive rebuilds are required, one for each drive. These rebuilds can occur at the same time.
Use for office automation and online customer service that requires fault tolerance. Use for any application
that has high read request rates but low write request rates.
Strong points
Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good performance in most environments. Each RAID 6 set can
survive the loss of two drives or the loss of a drive while another drive is being rebuilt. Provides the highest
level of protection against drive failures of all of the RAID levels. Read performance is similar to that of RAID 50,
though random reads in RAID 60 might be slightly faster because data is spread across at least one more disk
in each RAID 6 set.
Weak points
Not well suited to tasks requiring lot of writes. A RAID 60 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for
each write operation, which results in a significant decrease in performance during writes. Drive performance
is reduced during a drive rebuild. Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID
overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes. RAID 6 costs more
because of the extra capacity required by using two parity blocks per stripe.
Drives
A minimum of 8.
LSI Corporation
- 35 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Configuration Strategies
The following figure shows a RAID 60 data layout. The second set of parity drives is denoted by Q. The P drives follow
the RAID 5 parity scheme.
5$,'
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\4±4
3DULW\3±3
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\4±4
6HJPHQW
3DULW\4±4
3DULW\3±3
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\4±4
3DULW\3±3 6HJPHQW
3DULW\4±4 3DULW\3±3 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\4±4
3DULW\3±3
6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\3±3 6HJPHQW
3DULW\4±4
3DULW\3±3 6HJPHQW
6HJPHQW
3DULW\4±4
6HJPHQW
5$,'
3DULW\3±3
5$,'
5$,'
1RWH3DULW\LVGLVWULEXWHGDFURVVDOOGULYHVLQWKHGULYHJURXS
B
Figure 14 RAID 60 Level Virtual Drive
2.6
RAID Configuration Strategies
The following factors in RAID drive group configuration are most important:



Virtual drive availability (fault tolerance)
Virtual drive performance
Virtual drive capacity
You cannot configure a virtual drive that optimizes all three factors, but it is easy to choose a virtual drive
configuration that maximizes one factor at the expense of another factor. For example, RAID 1 (mirroring) provides
excellent fault tolerance, but requires a redundant drive.
The following subsections describe how to use the RAID levels to maximize virtual drive availability (fault tolerance),
virtual drive performance, and virtual drive capacity.
2.6.1
Maximizing Fault Tolerance
Fault tolerance is achieved through the ability to perform automatic and transparent rebuilds using hot spare drives
and hot swaps. A hot spare drive is an unused online available drive that the RAID controller instantly plugs into the
system when an active drive fails. After the hot spare is automatically moved into the RAID drive group, the failed drive
is automatically rebuilt on the spare drive. The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild
occurs.
A hot swap is the manual substitution of a replacement unit in a disk subsystem for a defective one, where the
substitution can be performed while the subsystem is running hot swap drives. Auto-Rebuild in the WebBIOS
Configuration Utility allows a failed drive to be replaced and automatically rebuilt by “hot-swapping” the drive in the
same drive bay. The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild occurs, providing a high degree
of fault tolerance and zero downtime.
LSI Corporation
- 36 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Configuration Strategies
Table 15 RAID Levels and Fault Tolerance
RAID
Level
Fault Tolerance
0
Does not provide fault tolerance. All data is lost if any drive fails. Disk striping writes data across multiple drives instead of just one drive.
It involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size. RAID 0 is ideal for applications that require high
performance but do not require fault tolerance.
1
Provides complete data redundancy. If one drive fails, the contents of the other drive in the drive group can be used to run the system
and reconstruct the failed drive.
The primary advantage of disk mirroring is that it provides 100 percent data redundancy. Because the contents of the drive are
completely written to a second drive, no data is lost if one of the drives fails. Both drives contain the same data at all times. RAID 1 is
ideal for any application that requires fault tolerance and minimal capacity.
5
Combines distributed parity with disk striping. Parity provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of
entire drives. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity data to reconstruct all missing information. In RAID 5, this method is
applied to entire drives or stripes across all drives in a drive group. Using distributed parity, RAID 5 offers fault tolerance with limited
overhead.
6
Combines distributed parity with disk striping. RAID 6 can sustain two drive failures and still maintain data integrity. Parity provides
redundancy for two drive failures without duplicating the contents of entire drives. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity
data to reconstruct all missing information. In RAID 6, this method is applied to entire drives or stripes across all of the drives in a drive
group. Using distributed parity, RAID 6 offers fault tolerance with limited overhead.
00
Does not provide fault tolerance. All data in a virtual drive is lost if any drive in that virtual drive fails. Disk striping writes data across
multiple drives instead of just one drive. It involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size. RAID 00 is
ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance.
10
Provides complete data redundancy using striping across spanned RAID 1 drive groups. RAID 10 works well for any environment that
requires the 100 percent redundancy offered by mirrored drive groups. RAID 10 can sustain a drive failure in each mirrored drive group
and maintain data integrity.
50
Provides data redundancy using distributed parity across spanned RAID 5 drive groups. RAID 50 includes both parity and disk striping
across multiple drives. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity data to re-create all missing information. RAID 50 can sustain
one drive failure per RAID 5 drive group and still maintain data integrity.
60
Provides data redundancy using distributed parity across spanned RAID 6 drive groups. RAID 60 can sustain two drive failures per RAID
6 drive group and still maintain data integrity. It provides the highest level of protection against drive failures of all of the RAID levels.
RAID 60 includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drives. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity data to re-create
all missing information.
LSI Corporation
- 37 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.6.2
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Configuration Strategies
Maximizing Performance
A RAID disk subsystem improves I/O performance. The RAID drive group appears to the host computer as a single
storage unit or as multiple virtual units. I/O is faster because drives can be accessed simultaneously. The following
table describes the performance for each RAID level.
Table 16 RAID Levels and Performance
RAID
Level
Performance
0
RAID 0 (striping) offers excellent performance. RAID 0 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then writes a block to each drive in the
drive group. Disk striping writes data across multiple drives instead of just one drive. It involves partitioning each drive storage space
into stripes that can vary in size from 8 KB to 1024 KB. These stripes are interleaved in a repeated sequential manner. Disk striping
enhances performance because multiple drives are accessed simultaneously.
1
With RAID 1 (mirroring), each drive in the system must be duplicated, which requires more time and resources than striping.
Performance is impaired during drive rebuilds.
5
RAID 5 provides high data throughput, especially for large files. Use this RAID level for any application that requires high read request
rates, but low write request rates, such as transaction processing applications, because each drive can read and write independently.
Because each drive contains both data and parity, numerous writes can take place concurrently. In addition, robust caching algorithms
and hardware-based exclusive-or assist make RAID 5 performance exceptional in many different environments.
Parity generation can slow the write process, making write performance significantly lower for RAID 5 than for RAID 0 or RAID 1. Drive
performance is reduced when a drive is being rebuilt. Clustering can also reduce drive performance. Environments with few processes
do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes.
6
RAID 6 works best when used with data that requires high reliability, high request rates, and high data transfer. It provides high data
throughput, data redundancy, and very good performance. However, RAID 6 is not well suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes. A RAID
6 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation, which results in a significant decrease in performance
during writes. Drive performance is reduced during a drive rebuild. Environments with few processes do not perform as well because
the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes.
00
RAID 00 (striping in a spanned drive group) offers excellent performance. RAID 00 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then writes a
block to each drive in the drive groups. Disk striping writes data across multiple drives instead of just one drive. Striping involves
partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size from 8 KB to 1024 KB. These stripes are interleaved in a repeated
sequential manner. Disk striping enhances performance because multiple drives are accessed simultaneously.
10
RAID 10 works best for data storage that need the enhanced I/O performance of RAID 0 (striped drive groups), which provides high
data transfer rates. Spanning increases the capacity of the virtual drive and improves performance by doubling the number of spindles.
The system performance improves as the number of spans increases. (The maximum number of spans is 8.) As the storage space in the
spans is filled, the system stripes data over fewer and fewer spans, and RAID performance degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 5 drive
group.
50
RAID 50 works best when used with data that requires high reliability, high request rates, and high data transfer. It provides high data
throughput, data redundancy, and very good performance. Spanning increases the capacity of the virtual drive and improves
performance by doubling the number of spindles. The system performance improves as the number of spans increases. (The maximum
number of spans is 8.) As the storage space in the spans is filled, the system stripes data over fewer and fewer spans and RAID
performance degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 5 drive group.
60
RAID 60 works best when used with data that requires high reliability, high request rates, and high data transfer. It provides high data
throughput, data redundancy, and very good performance. Spanning increases the capacity of the virtual drive and improves
performance by doubling the number of spindles. The system performance improves as the number of spans increases. (The maximum
number of spans is 8.) As the storage space in the spans is filled, the system stripes data over fewer and fewer spans, and RAID
performance degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 6 drive group.
RAID 60 is not well suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes. A RAID 60 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write
operation, which results in a significant decrease in performance during writes. Drive performance is reduced during a drive rebuild.
Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling
simultaneous processes.
LSI Corporation
- 38 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.6.3
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Configuration Strategies
Maximizing Storage Capacity
Storage capacity is an important factor when selecting a RAID level. There are several variables to consider. Striping
alone (RAID 0) requires less storage space than mirrored data (RAID 1) or distributed parity (RAID 5 or RAID 6). RAID 5,
which provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives, requires less space
than RAID 1. The following table explains the effects of the RAID levels on storage capacity.
Table 17 RAID Levels and Capacity
RAID
Level
Capacity
0
RAID 0 (striping) involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size. The combined storage space is
composed of stripes from each drive.
RAID 0 provides maximum storage capacity for a given set of drives. The usable capacity of a RAID 0 array is equal to the number of
drives in the array into the capacity of the smallest drive in the array.
1
With RAID 1 (mirroring), data written to one drive is simultaneously written to another drive, which doubles the required data storage
capacity. This situation is expensive because each drive in the system must be duplicated. The usable capacity of a RAID 1 array is equal
to the capacity of the smaller of the two drives in the array.
5
RAID 5 provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives. RAID 5 breaks up data into smaller
blocks, calculates parity by performing an exclusive-or on the blocks and then writes the blocks of data and parity to each drive in the
drive group. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter, which is set during the creation of the RAID set. The
usable capacity of a RAID 5 array is equal to the number of drives in the array, minus one, into the capacity of the smallest drive in the
array.
6
RAID 6 provides redundancy for two drive failures without duplicating the contents of entire drives. However, it requires extra capacity
because it uses two parity blocks per stripe. This makes RAID 60 more expensive to implement. The usable capacity of a RAID 6 array is
equal to the number of drives in the array, minus two, into the capacity of the smallest drive in the array.
00
RAID 00 (striping in a spanned drive group) involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size. The
combined storage space is composed of stripes from each drive. RAID 00 provides maximum storage capacity for a given set of drives.
10
RAID 10 requires twice as many drives as all other RAID levels except RAID 1.
RAID 10 works well for medium-sized databases or any environment that requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate-tomedium capacity. Disk spanning allows multiple drives to function like one large drive. Spanning overcomes lack of disk space and
simplifies storage management by combining existing resources or adding relatively inexpensive resources.
50
RAID 50 requires two to four times as many parity drives as RAID 5. This RAID level works best when used with data that requires
medium to large capacity.
60
RAID 60 provides redundancy for two drive failures in each RAID set without duplicating the contents of entire drives. However, it
requires extra capacity because a RAID 60 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation. This situation
makes RAID 60 more expensive to implement.
LSI Corporation
- 39 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.7
RAID Availability
2.7.1
RAID Availability Concept
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
RAID Availability
Data availability without downtime is essential for many types of data processing and storage systems. Businesses
want to avoid the financial costs and customer frustration associated with failed servers. RAID helps you maintain data
availability and avoid downtime for the servers that provide that data. RAID offers several features, such as spare
drives and rebuilds, that you can use to fix any drive problems, while keeping the servers running and data available.
The following subsections describe these features.
Spare Drives
You can use spare drives to replace failed or defective drives in a drive group. A replacement drive must be at least as
large as the drive it replaces. Spare drives include hot swaps, hot spares, and cold swaps.
A hot swap is the manual substitution of a replacement unit in a disk subsystem for a defective one, where the
substitution can be performed while the subsystem is running (performing its normal functions). The backplane and
enclosure must support hot swap in order for the functionality to work.
Hot spare drives are drives that power up along with the RAID drives and operate in a Standby state. If a drive used in
a RAID virtual drive fails, a hot spare automatically takes its place, and the data on the failed drive is rebuilt on the hot
spare. Hot spares can be used for RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
NOTE If a rebuild to a hot spare fails for any reason, the hot spare drive will be marked as “failed.” If the source drive
fails, both the source drive and the hot spare drive will be marked as “failed.”
A cold swap requires that you power down the system before replacing a defective drive in a disk subsystem.
Rebuilding
If a drive fails in a drive group that is configured as a RAID 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60 virtual drive, you can recover the lost
data by rebuilding the drive. If you have configured hot spares, the RAID controller automatically tries to use them to
rebuild failed drives. Manual rebuild is necessary if hot spares with enough capacity to rebuild the failed drives are not
available. You must insert a drive with enough storage into the subsystem before rebuilding the failed drive.
2.8
Configuration Planning
Factors to consider when planning a configuration are the number of drives the RAID controller can support, the
purpose of the drive group, and the availability of spare drives.
Each type of data stored in the disk subsystem has a different frequency of read and write activity. If you know the
data access requirements, you can more successfully determine a strategy for optimizing the disk subsystem capacity,
availability, and performance.
Servers that support video-on-demand typically read the data often, but write data infrequently. Both the read and
write operations tend to be long. Data stored on a general-purpose file server involves relatively short read and write
operations with relatively small files.
LSI Corporation
- 40 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.9
Chapter 2: Introduction to RAID
Number of Drives
Number of Drives
Your configuration planning for the SAS RAID controller depends in part on the number of drives that you want to use
in a RAID drive group.
The number of drives in a drive group determines the RAID levels that can be supported. Only one RAID level can be
assigned to each virtual drive.
Drive Group Purpose
Important factors to consider when creating RAID drive groups include availability, performance, and capacity. Define
the major purpose of the drive group by answering questions related to these factors, such as the following, which are
followed by suggested RAID levels for each situation:




Will this drive group increase the system storage capacity for general-purpose file and print servers? Use RAID 5, 6,
10, 50, or 60.
Does this drive group support any software system that must be available 24 hours per day? Use RAID 1, 5, 6, 10,
50, or 60.
Will the information stored in this drive group contain large audio or video files that must be available on
demand? Use RAID 0 or 00.
Will this drive group contain data from an imaging system? Use RAID 0, 00, or 10.
Fill out the following table to help you plan the drive group configuration. Rank the requirements for your drive group,
such as storage space and data redundancy, in order of importance, and then review the suggested RAID levels.
Table 18 Factors to Consider for Drive Group Configuration
Requirement
Rank
Suggested RAID Levels
Storage space
RAID 0, RAID 5, RAID 00
Data redundancy
RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10, RAID 50, RAID 60
Drive performance and throughput
RAID 0, RAID 00, RAID 10
Hot spares (extra drives required)
RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10, RAID 50, RAID 60
LSI Corporation
- 41 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Overview
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
This chapter describes the WebBIOS configuration utility (CU), which enables you to create and manage RAID
configurations on LSI SAS controllers.
3.1
Overview
The WebBIOS configuration utility, unlike the MegaRAID Storage Manager software, resides in the SAS controller BIOS
and operates independently of the operating system.
You can use the WebBIOS configuration utility to perform the following tasks:










Create drive groups and virtual drives for storage configurations.
Display controller, drive, virtual drive, and battery backup unit (BBU) properties, and change parameters.
Delete virtual drives.
Migrate a storage configuration to a different RAID level.
Detect configuration mismatches.
Import a foreign configuration.
Scan devices connected to the controller.
Initialize virtual drives.
Check configurations for data consistency.
Create a CacheCade configuration.
The WebBIOS configuration utility provides a configuration wizard to guide you through the configuration of virtual
drives and drive groups.
3.2
Starting the WebBIOS Configuration Utility
To start the WebBIOS configuration utility, perform the following steps:
1.
When the host computer is booting, press and hold down the Ctrl key and press the H key when the following
text appears on the dialog:
Copyright© LSI Corporation Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS
The Controller Selection dialog appears.
2.
If the system has multiple SAS controllers, select a controller.
3.
Click Start to continue.
The main WebBIOS Configuration Utility dialog appears.
NOTE On systems that do not have the PS2 port, you must enable 'port 60/64 emulation' in the System BIOS to
emulate USB as PS2. When this option is disabled on this system, WebBIOS does not work.
LSI Corporation
- 42 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.3
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
WebBIOS Configuration Utility Main Dialog Options
WebBIOS Configuration Utility Main Dialog Options
Figure 15 WebBIOS Configuration Utility Main Dialog
In the right frame, the dialog shows the virtual drives configured on the controller, and the drives that are connected
to the controller. In addition, the dialog identifies drives that are foreign or missing.
NOTE In the list of virtual drives, the drive nodes are sorted based on the order in which you added the drives to the
drive group, rather than the physical slot order that displays in the physical trees. The minimum dialog resolution for
WebBIOS is 640 x 480.
To toggle between the Physical view and the Logical view of the storage devices connected to the controller, click
Physical View or Logical View in the menu in the left frame. When the Logical View dialog appears, it shows the drive
groups that are configured on this controller.
NOTE Unconfigured Bad drives are only displayed in the Physical View.
For drives in an enclosure, the dialog shows the following drive information:





Enclosure
Slot
Interface type (such as SAS or SATA)
Drive type (HDD or SSD)
Drive size
LSI Corporation
- 43 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012

Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
WebBIOS Configuration Utility Main Dialog Options
Drive status (such as Online or Unconfigured Good)
The toolbar at the top of the WebBIOS configuration utility has the following buttons, as listed in the following table.
Table 19 WebBIOS Configuration Utililty Toolbar Icons
Icon
Description
Click this icon to return to the main dialog from any other WebBIOS
configuration utility dialog.
Click this icon to return to the previous dialog that you were viewing.
Click this icon to exit the WebBIOS configuration utility wizard.
Click this icon to turn off the sound on the onboard controller alarm.
Click this icon to display information about the WebBIOS configuration utility
version, bus number, and device number.
The following is a description of the options listed on the left frame of the WebBIOS configuration utility main dialog
(the hotkey shortcut for each option is shown in parentheses next to the option name):










Advanced Software Options (Alt+a): Select this option to enable the advanced features in the controller. For
more information, see section Section 3.4.1, Managing MegaRAID Advanced Software Options.
Controller Selection (Alt+c): Select this option to view the Controller Selection dialog, where you can select a
different SAS controller. You can also view information about the controller and the devices connected to it, or
create a new configuration on the controller.
Controller Properties (Alt+p): Select this option to view the properties of the currently selected SAS controller.
For more information, see Section 3.8.1, Viewing Controller Properties.
Scan Devices (Alt+s): Select this option to have the WebBIOS configuration utility re-scan the physical and virtual
drives for any changes in the drive status or the physical configuration. The WebBIOS configuration utility displays
the results of the scan in the physical and virtual drive descriptions.
Virtual Drives (Alt+v): Select this option to view the Virtual Drives dialog, where you can change and view
virtual drive properties, delete virtual drives, initialize drives, and perform other tasks. For more information, see
Section 3.8.2, Viewing Virtual Drive Properties, Policies, and Operations.
Drives (Alt+d): Select this option to view the Drives dialog, where you can view drive properties, create hot
spares, and perform other tasks. For more information, see Section 3.8.3, Viewing Drive Properties.
Configuration Wizard (Alt+o): Select this option to start the Configuration Wizard and create a new storage
configuration, clear a configuration, or add a configuration. For more information, see Section 3.5, Creating a
Storage Configuration.
Logical View/Physical View (Alt+l for the Logical view; Alt+h for the Physical view): Select this option to toggle
between the Physical View dialog and the Logical View dialog.
Events (Alt+e): Select this option to view system events in the Event Information dialog. For more information,
see Section 3.14, Viewing System Event Information.
Exit (Alt+x): Select this option to exit the WebBIOS configuration utility and continue with system boot.
LSI Corporation
- 44 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.4
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Managing Software Licensing
The MegaRAID advanced software offers the software license key feature to enable the advanced options in WebBIOS.
The license key, also known as the Activation key is used to transfer the advanced features from one controller to
another by configuring the Key Vault.
You need to configure the Advanced Software Options menu present in the WebBIOS main dialog to use the
advanced features present in the controller.
3.4.1
Managing MegaRAID Advanced Software Options
Perform the following steps to configure the Advanced Software Options wizard to enable the advanced options
using the activation key.
1.
Click Advanced Software Options menu on the WebBIOS main dialog.
The Advanced Software Options wizard appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16 Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Wizard
LSI Corporation
- 45 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
NOTE When you click the Advanced Software Options menu in the main WebBIOS dialog, if re-hosting is not
required, the Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options dialog appears; otherwise, if the user decides to
opt for the re-hosting process, the Confirm Re-hosting Process dialog appears.
The Activated Advanced Software Options field consists of Advanced Software Options, License, and Mode
columns.
The Advanced Software Options column displays the list of advanced software features available in the
controller.
— The License column displays the license details for the list of advanced software options present in the
Advanced Software Options column. The license details validates if the software is under trial period, or if it
can be used without any trial period (Unlimited).
— The Mode column displays the current status of the advanced software. The current status can be Secured,
Not secured, or Factory installed.
—
Both the Safe ID and the Serial Number fields consist of a pre-defined value internally generated by the
controller.
2.
Click Activate.
The Advanced Software Options Summary Wizard appears.
3.
Click Configure Key Vault.
The Confirm Re-hosting Process Dialog appears.
The Configure Key Vault button is conditional, and appears in two scenarios.
—
Scenario 1
When features have been transferred from NVRAM to key vault, and no re-hosting is required, the Configure
Key Vault button is not displayed.
—
Scenario 2
When the re-hosting process needs to be completed, the Configure Key Vault button appears.
4.
Click Deactivate All Trial Software.
The Deactivate All Trial Advanced Software Options dialog appears.
To deactivate the software that is being used with a trial key, click Yes; otherwise, click No.
When the activation key is improper in the Activation field in the Advanced Software Options wizard, the
following messages appear based on the scenarios.
—
Scenario 1
If you enter an invalid activation key, the following message appears.
Figure 17 Invalid Activation Key Message
LSI Corporation
- 46 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
—
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Scenario 2
If you leave the activation key field blank or enter space characters, the following message appears.
Figure 18 Cannot Activate Advanced Software Options Message
—
Scenario 3
If you enter an incorrect activation key, and if there is a mismatch between the activation key and the
controller, the following message appears.
Figure 19 Activation Key Mismatch Message
3.4.2
Reusing the Activation Key
If you are using an existing activated key, the features are transferred to the key vault, and the message appears as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 20 Reusing the Activation Key
LSI Corporation
- 47 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.4.3
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Managing Advanced Software Summary
When you click Activate in Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options dialog, the Advanced Software
Options Summary wizard appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21 Advanced Software Options Summary Wizard
The Summary field displays the list of the advanced software options along with their former status and new status in
the controller.



The Advanced Software Options column displays the currently available software in the controller.
The Former Status column displays the status of the available advanced software prior to entering the activation
key.
The New Status column displays the status of the available advanced software, after entering the activation key.
LSI Corporation
- 48 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.4.4
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Activating an Unlimited Key Over a Trial Key
When you activate an unlimited key over a trial key, the Review the summary and go back if you need
to make corrections message appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 22 Activating an Unlimited Key over a Trial Key
LSI Corporation
- 49 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.4.5
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Activating a Trial Software
When you activate a trial software, the This trial software expires in 30 days message appears, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 23 Activating a Trial Software Application
LSI Corporation
- 50 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.4.6
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Activating an Unlimited Key
When you activate an unlimited key, the Review the summary and go back if you need to make
corrections message appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 24 Activating an Unlimited Key
LSI Corporation
- 51 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.4.7
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Securing MR Advanced SW
If the advanced software is not secured, when you click the Configure Key Vault button in the Advanced Software
Options wizard, the WebBIOS Secure MegaRAID Advanced Software Options dialog box appears, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 25 Secure Advanced Software Options
LSI Corporation
- 52 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.4.8
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Confirm Re-hosting Process
The confirming re-hosting process involves the process of transferring or re-hosting the advanced software features
from one controller to another.
When you need to transfer the features from one controller (example, controller 1) to another controller (example,
controller 2) and in the controller 2 NVRAM, if there are some features that need to be transferred to key vault, the
Confirm Re-hosting Process dialog appears as shown in the following figure.
Perform the following steps to confirm the re-hosting process.
1.
Click the Configure Key Vault button in the Advanced Software Options wizard.
The Confirm Re-hosting Process wizard appears as shown in the following figure.
Figure 26 Confirm Re-hosting Process Dialog
2.
Select the I acknowledge that I have completed the re-hosting process in the LSI Advanced Software
License Management Portal check box.
3.
Click Next.
The Manage Advanced Software Options Summary dialog appears as shown in Figure 21 on page 48.
LSI Corporation
- 53 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.4.9
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Software Licensing
Re-hosting Process Complete
In a scenario where only key vault feature needs to be transferred from controller 1 to controller 2, the Re-hosting
Process Complete dialog appears as shown in the following figure.
Figure 27 Re-hosting Process Complete Dialog
1.
Select the I acknowledge that I have completed the re-hosting process in the LSI Advanced Software
License Management Portal check box.
2.
Click Next.
The Manage MegaRAID Advanced Software Options wizard appears.
The rehosting process is completed.
NOTE If you click Next in the Re-hosting Process Complete dialog, if re-hosting is not complete, the features are
not copied into the key vault, and the features remain in the key vault itself, but you can still use the advanced
features.
LSI Corporation
- 54 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.5
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Creating a Storage Configuration
This section explains how to use the WebBIOS configuration utility Configuration wizard to configure RAID drive
groups and virtual drives to create storage configurations.
Follow these steps to start the Configuration wizard, and select a configuration option and mode:
1.
Click Configuration Wizard on the WebBIOS main dialog.
The first Configuration Wizard dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 28 WebBIOS Configuration Wizard Dialog
2.
Select a configuration option.
ATTENTION f you choose the first or second option, all existing data in the configuration will be deleted. Make a
backup of any data that you want to keep before you choose an option.
Clear Configuration: Clears the existing configuration.
New Configuration: Clears the existing configuration and lets you create a new configuration.
— Add Configuration: Retains the existing storage configuration and adds new drives to it (this option does
not cause any data loss).
—
—
LSI Corporation
- 55 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Click Next.
A dialog box warns that you will lose data if you select Clear Configuration or New Configuration.
The Convert JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Drives dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE The JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Drives dialog appears only if the system detects JBOD drives.
Figure 29 JBOD Drives to Unconfigured Good Dialog
LSI Corporation
- 56 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Click Next.
The WebBIOS Configuration Method dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 30 WebBIOS Configuration Method Wizard
5.
Select a configuration mode:
Manual Configuration: Allows you to control all attributes of the new storage configuration as you create
drive groups and virtual drives, and set their parameters.
— Automatic Configuration: Automatically creates an optimal RAID configuration.
—
If you select Automatic Configuration, you can choose whether to create a redundant RAID drive group or a
non-redundant RAID 0 drive group. Select one of the following options in the Redundancy drop-down list:
Redundancy when possible
— No redundancy
—
If you select Automatic Configuration, you can choose whether to use a drive security method. Select one of the
following options in the Drive Security Method drop-down list:
No Encryption
— Full Disk Encryption
—
6.
Click Next to continue.
If you select the Automatic Configuration radio button, continue with Section, Using Automatic Configuration. If you
select Manual Configuration, continue with Section, Using Manual Configuration.
LSI Corporation
- 57 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.5.1
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Using Automatic Configuration
Follow these instructions to create a configuration with automatic configuration, either with or without redundancy:
1.
When WebBIOS displays the proposed new configuration, review the information on the dialog, and click Accept
to accept it. (Or click Back to go back and change the configuration.)
RAID 0: If you select Automatic Configuration and No Redundancy, WebBIOS creates a RAID 0
configuration.
— RAID 1: If you select Automatic Configuration and Redundancy when possible, and only two drives are
available, WebBIOS creates a RAID 1 configuration.
— RAID 5: If you select Automatic Configuration and Redundancy when possible, and three or more drives
are available, WebBIOS creates a RAID 5 configuration.
— RAID 6: If you select Automatic Configuration and Redundancy when possible, and the RAID 6 option is
enabled, and three or more drives are available, WebBIOS creates a RAID 6 configuration.
—
2.
Click Yes when you are prompted to save the configuration.
3.
Click Yes when you are prompted to initialize the new virtual drives.
WebBIOS configuration utility begins a background initialization of the virtual drives.
New RAID 5 virtual drives and new RAID 6 virtual drives require a minimum number of drives for a background
initialization to start. If there are fewer drives, the background initialization will not start. The following number of
drives is required:
New RAID 5 virtual drives must have at least five drives for a background initialization to start.
— New RAID 6 virtual drives must have at least seven drives for a background initialization to start.
—
3.5.2
Using Manual Configuration
This section contains the procedures for creating RAID drive groups for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 00, 10, 50, and 60.
The following procedures include setting virtual drive options. These options are explained in the SectionVirtual
Drive Options which appears prior to the manual configuration procedures.
3.5.2.1
Virtual Drive Options
This section explains the virtual drive options that are set using the manual procedures for creating RAID drive groups
for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 00, 10, 50, and 60.


RAID Level: The drop-down list shows the possible RAID levels for the virtual drive.
— RAID 0: Select this option for RAID 0.
— RAID 1: Select this option for RAID 1.
— RAID 5: Select this option for RAID 5.
— RAID 6: Select this option for RAID 6.
— RAID 00: Select this option for RAID 00.
— RAID 10: Select this option for RAID 10.
— RAID 50: Select this option for RAID 50.
— RAID 60: Select this option for RAID 60.
Strip Size: The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group. The stripe
consists of the data segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not including parity drives.
For example, consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in
the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB, and the strip size is 16 KB. You can set the strip size to 8 KB, 16 KB,
32 KB, 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, and 1024 KB. A larger strip size produces higher read performance. If your
computer regularly performs random read requests, choose a smaller strip size. The default is 64 KB.
LSI Corporation
- 58 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
NOTE WebBIOS does not allow you to select 8 KB as the strip size when you create a RAID 6 drive group with three
drives or a RAID 60 drive group with six drives.



Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this virtual drive.
— RW: Allow read/write access. This is the default.
— Read Only: Allow read-only access.
— Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive.
— No Read Ahead: This option disables the read ahead capability. This option is the default.
— Always Read Ahead: This option enables read ahead capability, which allows the controller to read
sequentially ahead of requested data and to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating that the
data will be needed soon. This option speeds up reads for sequential data, but there is little improvement
when accessing random data.
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive.
— Always Write Back: In Write back mode, the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host
when the controller cache has received all of the data in a transaction. This setting is recommended in
Standard mode.
— Write Through: In Write through mode, the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host
when the drive subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction. This option is the default setting.
— Write Back with BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use Write back mode but the controller
has no BBU or the BBU is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller firmware automatically switches
to Write through mode if it detects a bad or missing BBU.
NOTE Write back mode can be used with or without a BBU. Use either a battery to protect the controller cache, or
an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to protect the entire system. If you do not use a battery or a UPS, and a
power failure occurs, you risk losing the data in the controller cache.



IO Policy: The IO policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive. It does not affect the read ahead cache.
— Direct: In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the
host concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes from cache memory. This option is the
default setting.
— Cached: In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache memory.
Drive Cache: Specify the drive cache policy.
— Enable: Enable the drive cache.
— Disable: Disable the drive cache. This option is the default setting.
— Unchanged: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
Disable BGI: Specify the Background Initialization (BGI) status.
— No: Leave background initialization enabled, which means that a new configuration can be initialized in the
background while you use WebBIOS to perform other configuration tasks. This option is the default setting.
— Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background initializations for configurations on this controller.
NOTE New RAID 5 virtual drives require at least five drives for a background initialization to start. New RAID 6
virtual drives require at least seven drives for a background initialization to start.


Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive in MB, GB, or TB. Usually, this is the full size for RAID 0, RAID1, RAID
5, RAID 6, RAID 00, RAID 10, RAID 50, or RAID 60 shown in the Configuration panel on the right. You can specify a
smaller size if you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
Update Size: Click Update Size to update the Select size value for the selected RAID levels.
LSI Corporation
- 59 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.5.2.2
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0
RAID 0 provides drive striping across all drives in the RAID drive group. RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy
but does offer excellent performance. RAID 0 is ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require
fault tolerance. RAID 0 also denotes an independent or single drive.
NOTE RAID level 0 is not fault-tolerant. If a drive in a RAID 0 drive group fails, the whole virtual drive (all drives
associated with the virtual drive) fails.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Drive Group Definition dialog appears. Use this dialog
to select drives to create drive groups.
1.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting two or more unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel on the left
until you have selected all desired drives for the drive group.
2.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right, as shown in the following figure.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
3.
Choose whether to use power save mode.
4.
Choose whether to use drive encryption.
Figure 31 Drive Group Definition Dialog
5.
After you finish selecting drives for the drive group, click Accept DG.
6.
Click Next.
The Span Definition dialog appears. This dialog shows the drive group holes that you can select to add to a span.
7.
Under the Array With Free Space frame, select a drive group, and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select appears in the right frame under Span.
LSI Corporation
- 60 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
8.
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition dialog appears, as shown in the following figure. This dialog lists the possible RAID
levels for the drive group.
9.
Use this dialog to select the RAID level, strip size, read policy, and other attributes for the new virtual drives.
Figure 32 Virtual Drive Definition
10. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the dialog as needed.
NOTE For specific information about virtual drive options, see Section Virtual Drive Options.
11. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition.
A confirmation dialog appears.
12. To confirm your changes, click Yes. Otherwise, to undo the changes, select the virtual drive and click Reclaim.
LSI Corporation
- 61 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
13. Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 33 RAID 0 Configuration Preview Dialog
14. Check the information in the Configuration Preview dialog.
15. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to
return to the previous dialogs and change the configuration.
16. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
Another confirmation for initialization appears.
17. Click No to view the WebBIOS main menu. Otherwise, click Yes and the initialization process takes place, and the
WebBIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.5.2.3
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1
In RAID 1, the RAID controller duplicates all data from one drive to a second drive. RAID 1 provides complete data
redundancy, but at the cost of doubling the required data storage capacity. It is appropriate for small databases or any
other environment that requires fault tolerance but small capacity.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Drive Group Definition dialog appears. Use this dialog
to select drives to create drive groups.
1.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while you select at least two unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel on the left.
You must select an even number of drives.
2.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right, as shown in the following figure.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
LSI Corporation
- 62 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
3.
Choose whether to use power save mode.
4.
Choose whether to use drive encryption.
Figure 34 Drive Group Definition Dialog
NOTE A RAID 1 virtual drive can contain up to 16 drive groups and 32 drives in a single span. (Other factors, such
as the type of controller, can limit the number of drives.) You must use two drives in each RAID 1 drive group in the
span.
5.
After you finish selecting drives for the drive group, click Accept DG.
6.
Click Next.
The Span Definition dialog appears. This dialog shows the drive group holes that you can select to add to a span.
You use this dialog to select the RAID level, strip size, read policy, and other attributes for the new virtual drives.
7.
Under the Array With Free Space frame, select a drive group, and click Add to SPAN
The drive group you select appears in the right frame under Span.
8.
Click Next. The WebBIOS Configuration UtilityVirtual Drive Definitiondialog appears.
9.
Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the dialog as needed.
NOTE For specific information about virtual drive options, see Section Virtual Drive Options.
10. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition.
A confirmation dialog appears.
11. To confirm your changes, click Yes. Otherwise, to undo the changes, select the virtual drive and click Reclaim.
LSI Corporation
- 63 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
12. Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 35 RAID 1 Configuration Preview Dialog
13. Check the information in the Configuration Preview dialog.
14. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to
return to the previous dialogs and change the configuration.
15. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
Another confirmation for initialization appears.
16. Click No to view the WebBIOS main menu. Otherwise, click Yes and the initialization process takes place, and the
WebBIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.5.2.4
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 5
RAID 5 uses drive striping at the block level and parity. In RAID 5, the parity information is written to all drives. It is best
suited for networks that perform a lot of small input/output (I/O) transactions simultaneously. RAID 5 provides data
redundancy, high read rates, and good performance in most environments. It also provides redundancy with lowest
loss of capacity.
RAID 5 provides high data throughput. RAID 5 is useful for transaction processing applications because each drive can
read and write independently. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity drive to re-create all missing
information. You can use RAID 5 for office automation and online customer service that require fault tolerance.
In addition, RAID 5 is good for any application that has high read request rates but low write request rates.
LSI Corporation
- 64 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Drive Group Definition dialog appears. You use this
dialog to select drives to create drive groups.
1.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while you select at least three unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel on the
left.
2.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right, as shown in the following figure.
3.
Choose whether to use power save mode.
4.
Choose whether to use drive encryption.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
Figure 36 Drive Group Definition Dialog
5.
After you finish selecting drives for the drive group, click Accept DG.
6.
Click Next
The Span Definition dialog appears. This dialog shows the drive group holes that you can select to add to a span.
7.
Under the Array With Free Space frame, select a drive group, and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select appears in the right frame under Span.
8.
Click Next.
The WebBIOS Configuration UtilityVirtual Drive Definitiondialog appears.
9.
Use this dialog to select the RAID level, strip size, read policy, and other attributes for the new virtual drives.
10. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the dialog as needed.
NOTE For specific information about virtual drive options, see Section Virtual Drive Options.
LSI Corporation
- 65 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
11. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition.
A confirmation dialog appears.
12. To confirm your changes, click Yes. Otherwise, to undo the changes, select the virtual drive and click Reclaim.
13. Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 37 RAID 5 Configuration Preview Dialog
14. Check the information in the Configuration Preview dialog.
15. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save the configuration. Otherwise, click Cancel to
end the operation dialogs and return to the WebBIOS main menu, or click Back to return to the previous dialogs
and change the configuration.
16. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
Another confirmation for initialization appears.
17. Click No to view the WebBIOS main menu. Otherwise, click Yes and the initialization process takes place, and the
WebBIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.5.2.5
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 6
RAID 6 is similar to RAID 5 (drive striping and distributed parity), except that instead of one parity block per stripe,
there are two. With two independent parity blocks, RAID 6 can survive the loss of any two drives in a virtual drive
without losing data. Use RAID 6 for data that requires a very high level of protection from loss.
RAID 6 is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small input/output (I/O) transactions simultaneously. It
provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good performance in most environments.
LSI Corporation
- 66 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a virtual drive, the RAID controller uses the parity blocks to recreate
all of the missing information. If two drives in a RAID 6 virtual drive fail, two drive rebuilds are required, one for each
drive. These rebuilds do not occur at the same time. The controller rebuilds one failed drive, and then the other failed
drive.
Integrated MegaRAID displays new drives as Just a Bunch of Disks (JBOD). For MegaRAID, unless the inserted drive
contains valid DDF metadata, new drives display as JBOD. Rebuilds start only on Unconfigured Good drives, so you
have to change the new drive state from JBOD to Unconfigured Good to start a rebuild.
When you select Manual Configuration, and click Next, the WebBIOS Drive Group Definition dialog appears. You
use this dialog to select drives to create drive groups.
1.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while you select at least three unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel on the
left.
2.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right, as shown in the following figure.
3.
Choose weather to use power save mode.
4.
Choose whether to use drive encryption.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
The drop-down list in the Encryption field lists the options.
Figure 38 Drive Group Definition Dialog
5.
After you finish selecting drives for the drive group, click Accept DG for each drive.
6.
Click Next
The Span Definition dialog appears. This dialog shows the drive group holes that you can select to add to a span.
LSI Corporation
- 67 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
7.
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Under the Array With Free Space frame, select a drive group, and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select appears in the right frame under Span.
8.
Click Next.
The WebBIOS Configuration UtilityVirtual Drive Definitiondialog appears.
9.
Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the dialog as needed.
NOTE For specific information about virtual drive options, see Section Virtual Drive Options.
10. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition.
A confirmation dialog appears.
11. To confirm your changes, click Yes. Otherwise, to undo the changes, select the virtual drive and click Reclaim.
12. Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 39 RAID 6 Configuration Preview Dialog
13. Check the information in the Configuration Preview dialog.
14. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to
return to the previous dialogs and change the configuration.
15. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
Another confirmation for initialization appears.
16. Click No to view the WebBIOS main menu. Otherwise, click Yes and the initialization process takes place, and the
WebBIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 68 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.5.2.6
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 00
A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups. It breaks
up data into smaller blocks and then stripes the blocks of data to RAID 00 drive groups. The size of each block is
determined by the stripe size parameter, which is 64 KB.
RAID 00 does not provide any data redundancy but does offer excellent performance. RAID 00 is ideal for applications
that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the WebBIOS Drive Group Definition dialog appears.
You use the Drive Group Definition dialog to select drives to create drive groups.
1.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while you select unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel on the left.
2.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
3.
Click Accept DG to create a first drive group.
An icon for the next drive group appears in the right panel.
4.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while you select the same number of unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel
(that were selected for the first drive group) to create a second drive group.
5.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a second drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel, as
shown in the following figure.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
NOTE RAID 00 supports a maximum of eight spans, with a maximum of 32 drives per span. (Other factors, such as
the type of controller, can limit the number of drives.)
6.
Choose whether to use drive encryption.
7.
Choose whether to use power save mode.
8.
Click Accept DG to create a second drive group.
LSI Corporation
- 69 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Figure 40 Drive Group Definition Dialog
9.
Repeat step 1through step 5 until you have created all the required drive groups.
LSI Corporation
- 70 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
10. Click Next.
The Span Definition dialog appears, as shown in the following figure. This dialog shows the drive group holes
that you can select to add to a span.
Figure 41 Span Definition Dialog
11. Under the Array With Free Space frame, select a drive group, and then click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select appears in the right frame under Span.
12. Repeat the previous steps until you have selected all of the drive groups that you want.
13. Click Next.
The WebBIOS Configuration UtilityVirtual Drive Definitiondialog appears.
14. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the dialog as needed.
NOTE For specific information about virtual drive options, see Section, Virtual Drive Options.
15. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition.
A confirmation dialog appears.
16. To confirm your changes, click Yes. Otherwise, to undo the changes, select the virtual drive and click Reclaim.
17. After you finish defining the virtual drives, click Next.
The Configuration Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 71 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Figure 42 RAID 00 Configuration Preview Dialog
18. Check the information in the Configuration Preview dialog.
19. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save the configuration. Otherwise, click Cancel to
end the operation and return to the WebBIOS main menu, or click Back to return to the previous dialogs and
change the configuration.
20. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
Another confirmation for initialization appears.
21. Click No to view the WebBIOS main menu. Otherwise, click Yes and the initialization process takes place, and the
WebBIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.5.2.7
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10
RAID 10, a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0, has mirrored drives. It breaks up data into smaller blocks, then stripes
the blocks of data to each RAID 1 drive group. Each RAID 1 drive group then duplicates its data to its other drive. The
size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter, which is 64 KB. RAID 10 can sustain one drive failure in
each drive group while maintaining data integrity.
RAID 10 provides both high data transfer rates and complete data redundancy. It works best for data storage that
must have 100 percent redundancy of RAID 1 (mirrored drive groups) and that also needs the enhanced I/O
performance of RAID 0 (striped drive groups); it works well for medium-sized databases or any environment that
requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate to medium capacity.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Drive Group Definition dialog appears.
You use the Drive Group Definition dialog to select drives to create drive groups.
1.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting two unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel on the left.
LSI Corporation
- 72 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed two-drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel
on the right.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
3.
Click Accept DG to create a first drive group.
An icon for the next drive group appears in the right panel.
4.
Click the icon for the next drive group to select it.
5.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting same number of unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel to
create a second RAID 1 drive group with two drives.
6.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a second drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel, as
shown in the following figure.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
7.
Choose whether to use power saving.
8.
Choose whether to use drive encryption.
NOTE RAID 10 supports a maximum of eight spans, with a maximum of 32 drives per span. (Other factors, such as
the type of controller, can limit the number of drives.) You must use an even number of drives in each RAID 10 drive
group in the span.
Figure 43 Drive Group Definition Dialog
9.
Repeat step 1 through step 6 until you have created all the required drive groups.
10. Click Next.
The Span Definition dialog appears, as shown in the following figure. This dialog displays the drive group holes
you can select to add to a span.
LSI Corporation
- 73 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Figure 44 Span Definition Dialog
11. Under the Array With Free Space column, select a drive and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the heading Span.
12. Select another drive group and click Add to SPAN.
If there are additional drive groups with two drives each, you can add them to the Span.
13. Click Next.
The WebBIOS Configuration UtilityVirtual Drive Definitiondialog appears.
NOTE The WebBIOS Configuration Utility shows the maximum available capacity while creating the RAID 10 drive
group. In version 1.03 of the utility, the maximum size of the RAID 10 drive group is the sum total of the two RAID
1 drive groups. In version 1.1, the maximum size is the size of the smaller drive group multiplied by 2.
14. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the dialog as needed.
NOTE For specific information about virtual drive options, see Section, Virtual Drive Options.
15. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition.
A confirmation dialog appears.
16. To confirm your changes, click Yes. Otherwise, to undo the changes, select the virtual drive and click Reclaim.
17. After you finish defining the virtual drives, click Next.
The Configuration Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 74 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Figure 45 RAID 10 Configuration Preview Dialog
18. Check the information in the Configuration Preview dialog.
19. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save the configuration. Otherwise, click Cancel to
end the operation and return to the WebBIOS main menu, or click Back to return to the previous dialogs and
change the configuration.
20. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
Another confirmation for initialization appears.
21. Click No to view the WebBIOS main menu. Otherwise, click Yes and the initialization process takes place, and the
WebBIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.5.2.8
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 50
RAID 50 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 5. RAID 50 uses both distributed parity and drive striping
across multiple drive groups. It provides high data throughput, data redundancy, and very good performance. It is
best implemented on two RAID 5 drive groups with data striped across both drive groups. Though multiple drive
failures can be tolerated, only one drive failure can be tolerated in each RAID 5 level drive group.
RAID 50 is appropriate when used with data that requires high reliability, high request rates, high data transfer, and
medium-to-large capacity.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Drive Group Definition dialog appears. You use this
dialog to select drives to create drive group.
1.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting at least three unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel on the left.
2.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right.
LSI Corporation
- 75 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
3.
Click Accept DG to create a first drive group.
An icon for a second drive group appears in the right panel.
4.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting the same number of unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel
(that were selected for the first drive group) to create a second drive group.
5.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right, as shown in the following figure.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
6.
Choose whether to use drive encryption.
7.
Choose whether to use power save mode.
Figure 46 Drive Group Definition Dialog
8.
Repeat step 1 though step 5 until you have created all the required drive groups.
9.
After you finish selecting drives for the drive groups, select each drive group and click Accept DG for each drive
group.
10. Click Next.
The Span Definition dialog appears, as shown in the following figure. This dialog displays the drive group holes
you can select to add to a span.
LSI Corporation
- 76 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Figure 47 Span Definition Dialog
11. Under the Array With Free Space column, select a drive group of three or more drives and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the heading Span.
12. Select another drive group and click Add to SPAN.
If there are additional drive groups with three drives each, you can add them to the span.
13. Click Next.
The WebBIOS Configuration UtilityVirtual Drive Definition dialog appears.
14. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the dialog as needed.
NOTE For specific information about virtual drive options, see Section Virtual Drive Options.
15. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition.
A confirmation dialog appears.
16. To confirm your changes, click Yes. Otherwise, to undo the changes, select the virtual drive and click Reclaim.
17. Click Next after you finish defining the virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 77 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Figure 48 RAID 50 Configuration Preview Dialog
18. Check the information in the Configuration Preview dialog.
19. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to
return to the previous dialogs and change the configuration.
20. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
Another confirmation for initialization appears.
21. Click No to view the WebBIOS main menu. Otherwise, click Yes and the initialization process takes place, and the
WebBIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.5.2.9
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 60
RAID 60 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 6, and includes both parity and drive striping across multiple
drive groups. RAID 6 supports two independent parity blocks per stripe. A RAID 60 virtual drive can survive the loss of
two drives in each of the RAID 6 sets without losing data. RAID 60 is best implemented on two RAID 6 drive groups
with data striped across both drive groups. Use RAID 60 for data that requires a very high level of protection from loss.
RAID 60 can support up to eight spans and tolerate up to 16 drive failures, though less than total drive capacity is
available. Two drive failures can be tolerated in each RAID 6 level drive group.
RAID 60 is appropriate when used with data that requires high reliability, high request rates, high data transfer, and
medium-to-large capacity.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Drive Group Definition dialog appears. You use this
dialog to select drives to create drive groups.
1.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting at least three unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel on the left.
LSI Corporation
- 78 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
2.
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
3.
Click Accept DG to create a first drive group.
An icon for a second drive group appears in the right panel.
4.
Press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting the same number of unconfigured good drives in the Drives panel
(that were selected for the first drive group) to create a second drive group.
5.
Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the
right, as shown in the following figure.
If you need to undo the changes, select the drive and click Reclaim.
6.
Choose whether to use power saving.
7.
Choose whether to use drive encryption.
Figure 49 Drive Group Definition Dialog
8.
Repeat step 1 through step 5 until you have created all the required drive groups.
9.
After you finish selecting drives for the drive groups, select each drive group and click Accept DG for each drive
group.
10. Click Next.
The Span Definition dialog appears, as shown in the following figure. This dialog displays the drive group holes
you can select to add to a span.
LSI Corporation
- 79 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Creating a Storage Configuration
Figure 50 WebBIOS Span Definition Dialog
11. Under the heading Array With Free Space, select a drive group and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the heading Span.
12. Select another drive group and click Add to SPAN.
if there are additional drive groups with three drives each, you can add them to the span.
13. Click Next.
The WebBIOS Configuration UtilityVirtual Drive Definition dialog appears.
14. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the dialog as needed.
NOTE For specific information about virtual drive options, see Section Virtual Drive Options.
15. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition.
A confirmation dialog appears.
16. To confirm your changes, click Yes. Otherwise, to undo the changes, select the virtual drive and click Reclaim.
17. Click Next after you finish defining virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 80 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 51 RAID 60 Configuration Preview Dialog
18. Check the information in the Configuration Preview dialog.
19. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to
return to the previous dialogs and change the configuration.
20. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
Another confirmation for initialization appears.
21. Click No to view the WebBIOS main menu. Otherwise, click Yes and the initialization process takes place, and the
WebBIOS Config Utility Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.6
CacheCade Configuration
This section contains the procedures for creating CacheCadeRAID virtual drives for the CacheCade advanced software
feature.
NOTE This procedure does not create a RAID configuration. It creates a CacheCade software virtual drive that functions
as a secondary tier of cache.
LSI Corporation
- 81 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.6.1
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Creating a MegaRAID CacheCade Configuration
The MegaRAID CacheCade software provides you with read caching capability.
Perform the following steps to create a CacheCade Read drive group:
1.
Click Configuration Wizard on the WebBIOS main dialog.
The first Configuration Wizard screen appears, as shown in the WebBIOS Configuration Wizard dialog. Add
Configuration is selected by default.
2.
Click Next.
The Select Configuration Wizard dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 52 WebBIOS Select Configuration Wizard Dialog
3.
Select the CacheCade(TM)–SSD Caching Configuration and click Next.
The Drive Group Definition dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 82 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 53 Drive Group Definition
4.
Select a drive from the left frame, and click Add To Array.
The selected drive now appears in Drive Groups, and the Accept DG button appears.
5.
Click Accept DG.
A drive group is created and appears in Drive Groups.
6.
Click Next.
The Span Definition dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 83 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 54 Span Definition Dialog
7.
Select an array with free space from the drop-down list, and click Select Array.
8.
Click Next.
The selected array moves to the right frame under the heading Selected Array.
The Create CacheCade - SSD Caching Disk dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 84 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 55 SSD Caching Disk Dialog
9.
Click Accept to accept the drive group.
If you need to undo the changes, click Reclaim.
The Config Wizard-Preview dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 85 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 56 CacheCade Configuration Preview Dialog
10. Click Accept if the configuration is correct. Otherwise, click Back to return to the previous dialogs and change the
configuration.
11. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the configuration.
The CacheCade virtual drive appears in the right pane of the main WebBIOS dialog.
LSI Corporation
- 86 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.6.2
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Creating a MegaRAID CacheCade Pro 2.0 Software Configuration
The MegaRAID CacheCade Pro 2.0 software provides you with read and write caching capability.
Perform the following steps to create a CacheCade Pro 2.0 drive group:
1.
Click Configuration Wizard on the WebBIOS CU main screen.
The WebBIOS Configuration Wizard appears. Add Configuration is selected by default.
Figure 57 WebBIOS Configuration Wizard
2.
Click Next.
The Select Configuration screen appears.
LSI Corporation
- 87 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 58 Select Configuration
3.
Select CacheCade(TM) - SSD Caching Configuration and click Next.
LSI Corporation
- 88 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 59 Drive Group Definition
4.
Select a drive from the left frame, and click Add To Array.
The selected drive now appears in Drive Groups, and the Accept DG button appears.
5.
Click Accept DG.
A drive group is created and appears in Drive Groups.
6.
Click Next.
The Span Definition screen appears.
LSI Corporation
- 89 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 60 Span Definition
7.
Select an array from Array With Free Space and click Select Array.
8.
Click Next.
9.
Select a RAID level from the RAID Level drop-down list.
10. Select a write policy from the Write Policy drop-down list.
Write Back: In Write Back mode, the CacheCade virtual drive is used for both read as well as write cache.
However, if the CacheCade virtual drive becomes degraded, the CacheCade virtual drive will be used only as
read cache. This is the default write policy.
— Write Through: In Write Through mode, the CacheCade virtual drive is used as read only cache.
— Always Write Back: In Always Write Back mode, the CacheCade virtual drive is used for both read and write
cache.
—
11. Click Accept.
A confirmation screen appears asking you to confirm your selections.
12. Click Yes to confirm and click Next.
The Configuration Preview screen appears.
13. Click Accept.
A confirmation screen appears asking if you want to save your configuration.
14. Click Yes.
Your configuration is saved, and you are taken back to the WebBIOS CU main screen. The new CacheCade drive
group appears in the frame under Logical View.
LSI Corporation
- 90 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.6.2.1
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Modifying CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drive Properties
You can modify the default write policy of a CacheCade virtual drive. You can also delete a CacheCade virtual drive.
Perform the following steps to modify the CacheCade virtual drive properties:
1.
In the WebBIOS CU main screen, click the CacheCade virtual drive whose properties you want to modify.
The CacheCade Virtual Drive Properties screen appears.
Figure 61 CacheCade Virtual Drive Properties
3.6.2.2
2.
To modify the default write policy of a Cachecade virtual drive, select a write policy from the Default write policy
drop-down list.
3.
To delete a CacheCade virtual drive, click Delete, and click Go.
4.
Click Home to return to the WebBIOS CU main screen.
Enabling or Disabling SSD Caching on a Virtual Drive
You can associate a virtual drive to a cache pool or not by enabling or disabling SSD caching on that virtual drive.
When you enable SSD caching on a virtual drive, that virtual drive becomes associated with an existing or with a
future CacheCade virtual drive.
When you disable SSD caching on a virtual drive, any associations that the selected virtual drive has with a CacheCade
SSD Caching virtual drive is removed. This option is only available when the virtual drive’s caching is currently
enabled.
Perform the following steps to enable/disable SSD caching on a virtual drive:
1.
In the WebBIOS CU main screen, click a virtual drive.
The Virtual Drive Properties dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 91 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 62 Virtual Drive Properties
2.
Select Adv Opers and click Go.
3.
Select the Enable SSD Caching or Disable SSD Caching radio button.
4.
Click Go.
A confirmation page appears asking you to confirm your selection.
5.
3.6.2.3
Click Yes.
Enabling or Disabling SSD Caching on Multiple Virtual Drives
You can enable and disable SSD caching on multiple virtual drives at one time.
When you enable SSD caching on a virtual drive, that virtual drive becomes associated with an existing or with a
future CacheCade virtual drive. This option is only available when there is at least one virtual drive in the
configuration.
When you disable SSD caching on a virtual drive, any associations that the selected virtual drive has with a CacheCade
virtual drive is removed. This option is only available when there is at least one virtual drive in the configuration.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable SSD Caching on multiple virtual drives:
1.
In the WebBIOS CU main screen, click Controller Properties in the left frame.
The Controller Properties screen appears.
2.
Click Next until you reach the last controller properties screen.
3.
Click Manage (next to SSD Caching).
The Manage SSD Caching screen appears.
LSI Corporation
- 92 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 63 WebBIOS CU Manage SSD Caching
All virtual drives that have SSD caching enabled or disabled are listed.
4.
Select the All check box and click Enable or Disable.
—
—
Click Enable to enable SSD caching on all the virtual drives that are currently disabled.
Click Disable to disable SSD caching on all virtual drives that are currently enabled.
A confirmation screen appears asking for your confirmation.
5.
3.6.2.4
Click Yes to continue with disabling SSD caching on all virtual drives.
Enabling SSD Caching on New Virtual Drives
You can enable SSD caching on a virtual drive when the virtual drive is being created in the Create Virtual Drive
wizard.
Once the virtual drive has been created using the wizard, the Manage SSD Caching screen appears:
LSI Corporation
- 93 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 64 WebBIOS CU Manage SSD Caching
By default, all virtual drives are disabled.
Either click Enable to enable SSD caching on a virtual drive, or select the All check box and click Enable to enable SSD
caching on all virtual drive.
3.6.2.5
Clearing Configurations on CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drives
You can clear all the configurations on a CacheCade virtual drive.
1.
In the WebBIOS CU main screen, click Configuration Wizard.
The first screen of the configuration wizard appears.
2.
Select Clear Configuration.
A confirmation screen appears.
LSI Corporation
- 94 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 65 Confirmation Page
3.
Click Yes to clear the configuration.
If the cache becomes inconsistent before the clear configuration operation is performed, the firmware returns an
error code. The Confirm Loss of Cache dialog appears as a follow up dialog to the Confirm Clear Configuration
dialog. Click Yes to clear the configuration.
3.6.2.6
Removing Blocked Access
At times, an error may occur in the CacheCade virtual drive and this causes a blocked access to the associated virtual
drive.
It is advisable to wait for sometime for the error in the CacheCade virtual drive to get sorted. You can also try to solve
the error in the CacheCade virtual drive and bring it back to an optimal status. Once the Cachecade virtual drive is in
an optimal status, the blocked virtual drive returns to its former access policy automatically.
The text Access Blocked gets appended next to the Optimal status of the affected virtual drive in the WebBIOS CU
main screen.
1.
Click the affected virtual drive to view the Virtual Drive Properties screen.
The Access field displays Blocked as the access policy, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 95 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
CacheCade Configuration
Figure 66 Virtual Drive Properties - Blocked Access
2.
Select AdvOpers and click Go.
The Advanced Operations dialog appears.
Figure 67 Advanced Operations
3.
Select Remove Blocked Access and click Go.
4.
Click Yes to remove blocked access on the virtual drive.
A confirmation message dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 96 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.7
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
The SafeStore Encryption Services feature provides the ability to encrypt data and use disk-based key management
for the data security solution. This solution protects your data in case of theft or loss of physical drives. This section
describes how to enable, change, or disable the drive security settings, and how to import a foreign configuration.
3.7.1
Enabling the Security Key Identifier, Security Key, and Password
Perform the following steps to enable the encryption settings for the security key identifier, security key, and
password.
1.
Click Controller Properties on the main WebBIOS dialog.
The first Controller Information dialog appears.
2.
Click Next till you reach the fourth Controller Information dialog.
3.
Click the Enable link in Drive Security.
4.
Click Next.
An information dialog appears describing drive security.
The Enable Drive Security- Enter Security Key ID dialog appears as shown in the following figure.
Figure 68 Enable Drive Security-Enter Security KeyID
5.
Either accept the default security key ID, or enter a new security key ID.
6.
Click Next.
The Enable Drive Security - Enter Security Key dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 97 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
Figure 69 Enable Drive Security – Enter Security Key
7.
Either enter a new drive security key, or click Suggest to fill the new security key. Enter the new drive security key
again to confirm.
The security key is case-sensitive. It must be between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one
lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and one non-alphanumeric character (e.g. < > @ +). The space character is
not permitted.
8.
Click Next.
The Enable Drive Security – Enter Pass Phrase dialog appears as shown in the following figure. You have the
option to provide a pass phrase for additional security.
LSI Corporation
- 98 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
Figure 70 Enable Drive Security – Enter Pass Phrase
9.
To use a pass phrase, select the Use a pass phrase in addition to the security key check box.
10. Enter a new pass phrase, and enter the new pass phrase again to confirm.
The pass phrase is case-sensitive. It must be between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one
lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and one non-alphanumeric character (e.g., < > @ +). The space character is
not permitted.
NOTE Non-U.S. keyboard users must be careful not to enter double-byte character set (DBCS) characters in the
Pass Phrase field or Security Key field. Firmware works only with the ASCII character set.
11. Click Accept.
The Confirm Enable Drive Security dialog appears.
12. Click Yes to confirm that you want to enable the drive security settings.
WebBIOS enables the security key ID, the security key, and the pass phrase (if applicable) that you entered and
returns you to the WebBIOS main menu.
ATTENTION If you forget the security key, you will lose access to your data. Be sure to record your security key
information. You might need to enter the security key to perform certain operations.
LSI Corporation
- 99 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.7.2
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
Changing the Security Key Identifier, Security Key, and Pass Phrase
If you selected disk-based encryption when you made the RAID configuration, the drive security is enabled. Perform
the following steps to change the encryption settings for the security key identifier, security key, and pass phrase.
1.
Click Controller Properties on the main WebBIOS dialog.
The first Controller Information dialog appears.
2.
Click Next till you reach the fourth Controller Information dialog.
3.
Click the Change/Disable link in Drive Security.
The Drive Security dialog appears.
Figure 71 Drive Security
4.
To change the drive security settings, select the Change drive security settings radio button and click Accept.
An Introduction dialog appears describing the process of changing the drive security settings.
5.
Click Next.
The Change Security Settings - Security Key ID dialog appears, as shown below.
LSI Corporation
- 100 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
Figure 72 Change Security Settings - Security Key ID
6.
Choose whether to use the existing security key or enter a new security key ID.
—
—
7.
Use the existing security key identifier (Current security key identifier).
Enter a new security key identifier (New security key identifier).
Click Next.
The Change Security Settings – Security Key dialog appears, as shown in the following figure. You have the
option to either use the existing security key or enter a new one.
LSI Corporation
- 101 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
Figure 73 Change Security Settings - Security Key
8.
To create a new drive security key, either enter a new drive security key in the New security key field, or click
Suggest to fill the new security key.
The security key is case-sensitive. It must be between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one
lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and one non-alphanumeric character (e.g., < > @ +). The space character is
not permitted.
9.
Enter the new drive security key again in the Confirm field.
10. Click Next
The Change Security Settings – Pass Phrase dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 102 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
Figure 74 Change Security Settings - Pass Phrase
11. To use a pass phrase, click the Use a pass phrase in addition to the security key check box.
12. Enter a new pass phrase, and enter the new pass phrase again to confirm.
The pass phrase is case-sensitive. It must be between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one
lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and one non-alphanumeric character (e.g., < > @ +). The space character is
not permitted.
Non-U.S. keyboard users must be careful not to enter double-byte character set (DBCS) characters in the Pass
Phrase field or the Security Key field. The firmware works only with the ASCII character set.
13. Click Accept.
The Authenticate Drive Security Settings dialog appears in either of the two scenarios mentioned below.
If you entered a new pass phrase.
— If you entered a new drive security key.
—
LSI Corporation
- 103 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Selecting SafeStore Encryption Services Security Options
Figure 75 Authenticate Drive Security Settings
14. Enter the current security key, and click OK.
The text box for the security key can hold up to 32 characters. The key must be at least eight characters. After you
enter the correct security key, the Confirm dialog appears.
15. Click Yes to confirm that you want to change the drive security settings
If the current security key is not needed, WebBIOS saves the changes to the security settings and returns you to
the main menu. If the current security key is needed, the Authenticate Drive Security Settings dialog appears.
3.7.3
Disabling the Drive Security Settings
Perform the following steps to disable the drive security settings.
NOTE If you disable the drive security settings, you cannot create any new secure virtual drives. Disabling these
settings does not affect the security or data of foreign drives. If you removed any drives that were previously secured,
you must enter the security key when you import settings.
1.
Click Controller Properties on the main WebBIOS dialog.
The first Controller Information dialog appears.
2.
Click Next till you reach the fourth Controller Information dialog.
3.
Click the Change/Disable link in Drive Security.
The Drive Security dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 104 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 76 Drive Security Dialog
4.
To disable the drive security settings, select the Disable drive security radio button and click Accept.
5.
Click Yes to confirm that you want to disable the drive security settings.
The Confirm Disable Drive Security Page dialog appears.
WebBIOS returns you to the main menu.
3.8
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
This section explains how you can use the WebBIOS configuration utility to view and change the properties for
controllers, virtual drives, drives, and BBUs.
3.8.1
Viewing Controller Properties
WebBIOS displays information for one LSI SAS controller at a time. If your computer system has multiple LSI SAS
controllers, you can view information for a different controller by clicking Controller Selection on the main WebBIOS
dialog. When the Adapter Selection dialog appears, select the controller you want from the list.
Follow these steps to view the properties of the currently selected controller.
1.
Click Controller Properties on the main WebBIOS dialog.
There are four Controller Information dialogs. The following figure shows the first dialog.
LSI Corporation
- 105 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 77 First Controller Information Dialog
The information on this dialog is read-only and cannot be modified directly. Most of this information is selfexplanatory. The dialog lists the number of virtual drives that are already defined on this controller, and the
number of drives connected to the controller.
2.
Click Next to view the second Controller information dialog, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 78 Second Controller Information Dialog
NOTE If you are using CacheCade Pro 2.0, four additional fields appear in the Second Controller Information
dialog – CacheCade SSD Caching, Write Cache Capable, Total Cache Size, and Maximum Cache Size.
3.
Click Next to view the third Controller information dialog, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 106 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 79 Third Controller Properties
4.
Click Next to view the fourth Controller Information dialog, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 80 Fourth Controller Properties Dialog
NOTE If you are using CacheCade Pro 2.0, an additional field, SSD Caching appears in the Controller Properties
screen.
NOTE If you have already enabled drive security, instead of the Enable link, the Change/Disable link appears in
front of Drive Security.
LSI Corporation
- 107 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
The entries and options that appear in the third and fourth Controller Information dialogs are in the Section
Controller Information Menu Options.
If you make changes to the options on this dialog, click Submit to register them. If you change your mind, click
Reset to return the options to their default values.
3.8.1.1
Controller Information Menu Options
The following table describes the entries and options listed on the second and third Controller Information dialog.
Leave these options at their default settings to achieve the best performance, unless you have a specific reason for
changing them.
Table 20 Controller Information Menu Options
Option
Description
Battery Backup
This entry indicates whether the selected controller has a BBU. If present, you can click Manage to view
information about the BBU. For more information, see Section Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit
Information.
Set Factory Defaults
Use this option to load the default MegaRAID WebBIOS configuration utility settings. The default is No.
Cluster Mode
Use this option to enable or disable Cluster mode. The default is Disabled. A cluster is a grouping of
independent servers that can access the same data storage and provide services to a common set of
clients. When Cluster mode is disabled, the system operates in Standard mode.
Rebuild Rate
Use this option to select the rebuild rate for drives connected to the selected controller. The default is 30
percent. The rebuild rate is the percentage of system resources dedicated to rebuilding a failed drive. The
higher the number, the more system resources that are devoted to a rebuild.
BGI Rate
Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to background initialization of virtual
drives connected to the selected controller. The default is 30 percent.
CC Rate
Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to consistency checks of virtual drives
connected to the selected controller. The default is 30 percent.
Reconstruction Rate
Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to reconstruction of drives connected
to the selected controller. The default is 30 percent.
Controller BIOS
Use this option to enable or disable the BIOS for the selected controller. The default is Enabled.
If the boot device is on the selected controller, the BIOS must be enabled; otherwise, the BIOS should be
disabled or it might not be possible to use a boot device elsewhere.
NCQ
Native Command Queuing (NCQ) gives an individual drive the ability to optimize the order in which it
executes the read and write commands. The default is Enabled.
Coercion Mode
Drive coercion is a tool for forcing drives of varying capacities to the same size so they can be used in a
drive group. The coercion mode options are None, 128MB-way, and 1GB-way. The default is 1GB-way.
The number you choose depends on how much the drives from various vendors vary in their actual size.
Use the 1GB coercion mode option.
S.M.A.R.T. Polling
Use this option to determine how frequently the controller polls for drives reporting a predictive drive
failure (self-monitoring analysis and reporting technology [SMART] error). The default is 300 seconds (5
minutes).
Alarm Control
Select this option to enable, disable, or silence the onboard alarm tone generator on the controller. The
default is Enabled.
Patrol Read Rate
Use this option to select the rate for patrol reads for drives connected to the selected controller. The
default is 30 percent. The patrol read rate is the percentage of system resources dedicated to running a
patrol read.
Cache Flush Interval
Use this option to control the interval (in seconds) at which the contents of the onboard data cache are
flushed. The default is 4 seconds.
Spinup Drive Count
Use this option to control the number of drives that spin up simultaneously. The default is 4 drives.
Spinup Delay
Use this option to control the interval (in seconds) between spin up of drives connected to this controller.
The delay prevents a drain on the system’s power supply that would occur if all drives spun up at the same
time. The default is 12 seconds.
LSI Corporation
- 108 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Option
3.8.2
Description
StopOnError
Enable this option if you want the boot process to stop when the controller BIOS encounters an error
during boot-up. The default is Enabled.
Stop CC on Error
Enable this option if you want to stop a consistency check when the controller BIOS encounters an error.
The default is No.
Maintain PD Fail
History
Enable this option to maintain the history of all drive failures. This option is used to keep track of drives
that the RAID controller believes have failed. With this feature enabled, the RAID controller will track bad
drives and mark them as Unconfigured bad if they return from disconnect or failure. Drives can be marked
Unconfigured bad if they are failing or if the RAID controller looses communication with the drive while it
is part of a configuration (a virtual drive member or a hot spare). The HBA will loose communication with
drives if they are removed while the system is turned on or if SIMs are removed while the system is turned
on. The default is Enabled.
Schedule CC
Indicates whether the option to schedule the date and time for a consistency check is supported.
Snapshot
Use this option to create a snapshot of a volume. MegaRAID Recovery, also known as Snapshot, offers a
simplified way to recover data and provides automatic protection for the boot volume. You can use the
Recovery feature to take a snapshot of a volume and to restore a volume or file. Snapshot functionality
allows you to capture data changes to the volume, and, if data is deleted accidentally or maliciously,
restore the data from the view or roll back to a snapshot at a previous point-in-time (PiT). MegaRAID
Recovery supports up to eight snapshots of PiTs for each volume.
Disk Activity
Enable this property if you want to locate a particular disk. This disk can be identified with a continuous
blinking of green activity LED. This works only if the disks are installed in a enclosure.
Manage JBOD
Converting the multiple JBOD drives to unconfigured drive at single selection.
Emergency Spare
Use this option to specify if it is acceptable to commission unconfigured good drives or global hotpares as
emergency spare drives.
Emergency for
SMARTer
Use this option to specify if it is acceptable to commission emergency hot spare drives for predictive
failure analysis (PFA) events.
Drive Security
Use this option to encrypt data on the drives and use disk-based key management for the data security
solution. This solution protects your data in case of theft or loss of physical drives.
Manage Powersave
Use this option to reduce the power consumption of drives that are not in use, by spinning down the
unconfigured drives, hot spares, and configured drives.
Link Speed
Use this option to change the link speed between the controller and an expander or between the
controller and a drive that is directly connected to the controller.
SSD Caching
Click on this link to invoke the Manage SSD Caching screen to enable and disable SSD caching on
multiple virtual drives at one time.
Viewing Virtual Drive Properties, Policies, and Operations
WebBIOS displays properties, policies, and operations for virtual drives.
To view these items for the currently selected virtual drive, click on a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the
WebBIOS Configuration utility main dialog.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 109 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 81 Virtual Drive Dialog
The Properties panel of this dialog displays the virtual drive’s RAID level, state, capacity, strip size, and metadata size.
The Policies panel lists the virtual drive policies that were defined when the storage configuration was created. For
information about these policies, see Section, Using Manual Configuration. To change any of these policies,
make a selection from the drop-down list, and click Change.
The Operations panel lists operations that can be performed on the virtual drive. To perform an operation, select it,
and click Go. Choose from the following options:



Select Delete to delete this virtual drive. For more information, see Section, Deleting a Virtual Drive.
Select Locate to make the LEDs blink on the drives used by this virtual drive. This action works only if the drives
are installed in a drive enclosure that supports SCSI-Accessed-Fault-Tolerant-Enclosure (SAFTE).
Select Fast Init or Slow Init to initialize this virtual drive. A fast initialization quickly writes zeroes to the first and
last 10-MB regions of the new virtual drive and then completes the initialization in the background. A slow
initialization is not complete until the entire virtual drive has been initialized with zeroes. It is seldom necessary to
use this option, because the virtual drive was already initialized when you created it.
ATTENTION Before you run an initialization, back up any data on the virtual drive that you want to save. All data
on the virtual drive is lost when you initialize the drive.



Select CC to run a consistency check on this virtual drive. For more information, see Section, Running a
Consistency Check. (This option is not available for RAID 0 virtual drives.)
Select Stop Locate to stop the LED flash on the drive. This works only if the drive is installed in a drive enclosure.
Select Adv Opers to access dialogs to remove drives, migrate RAID levels (that is, change the virtual drive
configuration by adding a drive and changing the RAID level), virtual drive erase, enable/disable SSD Caching,
and to remove blocked access.
See Section, Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive, for information about adding a drive to a virtual drive or
migrating its RAID level. See Section, Using MegaRAID Recovery, for the MegaRAID Recovery procedure.
LSI Corporation
- 110 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012

Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Select Expand to increase the size of a virtual drive to occupy the remaining capacity in the drive group.
See Section, Viewing and Expanding a Virtual Drive, for the procedure you can use to expand a virtual drive.
3.8.3
Viewing Drive Properties
The Physical Drive dialog displays the properties of a selected drive and enables you to perform operations on the
drive. There are two ways to access the Physical Drive dialog:


On the main menu dialog, click on a drive in the right panel under the heading Physical View.
On the main menu dialog, click on Drives in the left panel to display the Drives dialog. Then click on a drive in the
right panel. Click the Properties button, and click Go. The properties for the selected drive are displayed.
The following figure shows the Physical Drive dialog.
Figure 82 Physical Drive Dialog
The drive properties are read-only and are self-explanatory. Note that the properties include the state of the drive.
Operations you can perform are listed at the bottom of the dialog. After you select an operation, click Go to start the
operation. The operations vary depending on the drive state. If the drive state is Online, the following operations
appear.

Select MakeDriveOffline if you want to force the drive offline.
LSI Corporation
- 111 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
NOTE If you force offline a good drive that is part of a redundant drive group with a hot spare, the drive will rebuild
to the hot spare drive. The drive you forced offline will go into the Unconfigured Bad state. Access the BIOS utility
to set the drive to the Unconfigured Good state.

Select Locate to make the LED flash on the drive. This operation works only if the drive is installed in a drive
enclosure.
If the drive state is Unconfigured Good, the following additional operations appear on this dialog.


Select Make Global HSP to make a global hot spare, which is available to all of the virtual drives.
Select Make Dedicated HSP to make a hot spare dedicated to a specific virtual drive.
WebBIOS displays the global hot spare as Global and the dedicated hot spare as Ded. The icon for the dedicated
hot spare appears under its associated virtual drive. The drive number, drive state, drive capacity, and drive
manufacturer appear.


Select Enclosure Affinity so drive failures are present on a split backplane configuration, then the hot spare will
be used first on the backplane side in which it resides.
Select Prepare for Removal to prepare the drive for removal from the enclosure.
The Prepare for Removal feature is different from spinning a drive down into power save mode because it also
involves flagging the drive as ready to remove. Therefore, if you choose to prepare a drive for removal, selecting
Ready to Remove displays in the device tree for that drive, instead of Powersave.


3.8.4
Select Stop Locate to stop the LED flash on the drive. This works only if the drive is installed in a drive enclosure.
Select Drive Erase to securely erase data on non self-encrypting drives (Non-SED), which are normal HDDs.
Shield State
Physical devices in MegaRAID firmware transit between different states. If the firmware detects a problem or a
communication loss for a physical drive, the firmware transitions the drive to a bad (FAILED or UNCONF BAD) state. To
avoid transient failures, an interim state called the shield state is introduced before marking the drive as being in a bad
state.
The shield state is an interim state of a physical drive for diagnostic operations. The results of the diagnostic tests
determine if the physical drive is good or bad. If any of the diagnostic tests fail, the physical drive transitions to a bad
state (FAILED or UNCONF BAD).
3.8.4.1
Shield State Physical View
Follow these steps to check if a physical drive is in a Shield state in the Physical view.
1.
Click Physical View in the main dialog.
The physical drive that is in a shield state is marked as Shielded.
3.8.4.2
Logical View Shield State
Follow these steps to view the Shield state in the Logical view.
1.
Click Logical View i n the main page.
The physical drive that is in a shield state is marked as Shielded.
The Logical view shield state is shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 112 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 83 Logical View Shield State
3.8.4.3
Viewing the Physical Drive Properties of a Drive in Shield State
Follow these steps to view the physical properties of the drive in Shield state.
1.
Click on the Physical view tab or the Logical view tab in the device tree.
2.
Click the physical drive that is in shield state on the physical or logical view of device tree to view the properties.
The device properties of the drive are displayed as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 113 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 84 Physical Drive Properties of a Drive in Shield State
3.8.4.4
Viewing if Shield State Is Enabled in a Controller
Follow these steps to check if the Shield state is enabled in a controller.
1.
Click Controller Properties on the WebBIOS main menu.
The Shield State Supported column is displayed, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 114 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 85 Shield State Support
3.8.5
Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit Information
If your SAS controller has a battery backup unit (BBU), you can view information about it and change some settings. To
perform these tasks, follow these steps:
1.
Click Controller Properties on the WebBIOS main screen.
The first Controller Information dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 86 First Controller Information
2.
Click Next.
The second Controller Information dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 115 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Click Next to view the third Config Utility Controller Properties dialog.
The third Controller Properties dialog appears, as shown in the following figure. The Battery Backup field at the
top-left of the dialog indicates whether the iBBU is present.
Figure 87 Third Controller Properties
4.
Click Manage in the Battery Backup field.
The Battery Properties dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 116 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 88 Battery Properties
You may click More Properties for viewing additional battery properties.
Most of the battery module properties are view-only and are self-explanatory.
The lower-part of the dialog contains the battery settings. A learning cycle is a battery calibration operation
performed by the controller periodically to determine the condition of the battery. You can change the learn
delay interval (the length of time between automatic learning cycles) and the auto learn mode.
For information about BBU modes, see Section, BBU Modes.
3.8.5.1
BBU Modes
The following table describes each of the BBU modes.
Table 21 BBU Modes
Mode of Operation BBU Mode
Description
1
12 hours retention @ 45°C, 5 year Service Life, transparent learn
2
12 hours retention @ 55°C, 3 year Service Life, transparent learn
3
24 hours retention @ 45°C, 3 year Service Life, transparent learn
4
48 hours retention @ 45°C, 3 year Service Life
5
48 hours retention @ 55°C, 1 year Service Life
6
Same as the description for BBU mode 5. The BBU mode 6 enables you to get
events when the battery capacity reaches sub-optimal and critical thresholds.
LSI Corporation
- 117 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.8.5.2
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Setting the Learn Delay Interval
The learn delay interval is the length of time between automatic learning cycles. Perform the following steps to
change the interval:
1.
Go to the Battery Properties dialog.
2.
Click Schedule a Learn Cycle.
The Schedule Learn Cycle dialog appears.
Figure 89 Schedule Learn Cycle
3.
Change the number of hours in the Delay Scheduled learn cycle by field.
You can delay the start of the learn cycles for up to 168 hours (7 days).
4.
3.8.5.3
Click Apply to save the changes or click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
Setting the Auto Learn Mode
You can start battery learning cycles manually or automatically. The Automatic Learn Cycle modes are:


Enable: The firmware tracks the time since the last learning cycle and performs a learn cycle when due.
Disable: The firmware does not monitor or initiate a learning cycle. You can schedule learning cycles manually.
NOTE After selecting Disabled, if you select Enabled, the controller firmware resets the battery module
properties to initiate an immediate battery learn cycle. However, in the Next Learn Cycle Time field, the value
None is displayed. The Next Learn Cycle Time field will not be updated until the battery relearn is completed.
Once the relearning cycle is completed, the value in the Next Learn Cycle Time field will display the new date and
time of the next battery learning cycle.

Warn Via Event: The firmware warns about a pending learning cycle. You can initiate a learning cycle manually.
After the learning cycle is complete, the firmware resets the counter and warns you when the next learning cycle
time is reached.
Perform the following steps to choose an automatic learn cycle mode:
1.
Go to the Battery Properties dialog. Open the drop-down list in the Auto Learn Mode field.
2.
In the Automatic Learn Cycle drop-down, select a mode.
3.
Click OK to set the automatic learn cycle mode.
NOTE When you replace the iBBU, the charge cycle counter is reset automatically.
LSI Corporation
- 118 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.8.6
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Managing Link Speed
The Managing Link Speed feature allows you to change the link speed between the controller and an expander or
between the controller and a drive that is directly connected to the controller.
All phys in a SAS port can have different link speeds or can have the same link speed.
You can select a link speed setting. However, if phys in a SAS port have different link speed settings and if a phy is
connected to a drive or an expander, the firmware overrides the link speed setting you have selected and instead uses
the common maximum link speed among all the phys.
To change the link speed, perform the following steps:
1.
Click Controller Properties on the WebBIOS main menu.
There are four Controller Properties screens. The first Controller Properties screen appears. See Figure 77 to view
this screen.
2.
Click Next to access the second Controller Properties screen.
The second Controller Properties screen appears. See Figure 78 to view this screen.
3.
Click Next to access the third Controller Properties screen.
4.
Click Next to access the fourth Controller Properties screen.
The third Controller Properties screen appears. See Figure 79 to view this screen.
The fourth Controller Properties screen appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 90 Fourth Controller Properties Screen
5.
Click Manage in the Link Speed field.
The Manage Link Speed dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 119 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 91 Manage Link Speed Screen
The SAS Address column displays the SAS address that uniquely identifies a device in the SAS domain.
The Phy column displays the system-supported phy link values. The phy link values are from 0 through 7.
— The Select Link Speed column displays the phy link speeds.
—
—
6.
Select the desired link speed from the Select Link Speed field using the drop-down selector.
The link speed values are Auto,1.5, 3.0 or 6.0 Gbps.
NOTE By default, the link speed in the controller is Auto or the value last saved by the user.
7.
Click OK.
The link speed value is now reset. The change takes place after you restart the system. A message box appears
asking you to restart your system.
8.
3.8.7
Click OK.
Viewing Enclosure Properties
Using WebBIOS, you can view the enclosure properties of all of the enclosures connected to the server.
Follow these steps to view enclosure properties.
1.
Go to the Physical view of the WebBIOS Utility.
2.
Click the enclosure node.
The enclosure properties are displayed, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 120 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 92 Enclosure Properties
3.
Click Next to view additional properties, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 93 Additional Enclosure Properties
4.
Click More Info to view additional information on the number of temperature sensors (Figure 94), number of fans
(Figure 95), and the number of power supplies (Figure 96).
LSI Corporation
- 121 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 94 Enclosure More Information – Temperature Sensors
Figure 95 Enclosure More Information – Number of Fans
LSI Corporation
- 122 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 96 Enclosure More Information – Number of Power Supplies
3.8.8
SSD Disk Cache Policy
MegaRAID supports changes to the write-cache policy for SSD media of individual physical drives.
When SSDs are configured in a mixed disk group with HDDs, the Physical Device Write-Cache Policy setting of all of
the participating drives is changed to match the SSD cache policy setting.
3.8.8.1
Viewing Cache Properties
Follow these steps to view the SSD Disk Cache Setting property.
1.
Click the controller properties link in the main menu.
2.
Click Next to view the controller properties with SSD Disk Cache Setting displayed, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 97 SSD Disk Cache Setting in Controller Properties Dialog
3.8.9
Emergency Spare
When a drive within a redundant virtual drive fails or is removed, the MegaRAID firmware automatically rebuilds the
redundancy of the virtual drive by providing a emergency spare drive, even if no commissionable dedicated drive or
global hotspare drive is present.
LSI Corporation
- 123 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.8.9.1
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Emergency Spare for Physical Drives
The Emergency Spare property indicates whether the drive is currently commissioned as a emergency spare or not.
You can select from the options None, UG (Unconfigured Good), GHS (Global Hotspare), or UG and GHS (Unconfigured
Good and Global Hotspare).
Follow these steps to view a emergency spare for a drive.
1.
Click the physical drive node in the right panel on the WebBIOS main dialog.
The Emergency spare property of the drive is displayed, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 98 Emergency Spare
3.8.10
Emergency Spare for Controllers
The Emergency Spare properties are configured in the controller properties. You can choose from the four options:
Global Hotspare (GHS), Unconfigured Good (UG), Unconfigured Good and Global Hotspare (UG AND GHS), and
None. You can also enable or disable the Emergency for SMARTer property.
3.8.10.1
Setting Controller Emergency Spare Properties
Follow these steps to set the Emergency spare properties for controllers.
1.
From the WebBIOS main menu, click Controller Properties.
2.
Keep clicking Next till you reach the last controller properties page.
The controller properties dialog appears, as shown in the following figure. You can choose the options (None, UG,
GHS, and UG and GHS) from the Emergency Spare drop down list.
LSI Corporation
- 124 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Figure 99 Setting Controller Hotspare Properties
3.8.10.2
Viewing Controller Emergency Spare Properties
Follow these steps to view the controllers’ Emergency Spare properties.
1.
Click the Controller properties link in the WebBIOS main menu.
2.
Click Next.
The controller’s Emergency spare properties are displayed as shown in the following figure.
Figure 100 Viewing Controller Emergency Spare Properties
3.8.10.3
Commissioned Hotspare
The Commissioned Hotspare is used to determine whether the online drive has a Commissioned Hotspare drive
assigned to it.
Click the online physical drive node in the right panel on the WebBIOS main dialog to view the Commissioned
Hotspare property.
LSI Corporation
- 125 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Expanding a Virtual Drive
Figure 101 Commissioned Hotspare
3.9
Viewing and Expanding a Virtual Drive
Follow these steps to view virtual drive properties:
1.
In the Logical view of the device tree, click the Virtual Drive Node.
The virtual drive properties are displayed, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 126 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing and Expanding a Virtual Drive
Figure 102 Virtual Drive Properties
You can increase the size of a virtual drive to occupy the remaining capacity in a drive group.
2.
Select the Expand radio button, and click Go.
The Expand Virtual Drive dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 103 Expand Virtual Drive Dialog
3.
Enter the percentage of the available capacity that you want the virtual drive to use.
LSI Corporation
- 127 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Recovering and Clearing Punctured Block Entries
For example, if there are 100 GB of capacity available and you want to increase the size of the virtual drive by 30
GB, select 30 percent.
4.
Click Calculate to determine the capacity of the virtual drive after expansion.
5.
Click Ok.
The virtual drive expands by the selected percentage of the available capacity.
3.10
Recovering and Clearing Punctured Block Entries
You can recover and clear the punctured block area of a virtual drive.
ATTENTION This operation removes any data stored on the physical drives. Back up the good data on the drives before
making any changes to the configuration.
When a Patrol Read or a Rebuild operation encounters a media error on the source drive, it punctures a block on the
target drive to prevent the use of the data with the invalid parity. Any subsequent read operation to the punctured
block completes but with an error. Consequently, the puncturing of a block prevents any invalid parity generation
later while using this block.
To recover or clear the punctured block area of a virtual drive, run a Slow (or Full) Initialization to zero out and
regenerate new parity causing all bad block entries to be removed from the bad block table.
To run a Slow (or Full) Initialization, see Viewing Virtual Drive Properties, Policies, and Operations.
3.11
Suspending and Resuming Virtual Drive Operations
MegaRAID provides background Suspend and Resume features that enhances the functionality. The background
operations on a virtual drive can be suspended using the Suspend option, and later resumed using the Resume
option. The suspended operation resumes from the point where the operation was suspended.
If any operation is stopped before completion, it is considered to be aborted. An aborted operation cannot be
resumed from the place is was stopped.
NOTE Suspend and resume are applicable for all the background operations, such as background initialization, rebuild
and consistency check notes.
Follow these steps to suspend an operation and resume an operation.
1.
Perform one of these actions:
—
—
From the WebBIOS main menu, click the Virtual Drives link.
From the task bar, click the VD Progress Info button.
The Virtual Drives main dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 128 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 104 Virtual Drives Dialog
2.
To suspend operations, select the check boxes for the operations that you want to suspend, and click Suspend
(Alt+D).
3.
To abort operations, select the check boxes for the operations and click Abort (Alt+A).
Aborted operations cannot be resumed and have to be started again.
4.
3.12
To resume operations, select the check boxes for the suspended operations that you want to resume, and click
Resume (Alt+U).
Using MegaRAID Recovery
MegaRAID Recovery, also known as Snapshot, offers a simplified way to recover data and provides automatic
protection for the boot volume. You can use the Recovery feature to take a snapshot of a volume and to restore a
volume or file. Snapshot functionality allows you to capture data changes to the volume, and, if data is deleted
accidentally or maliciously, you can restore the data from the view or roll back to a snapshot at a previous point-intime (PiT). MegaRAID Recovery supports up to eight snapshots of PiTs for each volume.
Each Recovery PiT volume snapshot is typically a fraction of the original volume size, because it tracks only the
changes that are made to a volume after the PiT is created. Disk space for PiTs is reserved in the Snapshot Repository
virtual drive, and the PiT is expanded in small increments as new data is written to the volume. Multiple PiTs of each
volume can be retained online, enabling frequent snapshots to be stored in a space-efficient manner.
LSI Corporation
- 129 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
ATTENTION Do not select the virtual drive containing the operating system (OS) or any data as the snapshot
repository. Updates to the operating system, operating system crashes, or any data updates could destroy data on that
virtual drive.
3.12.1
Recovery Scenarios
Use the Recovery Features in three primary scenarios:
1.
Restore the missing or deleted files (restore from view).
a.
b.
c.
2.
If corrupt operating system files exist in a volume, roll back the volume to a previous state.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Discover the files are missing or deleted.
Review the snapshot views of the file content (also known as mounting a snapshot) from each PiT until you
find the missing file. A snapshot view contains the content from the point-in-time at which the snapshot was
made.
Drag and drop the missing file from snapshot view back into the online storage volume that was the source
of the snapshot.
Reboot the system, and run WebBIOS.
Select the most recent snapshot that does not contain the corrupted or malicious file to roll back to. Select
the most recent PiT snapshot to roll back to.
Reboot the system. The system automatically rolls back to its previous state based on the selected PiT
snapshot
Reduce the risk of extended downtime during application updates/upgrades in the IT center.
a.
b.
c.
d.
When the application is offline, take a snapshot of the application volume.
Install each patch individually, and test for any new defects that might have been introduced.
Take a snapshot after you test each patch, and determine that it is clean.
If a defect is introduced, roll back to the previous installation, and bypass the installation of the defective
patch.
NOTE If the volume is still damaged, continue to select from the next most current PiT snapshot to the oldest.
3.12.2
Enabling the Recovery Advanced Software
You can enable the Recovery advanced software in WebBIOS. After you enable Recovery, you create two virtual
drives—one as a snapshot base or source and the other as a snapshot repository. The snapshot base virtual drive
contains the data that is stored in the snapshot repository virtual drive.
Follow these steps to enable MegaRAID Recovery.
1.
Click a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS configuration utility main dialog to access the Virtual
Drive dialog.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 130 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 105 Virtual Drive Dialog
2.
Click Adv Opers in the Operations panel of the dialog and click Go.
The Advanced Operations dialog appears.
3.
Click Enable MegaRAID Recovery and click Go.
The Enable MegaRAID Recovery dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 131 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 106 Enable MegaRAID Recovery Dialog
4.
Select a virtual drive from the list of virtual drives in the Snapshot Repository drop-down list.
This setting is the snapshot repository virtual drive. This drive stores the snapshot data. Make sure you select a
snapshot repository virtual drive with enough available capacity. The available capacity is the largest free block of
capacity on the selected repository.
NOTE A virtual drive and a snapshot repository virtual drive can be associated with the same drives or a common
set of drives, or the two virtual drives can be located on two completely separate set of drives. Using a separate set
of drives for the virtual drive and the snapshot repository virtual drives provides a performance advantage over
using a common set of drives.
5.
Click the Update Capacity button to determine the available capacity of the selected repository.
ATTENTION Do not select the virtual drive containing the operating system as the snapshot repository. Updates
to the operating system crashes can destroy data on that virtual drive
6.
In the Allocated Capacity for snapshots field, select the available capacity in the snapshot repository to use for
changes to the virtual drive.
The capacity is dependent on how write-intensive the application is of which you are taking snapshots. The
available capacity is the largest free block of capacity on the snapshot repository virtual drive.
NOTE If you use all of the space of the snapshot repository virtual drive, you will not have space to create a
snapshot and a view, because of insufficient space.
LSI Corporation
- 132 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
ATTENTION Copy all of your data to another virtual drive before you select this option. If any existing data exists
on this virtual drive, it will be lost.
7.
Click Next.
8.
Click Finish.
The snapshot settings dialog appears, as shown in Figure 114.
A confirmation dialog appears.
9.
Confirm that you want to make these selections.
This virtual drive becomes a snapshot repository. Use it only for storing snapshot-related data.
ATTENTION After you enable snapshots on this virtual drive, you cannot change the allocated percentage of
capacity or the snapshot repository without first disabling snapshots and losing any snapshot data.
3.12.3
Creating Snapshots and Views
You can use WebBIOS to create up to eight snapshots of a volume. WebBIOS shows the snapshots in chronological
order from the oldest to the newest. Each snapshot is a PiT snapshot of the virtual drive that is the snapshot base. First,
create the snapshot base virtual drive, and then create the snapshot.
After you create the snapshots, you can create views of the PiT snapshots. You can search the views to find a snapshot
that does not contain the corrupt data or a snapshot that contains the deleted data, depending on the situation. After
you create a snapshot, you can reboot and roll back to a snapshot to restore data.
Follow these steps to create a snapshot.
1.
Enable MegaRAID Recovery.
See Section, Enabling the Recovery Advanced Software, for the procedure used to enable MegaRAID Recovery in
WebBIOS.
2.
Click on the virtual drive in the Logical View on the main dialog to go to the operations for the virtual drive.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 133 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 107 Virtual Drive Dialog
3.
Click Adv Ops in the Operations panel.
4.
Click Go in the Operations panel.
5.
Click Manage Snapshots.
The Advanced Operations dialog appears.
The Virtual Drive Properties dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 134 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 108 Virtual Drive Properties Dialog
6.
Enter a snapshot name in the Snapshot name field, and click Create Snapshot.
This action creates a snapshot that appears as a link in the Snapshot Timeline.
7.
Click the link of a specific snapshot.
The snapshot details appear.
8.
Click Advanced.
The Snapshot Settings dialog appears, as shown in Figure 114.
9.
Click Create View.
The Create View dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 135 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 109 Create View Dialog
10. Enter a view name in the View Name field, specify the capacity of the view in the Write Capacity field, and click
Ok.
This action creates the view. After you create a view, you can view details about both the snapshot and the view
on a single page, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 136 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 110 Snapshot Info Dialog
3.12.4
Creating Concurrent Snapshots
If you have created multiple snapshot base virtual drives, you can create snapshots on all of them at one time
(concurrent snapshots). Each snapshot has the same name and time stamp.
Follow these steps to create concurrent snapshots.
1.
Click Controller Properties on the WebBIOS main dialog.
The first Controller Properties dialog appears. There are four Controller Properties dialogs.
2.
Keep clicking Next till you reach the fourth Controller Properties dialog, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 137 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 111 Fourth Controller Properties Dialog
3.
Click Create in the Snapshot field.
The Create Snapshots dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 112 Create Snapshots Dialog
4.
Enter a snapshot name in the Snapshot Name field.
LSI Corporation
- 138 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
5.
Select the virtual drives on which you want to create concurrent snapshots.
6.
Click OK.
This action creates a snapshot with same name and the same timestamp on all of the selected snapshot base
virtual drives.
3.12.5
Selecting the Snapshot Settings
You can use the Snapshot Settings dialog to perform the following actions:

Take a snapshot on reboot.
This action takes a snapshot of the virtual drive when you reboot after every successful system shutdown. This
feature is mainly intended to take a snapshot of boot virtual drives to allow the operating system to be restored in
case of corruption.

Enable automatic deletion of a snapshot.
This action deletes the oldest snapshot automatically and lets you create a new snapshot.
Follow these steps to enable the snapshot settings.
1.
Click a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS configuration utility main dialog.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 113 Virtual Drive Dialog
2.
Select Adv Opers and click Go.
The Advanced Operations dialog appears.
3.
Click Manage Snapshots.
The Virtual Drive Properties dialog appears.
4.
Click Advanced.
LSI Corporation
- 139 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
The Snapshot Settings dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 114 Snapshot Settings Dialog
3.12.6
5.
Select the Take Snapshot on every Reboot check box, or select the Automatically delete the oldest snapshot
radio button, or select the Stop tracking snapshots radio button.
6.
Click Finish.
Viewing Snapshot Properties
You can view the properties of a snapshot, such as the total capacity, capacity used, and capacity available.
Follow these steps to view snapshot properties.
1.
Click a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS configuration utility main dialog.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 140 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 115 Virtual Drive Dialog
2.
Click Snapshot Properties.
The Snapshot Repository Properties dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 141 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 116 Snapshot Repository Properties Dialog
3.
3.12.7
Click OK to return to the Virtual Drive dialog.
Restoring a Virtual Drive by Rolling Back to a Snapshot
You can roll back to a previous point-in-time snapshot to recover an entire volume. This action is often used where
there are malicious files that cannot be traced. Reboot the system, and then roll back to a snapshot that does not have
the malicious or corrupt files.
Follow these steps to roll back the volume version to an earlier version.
1.
After you determine there are malicious or corrupt files, start the WebBIOS configuration utility.
2.
Access the Virtual Drive dialog by clicking on a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS configuration
utility main dialog.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.
Click the Adv Opers radio button, and click Go.
The Advanced Operations dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 142 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 117 Advanced Operations Dialog
4.
Select a snapshot from the drop-down list.
If the volume is still damaged, continue to select from the next most current PiT snapshot to the oldest.
5.
Click Go.
The system rolls back to the selected PiT snapshot and returns you to a snapshot that does not have the malicious
or corrupt files.
3.12.8
Cleaning Up a Snapshot Repository
The clean up option can be performed only on a snapshot repository virtual drive. Perform a cleanup if a snapshot
base virtual drive goes offline and the snapshot repository virtual drive is still connected to the system. After you
perform the cleanup, memory that was allocated to the offline base virtual drives will be available to the snapshot
repository virtual drive.
Follow these steps to clean up a snapshot repository.
1.
Access the Virtual Drive dialog by clicking a snapshot repository virtual drive icon in the right panel on the
WebBIOS configuration utility main dialog.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 143 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Using MegaRAID Recovery
Figure 118 Virtual Drive Dialog
2.
Click the AdvOpers radio button, and click Go.
The Advanced Operations dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 144 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Non-SED Secure Erase
Figure 119 Advanced Operations Dialog
3.
Select the Cleanup Snapshot Repository.
4.
Click Go.
This action cleans up the snapshot repository.
3.13
Non-SED Secure Erase
This section describes the procedure used to securely erase data on non self-encrypting drives (Non-SEDs), which are
normal HDDs.
3.13.1
Erasing a Non-SED Physical Drive
Follow these steps for non–SED secure erase.
1.
Go to the Physical view in the WebBIOS main menu.
2.
Click the physical drive node.
3.
Select the Drive Erase radio button, as shown in the following figure, and click Go.
LSI Corporation
- 145 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Non-SED Secure Erase
Figure 120 Physical Drive Dialog
The Mode Selection - Drive Erase dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 146 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Non-SED Secure Erase
Figure 121 Mode Selection - Drive Erase
4.
Select any of the modes available under the Select the mode for Drive Erase Operation
Simple – (Alt + S)
Normal – (Alt + N)
— Thorough – (Alt + T)
—
—
5.
Click OK.
A confirmation message dialog appears.
6.
3.13.1.1
Click Yes to proceed.
Drive Erase Progress
Physical drives, erase operation is generally a time-consuming operation and is performed as a background task.
Follow these steps to check the progress of a physical drive erase operation.
1.
Click the Drives link in the left panel on the WebBIOS main dialog.
The Drive Erase Progress appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 147 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Non-SED Secure Erase
Figure 122 Drive Erase Progress
2.
3.13.2
To abort drive erase, select the check box for the operation that you want to abort and click Abort.
Virtual Drive Erase
Virtual drive erase is a background operation.
Follow these steps to perform the virtual drive erase operation.
1.
Go to the Logical view.
2.
Click on the Virtual Drive node.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears.
3.
Click Adv Opers and click Go.
The Advanced Operations dialog appears.
4.
Select the Virtual Drive Erase radio button, and click Go.
The Mode Selection - Drive Erase dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 148 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Non-SED Secure Erase
Figure 123 Mode Selection-Drive Erase
5.
Select any of the following options.
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.13.2.1
Simple (Alt + S) – After you select this option and click OK, if the Delete Virtual Drive after Erase check box
is selected, a confirmation dialog appears.
Normal (Alt + N) – After you select this option and click OK, if the Delete Virtual Drive after Erase check box
is selected, a confirmation dialog appears.
Thorough (Alt + T) – After you select this option and click OK, if the Delete Virtual Drive after Erase check
box is selected, a confirmation dialog appears.
Delete Virtual Drive after Erase (Alt + D) – If you select this check box, the virtual drive is erased, and a
confirmation dialog appears.
OK (Alt + O) – Click OK and, if the Delete Virtual Drive after Erase check box is selected a confirmation
dialog appears.
Cancel (Alt + C) – Clicking this option, closes the dialog, and the WebBIOS navigates back to the Virtual
Drive dialog.
Group Show Progress for Virtual Drive Erase
The virtual drive erase operation is a time-consuming operation, and it is performed as a background task.
Follow these steps to view the progress of virtual drive erase.
1.
Click the Virtual Drives link on the WebBIOS main menu.
The Virtual Drives dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 149 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Viewing System Event Information
Figure 124 Virtual Drive Dialog
2.
3.14
To abort the virtual drive erase, select the check box of the operation you want to abort, click Abort.
Viewing System Event Information
The SAS controller firmware monitors the activity and performance of all storage configurations and devices in the
system. When an event occurs (such as the creation of a new virtual drive or the removal of a drive) an event message
is generated and is stored in the controller NVRAM.
You can use the WebBIOS configuration utility to view these event messages. To do this, click Events on the main
WebBIOS configuration utility dialog. The Event Information dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 150 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Configurations
Figure 125 Event Information Dialog
The right side of the dialog is blank until you select an event to view. The First Sequence and Last Sequence fields in
the upper left of the dialog show you how many event entries are currently stored.
To view event information, follow these steps:
1.
Select an event locale from the Event Locale drop-down list. For example, select Enclosure to view events
relating to the drive enclosure.
2.
Select an event class: Information, Warning, Critical, Fatal, or Dead.
3.
Enter a start sequence number, between the first sequence and the last sequence numbers.
The higher the number, the more recent the event.
4.
Enter the number of events of this type that you want to view, and click Go.
The first event in the sequence appears in the right panel.
5.
Click Next to page forward or Prev to page backward through the sequence of events.
6.
Optionally, select different event criteria in the left panel, and click Go again to view a different sequence of
events.
Each event entry includes a time stamp and a description to help you determine when the event occurred and what it
was.
3.15
Managing Configurations
This section includes information about maintaining and managing storage configurations.
LSI Corporation
- 151 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
3.15.1
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Configurations
Running a Consistency Check
You should periodically run a consistency check on fault-tolerant virtual drives. A consistency check verifies that the
redundancy data is correct and available for RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60 drive groups. To do
this, follow these steps:
1.
On the main WebBIOS configuration utility main dialog, select a virtual drive.
2.
Click Virtual Drives.
3.
When the Virtual Drive dialog appears, select CC in the lower-left panel, and click Go.
The consistency check begins.
If the WebBIOS configuration utility finds a difference between the data and the parity value on the redundant drive
group, it assumes that the data is accurate and automatically corrects the parity value. Be sure to back up the data
before running a consistency check if you think the data might be corrupted.
3.15.2
Deleting a Virtual Drive
You can delete any virtual drive on the controller if you want to reuse that space for a new virtual drive. The WebBIOS
configuration utility provides a list of configurable drive groups where there is a space to configure. If multiple virtual
drives are defined on a single drive group, you can delete a virtual drive without deleting the whole drive group.
ATTENTION Back up any data that you want to keep before you delete the virtual drive.
To delete a virtual drive, follow these steps.
1.
Access the Virtual Drive dialog by clicking a virtual drive icon in the right panel on the WebBIOS configuration
utility main dialog.
2.
Select Delete in the bottom panel under the heading Operations, and click Go.
3.
When the message appears, confirm that you want to delete the virtual drive.
The Virtual Drive dialog appears.
If a virtual drive is associated with a CacheCade virtual drive with a write policy, the following confirmation screen
appears. If a virtual drive is not associated with a CacheCade virtual drive, a different confirmation screen appears.
LSI Corporation
- 152 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Configurations
Figure 126 WebBIOS CU Confirmation Screen
4.
Click Yes to delete the virtual drive.
NOTE You may select the Force the delete to complete quickly check box to quickly complete the delete
operation. It is however, not recommended to perform this action.
3.15.3
Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration
A foreign configuration is a storage configuration that already exists on a replacement set of drives that you install in a
computer system. In addition, if one or more drives are removed from a configuration, by a cable pull or drive removal,
for example, the configuration on those drives is considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller.
The WebBIOS CU allows you to import the foreign configuration to the RAID controller, or to clear the configuration so
you can create a new configuration using these drives.
NOTE When you create a new configuration, the WebBIOS CU shows only the unconfigured drives. Drives that have
existing configurations, including foreign configurations, do not appear. To use drives with existing configurations, you
must first clear the configuration on those drives.
If WebBIOS configuration utility detects a foreign configuration, the Foreign Configuration dialog appears, as shown
in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 153 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Configurations
Figure 127 Foreign Configuration Dialog
Follow these steps to import or clear a foreign configuration.
1.
Click the drop-down list to show the configurations.
The GUID (Global Unique Identifier) entries on the drop-down list are OEM names and will vary from one
installation to another.
2.
Either select a configuration, or select All Configurations.
3.
Perform one of the following steps:
Click Preview to preview the foreign configurations. The Foreign Configuration Preview dialog appears, as
shown in the following figure.
— Click Clear to clear the foreign configurations and reuse the drives for another virtual drive.
—
If you click Cancel, it cancels the importation or preview of the foreign configuration.
LSI Corporation
- 154 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Configurations
Figure 128 Foreign Configuration Preview Dialog
The right panel shows the virtual drive properties of the foreign configuration. In this example, there are two
RAID 1 virtual drives with 67.843 GB each. The left panel shows the drives in the foreign configuration.
4.
Click Import to import these foreign configurations and use them on this controller.
If you click Cancel, you return to the dialog shown in Figure 127.
3.15.3.1
Foreign Configurations in Cable Pull and Drive Removal Scenarios
If one or more drives are removed from a configuration, by a cable pull or drive removal, for example, the
configuration on those drives is considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller.
Use the Foreign Configuration Preview dialog to import or clear the foreign configuration in each case. The import
procedure and clear procedure are described in Section, Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration.
The following scenarios can occur with cable pulls or drive removals.
NOTE To import the foreign configuration in any of the following scenarios, you should have all of the drives in the
enclosure before you perform the import operation.

Scenario 1: If all of the drives in a configuration are removed and re-inserted, the controller considers the drives to
have foreign configurations.
Import or clear the foreign configuration. If you select Import, automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual
drives.
NOTE Start a consistency check immediately after the rebuild is complete to ensure data integrity for the virtual
drives. See Section, Running a Consistency Check, for more information about checking data consistency
LSI Corporation
- 155 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012

Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Configurations
Scenario 2: If some of the drives in a configuration are removed and re-inserted, the controller considers the
drives to have foreign configurations.
Import or clear the foreign configuration. If you select Import, automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual
drives.
NOTE Start a consistency check immediately after the rebuild is complete to ensure data integrity for the virtual
drives. See Section, Running a Consistency Check, for more information about checking data consistency.

Scenario 3: If all of the drives in a virtual drive are removed, but at different times, and re-inserted, the controller
considers the drives to have foreign configurations.
Import or clear the foreign configuration. If you select Import, all drives that were pulled before the virtual drive
became offline will be imported and then automatically rebuilt. Automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual
drives.

Scenario 4: If the drives in a non-redundant virtual drive are removed, the controller considers the drives to have
foreign configurations.
Import or clear the foreign configuration. No rebuilds occur after the import operation because there is no
redundant data to rebuild the drives with.
3.15.3.2
Importing Foreign Configurations from Integrated RAID to MegaRAID
The LSI Integrated RAID solution simplifies the configuration options and provides firmware support in its host
controllers. LSI offers two types of Integrated RAID (IR): Integrated Mirroring (IM) and Integrated Striping (IS).
You can import an IM or IS RAID configuration from an IR system into a MegaRAID system. The MegaRAID system
treats the IR configuration as a foreign configuration. You can import or clear the IR configuration.
NOTE For more information about Integrated RAID, refer to the Integrated RAID for SAS User’s Guide. You can find this
document on the LSI website.
3.15.3.3
Troubleshooting Information
An IR virtual drive can have either 64 MB or 512 MB available for metadata at the end of the drive. This data is in LSI
Data Format (LDF). MegaRAID virtual drives have 512 MB for metadata at the end of the drive in the Disk Data Format
(DDF).
To import an IR virtual drive into MegaRAID, the IR virtual drive must have 512 MB in the metadata, which is the same
amount of mega data as in a MegaRAID virtual drive. If the IR virtual drive has only 64 MB when you attempt to import
it into MegaRAID, the import will fail because the last 448 MB of your data will be overwritten and the data lost.
If your IR virtual drive has only 64 MB for metadata at the end of the drive, you cannot import the virtual drive into
MegaRAID. You need to use another upgrade method, such as backup/restore to the upgraded virtual drive type.
To import an IR virtual drive into a MegaRAID system, use the Foreign Configuration Preview dialog to import or
clear the foreign configuration. The import procedure and the clear procedure are described in Section Importing
or Clearing a Foreign Configuration.
3.15.4
Importing Foreign Configurations
After you create a security key, you can run a scan for a foreign configuration and import a locked configuration. (You
can import unsecured or unlocked configurations when security is disabled.) A foreign configuration is a RAID
configuration that already exists on a replacement set of drives that you install in a computer system. You can use the
WebBIOS configuration utility to import the existing configuration to the RAID controller or clear the configuration so
you can create a new one.
LSI Corporation
- 156 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Configurations
See Section,Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration, for the procedures used to import or clear a
foreign configuration.
To import a foreign configuration, you must first enable security to allow importation of locked foreign drives. If the
drives are locked and the controller security is disabled, you cannot import the foreign drives. Only unlocked drives
can be imported when security is disabled.
After you enable the security, you can import the locked drives. To import the locked drives, you must provide the
security key used to secure them. Verify whether any drives are left to import as the locked drives can use different
security keys. If there are any drives left, repeat the import process for the remaining drives. After all of the drives are
imported, there is no configuration to import.
3.15.5
Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive
As the amount of data and the number of drives in your system increase, you can use RAID-level migration to change
a virtual drive from one RAID level to another. You do not have to power down or restart the system. When you
migrate a virtual drive, you can keep the same number of drives, or you can add drives. You can use the WebBIOS
configuration utility to migrate the RAID level of an existing virtual drive.
NOTE While you can apply RAID-level migration at any time, you should do so when there are no reboots. Many
operating systems issues I/O operations serially (one at a time) during boot. With a RAID-level migration running, a boot
can often take more than 15 minutes.
Migrations are allowed for the following RAID levels:










3.15.5.1
RAID 0 to RAID 1
RAID 0 to RAID 5
RAID 0 to RAID 6
RAID 1 to RAID 0
RAID 1 to RAID 5
RAID 1 to RAID 6
RAID 5 to RAID 0
RAID 5 to RAID 6
RAID 6 to RAID 0
RAID 6 to RAID 5
Additional Drives Required for RAID-Level Migration
The following table lists the number of additional drives required when you change the RAID level of a virtual drive.
Table 22 Additional Drives Required for RAID-Level Migration
From RAID Level to RAID Level
3.15.5.2
Original Number of Drives in Drive Group
Additional Drives Required
RAID 0 to RAID 1
RAID 0: 1 drive
1
RAID 0 to RAID 5
RAID 0: 1 drive
2
RAID 0 to RAID 6
RAID 0: 1 drive
3
RAID 1 to RAID 5
RAID 1: 2 drives
1
RAID 1 to RAID 6
RAID 1: 2 drives
1
Migrating the RAID Level
Follow these steps to migrate the RAID level:
LSI Corporation
- 157 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Managing Configurations
NOTE Back up any data that you want to keep before you change the RAID level of the virtual drive.
1.
On the main WebBIOS configuration utility main dialog, select Virtual Drives.
2.
Choose your virtual drive from the list. If only one virtual drive is configured, you will automatically be taken to the
Virtual Drives menu.
3.
From the Virtual Drives menu, select Properties.
4.
From the Properties menu, select Adv Opers under the Advanced Operations heading.
The Advanced Operations dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 129 Advanced Operations Dialog
5.
Select either Change RAID Level or Change RAID Level and Add Drive.
If you select Change RAID Level, change the RAID level from the drop-down list.
— If you select Change RAID Level and Add Drive, change the RAID level from the drop-down list, and select
one or more drives to add from the list of drives.
—
The available RAID levels are limited, based on the current RAID level of the virtual drive plus the number of drives
available.
6.
Click Go.
7.
When the message appears, confirm that you want to migrate the RAID level of the virtual drive.
A reconstruction operation begins on the virtual drive. You must wait until the reconstruction is completed before you
perform any other tasks in the WebBIOS configuration utility.
3.15.6
New Drives Attached to a MegaRAID Controller
When you insert a new drive on a MegaRAID system, if the inserted drive does not contain valid DDF metadata, the
drive displays as JBOD. If the drive does contain valid DDF metadata, its drive state is Unconfigured Good.
A new drive in JBOD drive state is exposed to the host operating system as a stand-alone drive. Drives in JBOD drive
state are not part of the RAID configuration because they do not have valid DDF records. The operating system can
install and run anything on JBOD drives.
Automatic rebuilds always occur when the drive slot status changes, for example, when you insert a drive or remove a
drive, so that a hot spare can be used. However, a new drive in JBOD drive state (without a valid DDF record), will not
perform an automatic rebuild.
LSI Corporation
- 158 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
WebBIOS Dimmer Switch
To start an automatic rebuild on the new JBOD drive, you must change the drive state from JBOD to Unconfigured
Good. (Rebuilds start only on Unconfigured Good drives.) After you set the drive state to Unconfigured Good, the
drive state information always remains on the drive, and you can use the drive for configuration.
See Section, Troubleshooting Information, for more information about DDF and metadata.
3.16
WebBIOS Dimmer Switch
This section describes changing the power-save settings using the Dimmer Switch feature.
The power savings is done by reducing power consumption of drives that are not in use by spinning down the
unconfigured drives, hot spares, and configured drives.
Perform the following steps to change the Dimmer switch feature.
1.
Select the Controller Properties option from the WebBIOS main dialog.
The Controller Information dialog appears.
2.
Click Next till you reach the last controller properties dialog.
3.
Click the Manage Powersave option.
The Power Save Setting - Specify Power Save Setting dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 130 Power Save Setting Dialog - Specify Power Save Setting
4.
Select the following check boxes:
—
Select the Unconfigured drives check box to let the controller enable the unconfigured drives to enter the
Power-Save mode.
LSI Corporation
- 159 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
WebBIOS Dimmer Switch
Select the Hot spare drives check box to let the controller enable the hot spare drives to enter the PowerSave mode.
— Select the Configured drives check box to let the controller enable the Configured drives to enter the
Power-Save mode.
—
5.
Click Next.
The Power Save Setting - Power Save Mode dialog appears.
Figure 131 Power Save Setting - Power Save Mode
6.
Click Finish.
The Confirmation message appears, as shown in Figure 133.
In the Power-Save Setting - Specify Power Save Setting dialog (Figure 130), if you select all the check boxes, except
the configured drives, then the following dialog appears.
LSI Corporation
- 160 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
WebBIOS Dimmer Switch
Figure 132 Power Save Setting - Except Configured Drive Dialog
Figure 133 Confirm Page Dialog - Confirmation Message
If you do not select any option in the Power Save settings - Specify Power Save Setting dialog (Figure 130) and click
Next, the following message appears.
LSI Corporation
- 161 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
WebBIOS Dimmer Switch
Figure 134 Power-Save Settings Not Saved Message
3.16.1
Power-Save Mode
You can select the drive standby time and the Power-Save mode by selecting the Auto, Max, and Max without cache
options in Figure 131.
3.16.2
1.
Select the drive standby time using the drop-down list.
2.
Select the power save mode by selecting one of the radio buttons.
3.
Click Finish.
Power Save Settings – Advanced
You can schedule the drive active time by selecting the start time and end time in the Power-Save Setting dialog.
Perform the following steps to schedule the drive active time.
1.
Click the Advanced button in the Power-Save Setting dialog as shown in Figure 131.
The Power-Save Settings Advanced dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
LSI Corporation
- 162 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
WebBIOS Dimmer Switch
Figure 135 Power-Save Settings Advanced
2.
Select the start time and end time from the Scheduled drive active time field using the Start time and End time
drop-down list.
3.
Click OK.
The drive active time is scheduled.
NOTE Select the Do not schedule drive active time check box if you do not want to schedule the drive active
time.
3.16.3
Power-Save While Creating Virtual Drives
You can select the power saving policy while creating virtual drives using the Power save Mode drop-down list.
LSI Corporation
- 163 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 3: WebBIOS Configuration Utility
WebBIOS Dimmer Switch
Figure 136 Power Save Mode While Creating Virtual Drives
The power save mode can be Max, Max without cache, Auto, None, and Controller defined.
LSI Corporation
- 164 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Installing the MegaCLI Configuration Utility
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
The MegaRAID Command Tool (CT) is a command line interface (CLI) application for SAS. You can use this utility to
configure, monitor, and maintain the MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers and the devices connected to them.
NOTE The CT supports only the MegaRAID controllers that support SAS and SATA II. It does not support other types of
MegaRAID controllers, such as U320, SATA I, or IDE. The IA-64 release for the Windows® operating system is similar to
the 32-bit release, so you can follow the 32-bit instructions. Applications that are 32-bit that were validated on an x64
system, such as the Intel Market system, can use the 32-bit instructions also.
4.1
Installing the MegaCLI Configuration Utility
The MegaRAID RAID controllers can be used with the following operating systems for Intel and AMD 32-bit and 64-bit
x86 based motherboards:







4.1.1
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2008 R2
Microsoft Windows 7
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.8®
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1®
SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 11 SP2
SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP4
Fedora Core Linux 15
Installing the MegaCLI Configuration Utility Windows
The Windows MegaCLI binary is provided in a binary format and no separate installation is required.
4.1.2
1.
Copy the binary file from the CD or from the LSI website.
2.
Place the binary file in the directory from where you want to run the Storage Command Line Tool and run the tool.
Installing the MegaCLI Configuration Utility on Linux
The Linux installation of the MegaCLI Configuration Utility requires the libraries to be present in the <Lib_Utils1.xx-xx.noarch.rpm> RPM. MegaCLI will not function without these libraries. Make sure that the libraries are
present in the system before you install the MegaCLI rpm.
The <Lib_Utils-1.xx-xx.noarch.rpm> RPM is packaged in the MegaCliLin zip file.
To install the <Lib_Utils-1.xx-xx.noarch.rpm> and the files, perform the following steps:
1.
Unzip the MegaCLI package.
2.
To install the Lib_Utils RPM, run the rpm -ivh <Lib_Utils-1.xx-xx.noarch.rpm> command.
3.
To install the MegaCLI RPM, run the rpm -ivh <MegaCLI-x.xx-x.noarch.rpm> command.
4.
To upgrade the MegaCLI RPM, run the rpm -Uvh <MegaCLI-x.xx-x.noarch.rpm> command.
NOTE MegaCLI has to be run with administrator privileges.
LSI Corporation
- 165 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.2
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Product Overview
Product Overview
The MegaCLI Configuration Utility is a command line interface application you can use to manage the MegaRAID SAS
RAID controllers. You can use MegaCLI Configuration Utility to perform the following tasks:








































Configure the MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers and attached devices
Display information about virtual drives and drives for the controller and other storage components
Display ongoing progress for operations on drives and virtual drives
Change properties for the virtual drives and drives for the controller and other storage components
Set, retrieve, and verify controller default settings
Change the firmware on the controllers
Monitor the RAID storage systems
Change power setting (dimmer switch)
Support RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 (depending on the RAID controller)
Create and use scripts with the scriptable CLI tool
Configure drive into groups and virtual drives on the controller
Display configuration information for the controller, drives, and virtual drives
Change virtual drive properties on the controller
Change drive properties on the controller
Display controller properties
Load configuration to the controller from a file
Save the controller configuration to a file
Start or stop a rebuild, consistency check (CC), or initialization operation
Enable or disable a background initialization (BGI)
Stop or display an ongoing background initialization
Start or display a reconstruction
Start or stop patrol read
Set and retrieve patrol read related settings
Flash new firmware on the SAS RAID controller
Read and program NVRAM and flash memory directly into MS-DOS®
Display relevant messages on the console and/or in the log file
Display controller data using one command
Exit with predefined success or failure exit codes
Scan, preview, and import foreign configurations
Set predefined environment variables, such as the number of controllers and virtual drives
Display the firmware event logs
Display help for how to use the command line options
Enable or disable snapshots (for the Recovery advanced software feature)
Create and delete snapshots and views of a virtual drive
Roll back the virtual drive to an older snapshot
Display snapshot properties
Create a CacheCade SSD Read Caching virtual drive to use as secondary cache
Display battery CacheCade SSD Read Caching unit properties
Display enclosure properties
Display and set connector mode on supported controllers
LSI Corporation
- 166 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Novell NetWare, SCO, Solaris, FreeBSD, and MS-DOS Operating System Support
NOTE Using the MegaCLI Utility while creating virtual drives, you need to create a virtual drive of a minimum of
100 MB. Even if you specify the size of a virtual drive as less than 100 MB in the command syntax, the virtual drive
that gets created is 100 MB.
The following sections describe the command line options in the MegaCLI Configuration Utility that you can use to
perform these functions.
NOTE The MegaCLI error messages are listed in Appendix MegaCLI Error Messages.
4.3
Novell NetWare, SCO, Solaris, FreeBSD, and MS-DOS Operating System Support
The MegaCLI Configuration Utility functions under the Novell® NetWare®, SCO® OpenServer™, SCO UnixWare®,
Solaris®, FreeBSD®, and MS-DOS operating systems in the same way that it does under the Windows and Linux®
operating systems. All commands supported for the Windows and Linux operating systems are supported for the
NetWare, SCO, and Solaris operating systems as well.
NOTE In the FreeBSD operating system, the MegaCLI Configuration Utility application does function if you are trying
to run it in CSH, the default shell in FreeBSD. Please ensure that you enter the bash shell by executing the command
"bash."
For the SCO OpenServer and SCO UnixWare operating systems, LSI provides an executable file that you can execute
from any folder, and an image of the same executable file on a disk drive. The image file name is MegaCLI.image.
The disk is provided so that you can distribute MegaCLI and install the executable file later as needed.
For the Solaris operating system, LSI releases MegaCLI as a package that can be installed like any other package
installation in Solaris.
For the Novell NetWare operating system, LSI provides an executable file, MegaCLI.nlm, that you can execute from
any folder. No installation is required. The output of all of the commands appears in the console window.
4.4
Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions
This section explains the abbreviations and conventions used with MegaCLI Configuration Utility commands.
4.4.1
Abbreviations Used in the Command Line
The following table lists the abbreviations for the virtual drive parameters used in the following sections.
Table 23 Command Line Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
WB
Write Back write policy
WT
Write Through write policy
RA
Read Ahead read policy
LSI Corporation
- 167 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions
Abbreviation
4.4.2
Description
NORA
Normal Read policy (No read ahead)
DIO
Direct I/O cache policy
CIO
Cached I/O cache policy
Conventions
You can specify multiple values for some options. You can enter commands for a single controller (–aN), multiple
controllers (-a0,1,2) or work on all present controllers (-aALL). The options are denoted as –aN|-a0,1,2|aALL in this document and specify that you can enter commands for one controller, multiple controllers, or all
controllers.
NOTE All options in the MegaRAID Command Tool are position-dependent, unless otherwise specified.
The following table describes the conventions used in the options.
Table 24 Conventions
Convention
|
Description
Specifies “or,” meaning you can choose between options.
-aN
N specifies the controller number for the command.
-a0,1,2
Specifies the command is for controllers 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or more controllers in this
manner.
-aALL
Specifies the command is for all controllers.
-Lx
x specifies the virtual drive number for the command.
-L0,1,2
Specifies the command is for virtual drives 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or more virtual drives in this
manner.
-Lall
Specifies the command is for all virtual drives.
[E0:S0,E1,S1,…]
Specifies when one or more physical devices need to be specified in the command line. Each [E:S]
pair specifies one physical device, where E means the device ID of the enclosure in which a drive
resides, and S means the slot number of the enclosure.In the case of a physical device directly
connected to the SAS port on the controller, with no enclosure involved, the format of [:S] can be
used where S means the port number on the controller. For devices attached through the backplane,
the firmware provides an enclosure device ID, and MegaCLI expects the user input in the format of
[E:S]. In the following sections, only the format, [E:S], is used in the command descriptions,
although both formats are valid.
[ ]
Indicates that the parameter is optional except when it is used to specify physical devices. For example,
[WT] means the write policy (Write Through) is optional.If you enter WT at the command line, the
application will use Write Through write policy for the virtual drive. Otherwise, it uses the default value
for the parameter.
{ }
Indicates that the parameters are grouped and that they must be given at the same time.
-Force
Specifies that the MegaCLI utility does not ask you for confirmation before it performs this command.
You might lose data using this option with some commands.
You can specify the -Silent command line option for all possible functions of the MegaCLI Configuration Utility. If
you enter this option at the command line, no message displays on the dialog.
LSI Corporation
- 168 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.5
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Pre-boot MegaCLI
Pre-boot MegaCLI
A second CLI utility, known as Pre-boot MegaCLI (PCLI), is available. You can enter this utility during bootup. PCLI gives
you an alternative way to access the MegaCLI utility.
To access PCLI, while the host computer is booting, hold down the Ctrl key and press the Y key when the following
text appears on the dialog:
Copyright© LSI Logic Corporation
Press <Ctrl><Y> for Preboot CLI
The following commands that are in the regular MegaCLI utility are not available in PCLI:





















AdpSetVerify
AdpCcSched
AdpDiag
AdpBatTest
option ProgDsply
CfgSave
CfgRestore
AdpBbuCmd
AdpFacDefSet
AdpFwFlash
AdpGetConnectorMode
AdpSetConnectorMode
DirectPdMapping
ShowEnclList
ShowVpd
EnclLocate
PdFwDownload
SetFacDefault
PDCpyBk
AdpFwDump
Snapshot Enbl/Setprop/Dsbl/TakeSnapshot/DeleteSnapshot
CreateView/DeleteView/Info/Clean/GetViewInfo

AdpSetProp DefaultSnapshotSpace
DefaultViewSpace/AutoSnapshotSpace
4.6
CacheCade Related Options
Use the commands in this section to perform actions related to the MegaRAID CacheCade software and the
MegaRAID CacheCade Pro 2.0 software.
4.6.1
Create a Solid State Drive Cache Drive to Use as Secondary Cache
Use the command in the following table to create a cache drive using the CacheCade software. You can use that cache
as secondary cache. The CacheCade software has much greater capacity than HDDs.
LSI Corporation
- 169 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
CacheCade Related Options
Table 25 Create a Solid State Cache Drive to Use as Secondary Cache
4.6.2
Convention
MegaCli -CfgCachecadeAdd -Physdrv[E0:S0,...] {-Name LdNamestring} -aN|a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
This command is used to create CacheCade software that you can use as secondary cache.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots to use to construct a drive
group.
-Name LdNamestring: This is the name given to the CacheCade software cache drive.
Delete a Solid State Drive Cache Drive
Use the command in the following table to delete a CacheCade software cache drive or multiple cache drives on the
selected controllers.
Table 26 Delete Solid State Cache Drives
4.6.3
Convention
MegaCli -CfgCachecadeDel -LX|-L0,2,5...|-LALL -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Deletes the specified CacheCade software cache drive or drives on the selected controllers. You can delete
multiple CacheCade software cache drives or all of the CacheCade software caches.
Associate/Disassociate Virtual Drives
Use this command in the following table to associate or disassociate virtual drives with a CacheCade Pro 2.0 virtual
drive.
Table 27 Associate/Disassociate Virtual Drives
4.6.4
Convention
MegaCLI -Cachecade -assign|-remove -Lx|-L0,1,2|-LALL -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Assigns or removes association of virtual drives with the CacheCade pool.
-assign: Associates virtual drives with a CacheCade Pro 2.0 virtual drive.
-remove: Disassociates virtual drives with a CacheCade Pro 2.0 virtual drive.
Display CacheCade Pro 2.0 Configurations on a Controller
Use this command in the following table to display all the existing CacheCade Pro 2.0 configurations on a selected
controller.
Table 28 Display CacheCade Pro 2.0 Configurations on a Controller
4.6.5
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgCacheCadeDsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays all the existing CacheCade Pro 2.0 configurations on a selected controller.
Create a RAID Drive Group for CacheCade Pro 2.0 from All Unconfigured Good Drives
Use the command in the following table to create one RAID drive group, for CacheCade Pro 2.0, out of all of the
unconfigured good drives, and a hot spare, if desired. This is for RAID levels 0, 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60. All free drives are used
to create a new drive group and, if desired, one hot spare drive. If it is not possible to use all of the free drives, the
command will abort with a related error level. If there are drives of different capacities, the largest drive is used to
make the hot spare.
LSI Corporation
- 170 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
CacheCade Related Options
NOTE The firmware supports only 32 drives per drive group. If there are more than 32 unconfigured good drives,
MegaCLI cannot configure any of the drives, and the command will abort.
Table 29 Create a RAID Drive Group for CacheCade Pro 2.0 from All Unconfigured Good Drives
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgLdAdd -rX[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] [WT|WB] [NORA|RA] [Direct|Cached]
[CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-szXXX [-szYYY ...]] [-strpszM] [Hsp[E0:S0,...]] [-AfterLdX] [-Force]|[FDE|CtrlBased] [-Default| -Automatic| None| -Maximum| -MaximumWithoutCaching] [-Cache] -aN
Description
Creates one RAID drive group out of all of the unconfigured good drives, and a hot spare, if desired. This is for
RAID levels 0, 1, 5, or 6. All free drives are used to create a new drive group and, if desired, one hot spare drive.
-Rx[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the RAID level and the drive enclosure/slot numbers used to construct a drive
group.
-WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead), Selects read policy.
-Direct, -Cached: Selects cache policy.
-CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
Hsp: Specifies drive to make the hot spare with.
-Force: Specifies that drive coercion is used to make the capacity of the drives compatible. Drive coercion is a
tool for forcing drives of varying capacities to the same capacity so they can be used in a drive group.
-Cache : Specifies that SSD Caching is enabled for the Drive group.
NOTE Previously, -szXXX expressed capacity in MB but now you can enter the capacity in your choice of units.
For example, to create a virtual drive of 10 GB, enter the size as sz10GB. If you do not enter a unit, by default it is
considered as MB.
4.6.6
Remove Blocked Access on a Virtual Drive
Use this command in the following table to change the access policy for a virtual drive by removing a blocked access
on that virtual drive. At times, an error may occur in the CacheCade Pro 2.0 virtual drive and this causes a blocked
access to the associated virtual drive.
Table 30 Remove Blocked Access on a Virtual Drive
Convention
MegaCLI -LDSetProp {-Name LdNamestring} | -RW|RO|Blocked|RemoveBlocked |
WT|WB|ForcedWB [-Immediate]|RA|NORA …………. -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Allows you to change the following virtual drive parameters:
[WT|WB|ForcedWB]:Specifies the write policy—WT (Write Through, WB (Write Back), ForcedWB (Forced
Write Back). If you specify the ForcedWB parameter, the write policy will always be writeback, even if the virtual
drive becomes degraded.
-Immediate: Indicates that the changes take place immediately.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead): Selects read policy.
-Cached, -Direct: Selects cache policy.
-CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
-RW, -RO, Blocked: Selects access policy.
-RemoveBlocked: Removes the blocked access on the associated virtual drive.
-EnDskCache: Enables drive cache.
-DisDskCache: Disables drive cache.
LSI Corporation
- 171 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.6.7
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
CacheCade Related Options
Create RAID 0 Configuration with SSD Caching
Use this command in the following table to create virtual drives with RAID 0 configurations and enable SSD caching
on them
Table 31 Create RAID 0 Configuration with SSD Caching
4.6.8
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgEachDskRaid0 [WT|WB] [NORA|RA] [Direct|Cached]
[CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-strpszM]|[FDE|CtrlBased] [-Default| Automatic| -None| -Maximum|-MaximumWithoutCaching] [-Cache] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Creates virtual drives with RAID 0 and enables SSD caching on these newly created virtual drives.
-WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead): Selects read policy.
-Cached, -Direct: Selects cache policy.
-CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
[-Default| -Automatic| -None| -Maximum| -MaximumWithoutCaching]: If the controller
supports power savings on virtual disk, these options specify the possible levels of power savings that can be
applied on a virtual disk.
[-Cache]: Specifies that SSD caching is enabled.
Create a RAID Level 10, 50, 60 (Spanned) Configuration with SSD Caching
Use the command in the following table to create a RAID 10, RAID 50, or RAID 60 configuration with SSD caching to
the existing configuration on the selected controller.
Table 32 Create a RAID Level 10, 50, 60 (spanned) Configuration with SSD Caching
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgSpanAdd -r10 -Array0[E0:S0,E1:S1] -Array1[E0:S0,E1:S1] [ArrayX[E0:S0,E1:S1] ...] [WT|WB] [NORA|RA] [Direct|Cached]
[CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-szXXX[-szYYY ...]][-strpszM][-AfterLdX][Force]|[FDE|CtrlBased] [-Default| -Automatic| -None| -Maximum| MaximumWithoutCaching] ] [-Cache] -aN
Description
Creates a RAID level 10, 50, or 60 (spanned) configuration from the specified drive groups. Even if no
configuration is present, you must use this option to write the configuration to the controller.
Note that RAID 10 supports up to eight spans with a maximum of 32 drives in each span. (There are factors,
such as the type of controller, that limit the number of drives you can use.) RAID 10 requires an even number of
drives, as data from one drive is mirrored to the other drive in each RAID 1 drive group. You can have an even or
odd number of spans.
Multiple drive groups are specified using the –ArrayX[E0:S0,...] option. (Note that X starts from 0, not
1.) All of the drive groups must have the same number of drives. At least two drive groups must be provided.
The order of options {WT |WB} {NORA | RA} {Direct | Cached} is flexible.
The size option, -szXXXXXXXX, can be accepted to allow slicing in the spanned drive groups if the controller
supports this feature. The [–afterLdX] option is accepted if the size option is accepted. CT exits and does
not create a configuration if the size or the afterLd option is specified but the controller does not support
slicing in the spanned drive groups.
NOTE Previously, -szXXX expressed capacity in MB but now you can enter the capacity in your choice of units.
For example, to create a virtual drive of 10 GB, enter the size as sz10GB. If you do not enter a unit, by default it is
considered as MB.
[-Default| -Automatic| -None| -Maximum| -MaximumWithoutCaching]: If the controller
supports power savings on virtual disk, these options specify the possible levels of power savings that can be
applied on a virtual disk.
[-Cache]: Specifies that SSD caching is enabled.
LSI Corporation
- 172 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.6.9
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Software License Key
Delete Virtual Drives with SSD Caching
Use the command in the following table to delete one or all virtual drives that have SSD caching enabled.
Table 33 Delete Virtual Drives with SSD Caching
4.6.10
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgLdDel -LX|-L0,2,5...|-LALL [-Force] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Deletes virtual drives associated with a CacheCade virtual drive, with a write policy, using the Force option.
[-Force]: Specifies that the data is not flushed before deleting the virtual drive.
Clear Configurations on CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drives
Use the command in the following table if the selected controller has any CacheCade Pro 2.0 virtual drives or if any
data exists in the cache and you want to clear all existing configurations on a controller.
Table 34 Clear Configurations on CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drives
4.6.11
Convention
MegaCLI -cfgclr [-force] -a0
Description
Clears all existing configurations on a controller if the controller has any CacheCade virtual drives or if any data
exists in the cache.
[-Force]: Specifies that the data is not flushed before deleting the virtual drive.
Create a CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drive with RAID Level and Write Policy
Use the command in the following table to create a CacheCade Pro 2.0 virtual drive with RAID level and Write Policy
settings.
Table 35 Create a CacheCade Pro 2.0 Virtual Drive with RAID level and Write Policy
4.7
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgCacheCadeAdd [-rX] -Physdrv[E0:S0,...] {-Name LdNamestring}
[WT|WB|ForcedWB] [-assign -LX|L0,2,5..|LALL] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots to use to construct a drive
group.
-Name LdNamestring: This is the name given to the CacheCade software cache drive.
[-rX]: Specifies the RAID level.
[WT|WB|ForcedWB]:Specifies the write policy—WT (Write Through, WB (Write Back), ForcedWB (Forced
Write Back). While creating a CacheCade virtual drive, if you specify the ForcedWB parameter, even if the
CacheCade virtual drive goes into a degraded mode, the write policy stays as Write Back.
[-assign]: Specifies that the virtual drive can be associated with a CacheCade virtual drive.
Software License Key
Use the commands in this section to obtain a software license key to enable the advanced features present in the
controller.
Table 36 Software License Key
Convention
MegaCli ELF –GetSafeId –a0
Description
Displays the Safe ID of the controller.
Convention
MegaCli ELF -ControllerFeatures -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
LSI Corporation
- 173 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.8
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
SafeStore Security Options
Description
Displays the Advanced Software Options that are enabled on the controller including the ones in trial mode.
Convention
MegaCli -ELF -Applykey key <-val> [Preview] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Applies the Activation Key either in preview mode or in real mode.
Convention
MegaCli -ELF -TransferToVault -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Transfers the Activated Advanced Software Options from NVRAM to keyvault.
Convention
MegaCli -ELF -DeactivateTrialKey -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Deactivates the trial key.
Convention
MegaCli -ELF -ReHostInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the re-host information, and if re-hosting is necessary it displays the controller and keyvault serial
numbers.
Convention
MegaCli -ELF -ReHostComplete -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Indicates to the controller that re-host is complete.
SafeStore Security Options
Use the commands in this section to manage the SafeStore Security feature. This feature offers the ability to encrypt
data on disks and use disk-based key management to provide data security. With this feature, data is encrypted by the
drives. You can designate which data to encrypt at the individual virtual drive level.
This solution provides data protection in the event of theft or loss of physical drives. With self-encrypting disks, if you
remove a drive from its storage system or the server in which it is housed, the data on that drive is encrypted and
useless to anyone who attempts to access without the appropriate security authorization.
Any encryption solution requires management of the encryption keys. This feature provides a way to manage these
keys. You can change the encryption key for all ServeRAID controllers that are connected to SED drives. All SED drives,
whether locked or unlocked, always have an encryption key. This key is set by the drive and is always active. When the
drive is unlocked, the data to host from the drive (on reads) and from the host to the drive cache (on writes) is always
provided. However, when resting on the drive platters, the data is always encrypted by the drive.
In the following options, [E0:S0, E1:S1] specifies the enclosure ID and slot ID for the drive.
4.8.1
Use Instant Secure Erase on a Physical Drive
Use the command in the following table to perform an instant secure erase of data on a physical drive. The Instant
Secure Erase feature lets you erase data on SED drives.
Table 37 Use Instant Secure Erase on a Physical Drive
Convention
MegaCli -PDInstantSecureErase -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] | [-Force] -aN|a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Erases the data on a specified drive or drives.
-PDInstantSecureErase: Use the Instant Secure Erase feature to erase data on a drive or drives.
-PhysDrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the drives on which you want to perform the Instant Secure Erase.
-Force: Specifies that the MegaCLI utility does not ask you for confirmation before it performs this
command (you might lose data using this option with some commands).
NOTE Previously -szXXX expressed capacity in MB, but now you can enter the capacity in your choice of
units. For example, to create a virtual drive of 10 GB, enter the size as sz10GB. If you do not enter a unit, MB is
used as the default unit.
LSI Corporation
- 174 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.8.2
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
SafeStore Security Options
Secure Data on a Virtual Drive
Use the command in the following table to secure data on a virtual drive.
Table 38 Secure Data on a Virtual Drive
4.8.3
Convention
MegaCli -LDMakeSecure -Lx|-L0,1,2,...|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Secures data on a specified virtual drive or drives.
Destroy the Security Key
Use the command in the following table to destroy the security key.
Table 39 Destroy the Security Key
4.8.4
Convention
MegaCli -DestroySecurityKey | [-Force] -aN
Description
Destroys the security key. The controller uses the security key to lock and unlock access to the secure user data.
This key is encrypted into the security key blob and stored on the controller.
Re-provisioning disables the security system of a device. For a controller, it involves destroying the security key.
For SED drives, when the drive lock key is deleted, the drive is unlocked and any user data on the drive is
securely deleted.
Create a Security Key
Use the command in the following table to create a security key.
Table 40 Create a Security Key
4.8.5
Convention
MegaCli -CreateSecurityKey -SecurityKey sssssssssss | [-Passphrase
sssssssssss] |[-KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk] -aN
Description
Creates a security key based on a user-provided string. The controller uses the security key to lock and unlock
access to the secure user data. This key is encrypted into the security key blob and stored on the controller. If
the security key is unavailable, user data is irretrievably lost. You must take all precautions to never lose the
security key.
-CreateSecurityKey: Creates the security key.
-SecurityKey sssssssssss: Enters the new security key. The security key is case-sensitive. It must be
between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and
one non-alphanumeric character (for example, < > @ +). The space character is not permitted.
[-Passphrase sssssssssss]: Enters the new passphrase.The pass phrase is case-sensitive. It must be
between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and
one non-alphanumeric character (for example, < > @ +). The space character is not permitted.
Create a Drive Security Key
If you want to use the security key using electronic key management system (EKMS), the EKMS must provide the
security key. You can create a security key using EKMS, or switch from EKM to LKM, or from LKM to EKM.
Table 41 Drive Security Key
Convention
MegaCli -CreateSecurityKey useEKMS –aN
Description
Creates security key using EKMS.
Convention
MegaCli -ChangeSecurityKey -SecurityKey sssssssssss [-Passphrase
sssssssssss] | [-KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk] –aN
LSI Corporation
- 175 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.8.6
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
SafeStore Security Options
Description
To change the security from EKMS to LKM.
Convention
MegaCli -ChangeSecurityKey useEKMS -OldSecurityKey sssssssssss –aN
Description
To change security from LKM to EKM.
Convention
MegaCli -ChangeSecurityKey -useEKMS –aN-
Description
Rekeying in EKMS
Change the Security Key
Use the command in the following table to change they security key to a new security key.
Table 42 Change the Security Key
4.8.7
Convention
MegaCli -ChangeSecurityKey -OldSecurityKey sssssssssss | -SecurityKey
sssssssssss| [-Passphrase sssssssssss] | [-KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk] -aN
Description
Changes a security key to a new security key.
-ChangeSecurityKey: Changes the security key.
-OldSecurityKey sssssssssss: Enters the old security key. The security key is case-sensitive. It must
be between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one lowercase letter, one uppercase letter,
and one non-alphanumeric character (for example, < > @ +). The space character is not permitted.
-SecurityKey sssssssssss: Enters the new security key. The security key is case-sensitive. It must be
between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and
one non-alphanumeric character (for example, < > @ +). The space character is not permitted.
[-Passphrase sssssssssss]: Enters the new pass phrase. The pass phrase is case-sensitive. It must be
between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and
one non-alphanumeric character (for example, < > @ +). The space character is not permitted.
[-KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk]: Enters the security key ID. The key ID displays when you have to enter a security
key. If you have multiple security keys, the security key ID helps you determine which security key to enter.
Get the Security Key ID
Use the command in the following table to display the security key ID.
Table 43 Get the Security Key ID
4.8.8
Convention
MegaCli -GetKeyID [-PhysDrv[E0:S0]] -aN
Description
-GetKeyID: Displays the security key ID.
Set the Security Key ID
Use the command in the following table to set the security key ID.
Table 44 Set the Security Key ID
4.8.9
Convention
MegaCli -SetKeyID -KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk -aN
Description
-SetKeyID: Set the security key ID.
-KeyID kkkkkkkkkkk: Enters the security key ID. The key ID displays when you have to enter a security key.
If you have multiple security keys, the security key ID helps you determine which security key to enter.
Verify the Security Key
Use the command in the following table to verify the security key.
LSI Corporation
- 176 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Controller Property-Related Options
Table 45 Verify the Security Key ID
4.9
Convention
MegaCli -VerifySecurityKey -SecurityKey sssssssssss -aN
Description
Verifies that the security key is the correct one for the self-encrypted disk.
-VerifySecurityKey: Verifies the security key.
-SecurityKey sssssssssss: Enters the new security key. The security key is case-sensitive. It must be
between 8 and 32 characters and contain at least one number, one lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and
one non-alphanumeric character (for example, < > @ +). The space character is not permitted.
Controller Property-Related Options
You can use the commands in this section to set or display properties related to the controllers, such as the virtual
drive parameters and factory defaults.
4.9.1
Display Controller Properties
Use the command in the following table to display parameters for the selected controllers.
Table 46 Controller Parameters
4.9.2
Convention
MegaCli -AdpAllinfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL|
Description
Displays information about the controller, including the cluster state, BIOS, alarm, firmware version, BIOS
version, battery charge counter value, rebuild rate, bus number and device number, present RAM, memory
size, serial number of the board, and SAS address.
Display Number of Controllers Supported
Use the command in the following table to display the number of controllers supported on the system.
Table 47 Number of Controllers Supported
4.9.3
Convention
MegaCli -AdpCount
Description
Displays the number of controllers supported on the system and returns the number to the operating system.
Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild
Use the command in the following table to turn automatic rebuild on or off for the selected controllers. If you have
configured hot spares and enabled automatic rebuild, the RAID controller automatically tries to use them to rebuild
failed drives. Automatic rebuild also controls whether a rebuild starts when a drive that was part of the drive group is
reinserted.
Table 48 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild
Convention
MegaCli –AdpAutoRbld -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Enables or disables automatic rebuild on the selected controllers.
The -Dsply option shows the status of the automatic rebuild state.
LSI Corporation
- 177 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.9.4
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Controller Property-Related Options
Flush Controller Cache
Use the command in the following table to flush the controller cache on the selected controllers. This option sends
the contents of cache memory to the virtual drives. If the MegaRAID system must be powered down rapidly, you must
flush the contents of the cache memory to preserve data integrity.
Table 49 Cache Flush on Selected Controller
4.9.5
Convention
MegaCli –AdpCacheFlush -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Flushes the controller cache on the selected controllers.
Set Controller Properties
This command sets the properties on the selected controllers. For example, for {RebuildRate -val}, you can enter a
percentage between 0 percent and 100 percent as the value for the rebuild rate. The rebuild rate is the percentage of
the compute cycles dedicated to rebuilding failed drives. At 0 percent, the rebuild is done only if the system is not
doing anything else. At 100 percent, the rebuild has a higher priority than any other system activity.
NOTE Use the default rebuild rate of 30 percent and the default patrol read rate of 30 percent.
Use the Set Controller Properties command to display the list of properties that you can set for the
controllers.
Table 50 Set Controller Properties
Convention
MegaCli –AdpSetProp {CacheFlushInterval –val}|{RebuildRate val}|{PatrolReadRate –val}|{BgiRate –val}|{CCRate –val}| {ReconRate –
val}|{SpinupDriveCount –val}|{SpinupDelay –val}|{CoercionMode –val}
|{ClusterEnable –val}|{PredFailPollInterval –val}|{BatWarnDsbl –
val}|{EccBucketSize –val}|{EccBucketLeakRate –val}|{AbortCCOnError –
val}|AlarmEnbl | AlarmDsbl | AlarmSilence |{SMARTCpyBkEnbl –val} |
{SSDSMARTCpyBkEnbl -val}| NCQEnbl | NCQDsbl |
{MaintainPdFailHistoryEnbl -val} | {RstrHotSpareOnInsert -val} |
{EnblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs -val} | {DisableOCR -val}
|{BootWithPinnedCache -val} | AutoEnhancedImportEnbl |
AutoEnhancedImportDsbl |{CopyBackDsbl - val} |
{AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl -val} | {LoadBalanceMode - val} |{UseFDEOnlyEncrypt -val} | {DsblSpinDownHsp -val} | {SpinDownTime val}| {Perfmode -val} | {EnableJBOD -val} | {DsblCacheBypass -val} |
{useDiskActivityForLocate -val} | {SpinUpEncDrvCnt -val} |
{SpinUpEncDelay -val}| {ENABLEEGHSP -val} | {ENABLEEUG -val} |
{ENABLEESMARTER -val} | {DPMenable -val} | {-PrCorrectUncfgdAreas val} | -aN| -a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the properties on the selected controllers. The possible settings are:
CacheFlushInterval: Cache flush interval in seconds. Values: 0 to 255.
RebuildRate: Rebuild rate (in percentage). Values: 0 to 100.
PatrolReadRate: Patrol read rate (in percentage). Values: 0 to 100.
BgiRate: Background initialization rate (in percentage). Values: 0 to 100.
CCRate: Consistency check rate (in percentage). Values: 0 to 100.
ReconRate: Reconstruction rate (in percentage). Values: 0 to 100.
LSI Corporation
- 178 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Controller Property-Related Options
SpinupDriveCount: Maximum number of drives to spin up at one time. Values: 0 to 255.
SpinupDelay: Number of seconds to delay among spinup groups. Values: 0 to 255.
CoercionMode: Drive capacity Coercion mode. Values: 0 – None, 1 – 128 MB, 2 – 1 GB.
ClusterEnable: Cluster is enabled or disabled. Values: 0 – Disabled, 1 – Enabled.
PredFailPollInterval: Number of seconds between predicted fail polls. Values: 0 to 65535.
BatWarnDsbl: Disable warnings for missing battery or missing hardware. Values: 0 – Enabled, 1 –
Disabled.
EccBucketSize: Size of ECC single-bit-error bucket. Values: 0 to 255.
EccBucketLeakRate: Leak rate (in minutes) of ECC single-bit-error bucket. Values: 0 to 65535.
AbortCCOnError: If the firmware detects inconsistency, then CC is aborted. Values: 0 – Disabled,1
– Enabled.
AlarmEnbl: Set alarm to enabled.AlarmDsbl: Set alarm to disabled.
AlarmSilence: Silence an active alarm.
SMARTCpyBkEnbl: Enable copyback operation on SMART errors. Copyback is initiated when the
first SMART error occurs on a drive that is part of a virtual drive. Values: 0 – Disabled, 1 – Enabled.
SSDSMARTCpyBkEnbl: Enable copyback operation on Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting
Technology (SMART) errors on a CacheCade software. Copyback is initiated when the first SMART
error occurs on a SSD that is part of a virtual drive. Values: 0 – Disabled, 1 – Enabled.
NCQEnbl: Enable the native command queueing.
NCQDsbl: Disable the native command queueing.
MaintainPdFailHistoryEnbl: Enable maintenance of the history of a failed drive. Values: 0 –
Disabled, 1 –Enabled. For mor e information on Maintain PD Fail History, see Controller Information
Menu Options.
RstrHotSpareOnInsert: Restores a hot spare on insertion. Values: 0 – Do not restore hot spare
on insertion, 1 – Restore hot spare on insertion.
EnblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs: Enable spindown of unconfigured drives. Values: 0 – Disabled, 1
– Enabled.
DisableOCR: Disable or Enable Online controller reset.Values: 0 – Online controller reset enabled,
1 – Online controller reset disabled.
BootWithPinnedCache: Enable the controller to boot with pinned cache. Values: 0 – Do not
allow controller to boot with pinned cache, 1 – Allow controller to boot with pinned cache.
AutoEnhancedImportEnbl: Enable automatic foreign configuration import.
AutoEnhancedImportDsbl: Disable automatic foreign configuration import.
CopyBackDsbl: Disable or enable the copyback operation. Values: 0 – Enable Copyback, 1 –
Disable Copyback.
AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl: Detects automatically if the backplane has been disabled. Values:
0 – Enable Auto Detect of SGPIO and i2c SEP, 1 – Disable Auto Detect of SGPIO, 2 – Disable Auto
Detect of i2c SEP , 3 – Disable Auto Detect of SGPIO and i2c SEP .
LoadBalanceMode: Disable or enable the load balancing mode. Values: 0 – Auto Load balance
mode, 1 – Disable Load balance mode.
UseFDEOnlyEncrypt: Use encryption on FDE drives only. Values: 0 – FDE and controller
encryption both are allowed, 1 – Only allows support for FDE encryption, prohibits controller.
DsblSpinDownHsp: Disable spin down Hot spares option. Values: 0 – Disabled; that is, spin down
hot spares, 1 – Enabled i.e. do not spin down hot spares.
LSI Corporation
- 179 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Controller Property-Related Options
SpinDownTime: Spin down time in minutes. That is, after SpinDownTime, the firmware will start
spinning down unconfigured good drives and hot spares depending on the DsblSpinDownHsp
option. Values: 30 to 65535.
PerfMode: Performance tuning. Values: 0 – Best IOPS, 1 –Least Latency.
EnableJBOD: Enable JBOD Mode. Values: 0 – Disable JBOD mode , 1 – Enable JBOD mode.
DsblCacheBypass: Disable Cache Bypass. Values: 0 – Enable Cache Bypass, 1 – Disable Cache
Bypass.
useDiskActivityForLocate: Enable use of disk activity to locate a physical disk in Chenbro
backplane. Values: 0 – Disable use of disk activity to locate a physical disk in Chenbro backplane, 1 –
Enable use of disk activity to locate a physical disk in Chenbro backplane.
SpinUpEncDrvCnt: Max number of drives within an enclosure to spin up at one time. Values: 0 to
255.
SpinUpEncDelay: Number of seconds to delay among spinup groups within an enclosure .
Values: 0 to 255.
ENABLEEGHSP: Enable global hot spare is three bits or adapter level for setting hot spare
properties. Values – 0: Disable and 1 – Enable.
ENABLEEUG: Enable unconfigured good for emergency is three bits or adapter level for setting hot
spare properties. Values: 0 – Disable, 1 – Enable.
ENABLEESMARTER: Emergency for SMARTer is three bits or adapter level for setting hot spare
properties. Values: 0 – Disable, 1 – Enable.
AutoEnhancedImportEnbl: Enable the automatic enhanced import of foreign drives.
AutoEnhancedImportDsbl: Disable the automatic enhanced import of foreign drives.
PrCorrectUncfgdAreas: informs the firmware whether the media errors found during the PR
can be corrected or not. Values: 0 – Disable, 1 – Enable.
Examples of Set Controller Properties
Following are examples of some of the properties of the Set Controller Properties command.

MegaCli -AdpSetProp -CacheFlushInterval 30 a0
Sets the Cache flush interval for 30 seconds. Values: 0 to 255.

MegaCli -AdpSetProp - EccBucketLeakRate 1200 a0
Specifies a leak rate of 1200 minutes of ECC single-bit-error bucket. Values: 0 to 65535.

MegaCli -AdpSetProp - AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl 1 a0
Specifies that the auto detect option (of SGPIO) of backplane is disabled. Values: 0, 1, 2, and 3.
4.9.6
Display Specified Controller Properties
Use the command in the following table to display specified properties on the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 180 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Controller Property-Related Options
Table 51 Display Specified Controller Properties
Convention
MegaCli -AdpGetProp CacheFlushInterval | RebuildRate | PatrolReadRate | BgiRate |
CCRate | ReconRate | SpinupDriveCount | SpinupDelay | CoercionMode | ClusterEnable |
PredFailPollInterval | BatWarnDsbl | EccBucketSize | EccBucketLeakRate |
EccBucketCount | AbortCCOnError | AlarmDsply | SMARTCpyBkEnbl | SSDSMARTCpyBkEnbl |
NCQDsply | MaintainPdFailHistoryEnbl | RstrHotSpareOnInsert | DisableOCR | EnableJBOD
| DsblCacheBypass | BootWithPinnedCache | AutoEnhancedImportDsply
|AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl | EnblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs | SpinDownTime |
DefaultSnapshotSpace | DefaultViewSpace | AutoSnapshotSpace | CopyBackDsbl |
LoadBalanceMode | UseFDEOnlyEncrypt | UseDiskActivityForLocate | DefaultLdPSPolicy |
DisableLdPsInterval | DisableLdPsTime | SpinUpEncDrvCnt | SpinUpEncDelay | ENABLEEGHSP
| ENABLEEUG | ENABLEESMARTER | Perfmode | -DPMenable -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the properties on the selected controllers.
EccBucketCount: Count of single-bit ECC errors currently in the bucket.
NCQDsply: Returns NCQ setting. Values: 0 – Enabled, 1– Disabled.
DefaultSnapshotSpace: Default Snapshot Space (in percentage).
DefaultViewSpace: Default View Space (in percentage).
AutoSnapshotSpace: Default Auto Snapshot Space (in percentage).
WBSupport: Enables support for the Write Back option as the Write Policy.
See ***UNRESOLVED*** for explanations of the other options.
NOTE The tty log can be saved at the controller level.
Examples of Display Specified Controller Properties
Following are examples of some of the properties of the Display Specified Controller Properties command.

MegaCli -AdpGetProp SpinupDriveCount a0
Displays the maximum number of drives that spin up at one time (in seconds).

MegaCli -AdpGetProp BatWarnDsbl a0
Displays the disable warnings for a missing battery or missing hardware.

MegaCli -AdpGetProp NCQDsply a0
Displays if the NCQ option is enabled on the specified controller or not.

MegaCli -AdpGetProp ENABLEEGHSP a0
Displays the Emergency Global Hot spares option set on the specified controller.
4.9.7
Set Factory Defaults
Use the command in the following table to set the factory defaults on the selected controllers.
Table 52 Set Factory Defaults
4.9.8
Convention
MegaCli -AdpFacDefSet -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the factory defaults on the selected controllers.
Set SAS Address
Use the command in the following table to set the SAS address on the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 181 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Controller Property-Related Options
Table 53 Set SAS Address on Controller
4.9.9
Convention
MegaCli –AdpSetSASA str[0-64] -aN
Description
Sets the controller’s SAS address. This string must be a 64-digit hexadecimal number.
Set Time and Date on Controller
Use the command in the following table to set the time and date on the selected controllers.
Table 54 Set Time and Date on Controller
4.9.10
Convention
MegaCli –AdpSetTime yyyymmdd HH:mm:ss -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the time and date on the controller. This command uses a 24-hour format.
For example, 7 p.m. displays as 19:00:00. The order of date and time is reversible.
Display Time and Date on Controller
Use the command in the following table to display the time and date on the selected controllers.
Table 55 Display Time and Date on Controller
4.9.11
Convention
MegaCli –AdpGetTime -aN
Description
Displays the time and date on the controller. This command uses a 24-hour format. For example, 7 p.m. would
display as 19:00:00.
Get Connector Mode
Use the command in the following table to display which ports are enabled (Internal/External, 0/1) on the MegaRAID
SAS 8888ELP RAID controller.
NOTE This command is reserved strictly for the SAS 8888ELP RAID controller at this time. You must enable specific
ports depending on how you intend to use the controller.
Table 56 Get Connector Mode
4.9.12
Convention
MegaCli -AdpGetConnectorMode -ConnectorN|-Connector0,1|-ConnectorAll -aN|a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays which ports are enabled (Internal/External, 0/1).
For example, if internal port 0 is active, internal ports 0–3 are active. If external port 1 is active, external ports 4–
7 are active.
Set Connector Mode
Use the command in the following table to set (enable) the connectors for the MegaRAID SAS 8888ELP RAID
connectors that are listed in Section, Get Connector Mode.
NOTE This command is reserved strictly for the SAS 8888ELP RAID controller at this time. You must enable specific
ports depending on how you intend to use the controller.
LSI Corporation
- 182 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Patrol Read-Related Controller Properties
Table 57 Set Connector Mode
4.10
Convention
MegaCli -AdpSetConnectorMode -Internal|-External|-Auto -ConnectorN|Connector0,1|-ConnectorAll -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets (enables) the connectors listed in the GetConnectorMode command. For example, to enable internal
ports 4-7 on controller 0, run the following command:
MegaCli –AdpSetConnectorMode –Internal –Connector1 –a0
Patrol Read-Related Controller Properties
You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for patrol read. A patrol read scans the system for
possible drive errors that could lead to drive failure, then takes action to correct the errors. The goal is to protect data
integrity by detecting drive failure before the failure can damage data. The corrective actions depend on the virtual
drive configuration and the type of errors. Patrol read affects performance; the more iterations there are, the greater
the impact.
4.10.1
Set Patrol Read Options
Use the command in the following table on the selected controllers to set the patrol read options.
Table 58 Set Patrol Read Options
4.10.2
Convention
MegaCli –AdpPR –Dsbl|EnblAuto|EnblMan|Start|Stop|-Suspend|-Resume|Info | {SetStartTime yyyymmdd hh} | {maxConcurrentPD val} -aN| -a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the patrol read options on a single controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers:
-Dsbl: Disables the patrol read for the selected controllers.
-EnblAuto: Enables the patrol read automatically for the selected controllers. This means the patrol read will
start automatically after the controller initialization is complete.
-EnblMan: Enables the patrol read manually for the selected controllers. This means that the patrol read does
not start automatically; it has to be started manually by selecting the Start command.
-Start: Starts the patrol read for the selected controllers.
-Stop: Stops the patrol read for the selected controllers.
-Suspend: Suspends the patrol read.
-Resume: Resumes a suspended patrol read from the point that the patrol read was suspended.
-Info: Displays the following patrol read information for the selected controllers: Patrol read operation mode,
patrol read execution delay value, and patrol read status.
–SetStartTime yyyymmdd hh: Set the start time for the patrol read in year/month/day format.
–maxConcurrentPD: Sets the maximum number of concurrent drives on which the patrol read runs.
Set Patrol Read Delay Interval
Use the command in the following table on the selected controllers to set the time between patrol read iterations.
Table 59 Set Patrol Read Delay Interval
Convention
MegaCli –AdpPRSetDelay –Val -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the time between patrol read iterations on a single controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers:
-Val: Sets delay time between patrol read iterations. The value is time of delay in hours. A value of zero means
no delay and an immediate restart.
LSI Corporation
- 183 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.10.3
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
BIOS-Related Properties
Set Patrol Read on Single, Multiple, or All Adapters
Use this command in the following table to set patrol read on a single, multiple, or on all adapters.
Table 60 Set Patrol Read on Single, Multiple, or All Adapters
4.11
Convention
MegaCli -AdpPR Dsbl|EnblAuto|EnblMan|Start|Suspend|Resume|Stop|Info|SSDPatrolReadEnbl
|SSDPatrolReadDsbl
Description
Sets Patrol read on a single, multiple, or on all adapters. Patrol read will not start on degraded or on an
undergoing Initialization/Consistency Check.
Dsbl: Disables Patrol Read for the selected adapter(s).
EnblAuto: Enables Patrol Read automatically for the selected adapter(s). Patrol Read will start automatically
on the scheduled intervals.
EnblMan: Enables Patrol Read manually for the selected adapter(s). Patrol Read does not start automatically; it
has to be started manually by selecting the Start command.
Start: Starts Patrol Read for the selected adapter(s).
Suspend: Suspend Patrol Read for the selected adapter(s).
Resume: Resume Patrol Read for the selected adapter(s).
Stop: Stops Patrol Read for the selected adapter(s).
Info: Displays the following Patrol Read information for the selected adapter(s): Patrol Read operation mode,
patrol Read execution delay value, and patrol Read status.
SSDPatrolReadEnbl: Enables Patrol Read that includes virtual drives constituting only SSD drives
SSDPatrolReadDsbl: Disables Patrol Read that includes virtual drives constituting only SSD drives
aN: N specifies the adapter number for the command.
a0,1,2: Specifies the command is for adapters 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or more adapters in this
manner.
aALL: Specifies that the command is for all adapters.
BIOS-Related Properties
You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for BIOS-related options.
4.11.1
Set or Display Bootable Virtual Drive ID
Use the command in the following table to set or display the ID of the bootable virtual drive.
NOTE This option does not write a boot sector to the virtual drive. The operating system does not load if the boot
sector is incorrect.
Table 61 Bootable Virtual Drive ID
Convention
MegaCli –AdpBootDrive {-Set {–Lx | -physdrv[E0:S0]}} | {-Unset {-Lx | physdrv[E0:S0]}} | -Get -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets or displays the bootable virtual drive ID:
-Set –Lx| -physdrv[E0:S0]: Sets the virtual drive as bootable so that during the next reboot, the BIOS
looks for a boot sector in the specified virtual drive. Identifies the physical drive in the virtual drive, by
enclosure and slot, to use to boot.
-Get: Displays the bootable virtual drive ID.
- Unset: Unsets the bootable virtual drive.
LSI Corporation
- 184 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.11.2
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
Select BIOS Status Options
Use the command in the following table to set the options for the BIOS status.
Table 62 Options for BIOS Status
4.12
Convention
MegaCli –AdpBIOS -Enbl|-Dsbl| SOE | BE | EnblAutoSelectBootLd |
DsblAutoSelectBootLd |-Dsply| -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the BIOS options. The following are the settings you can select on a single controller, multiple controllers,
or all controllers:
-Enbl, -Dsbl: Enables or disables the BIOS status on selected controllers.
-SOE: Stops on BIOS errors during POST for selected controllers. When set to -SOE, the BIOS stops in case of a
problem with the configuration. This setting allows you to enter the configuration utility to resolve the
problem. This setting is available only when you enable the BIOS status.
-BE: Bypasses BIOS errors during the POST. This value is available only when you enable the BIOS status.
-EnblAutoSelectBootLd | DsblAutoSelectBootLd: Enable or disable automatic selection of the
boot virtual drive.
-Dsply: Displays the BIOS status on selected controllers.
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for BBU-related options.
4.12.1
Display BBU Information
Use the command in the following table to display complete information about the BBU for the selected controllers.
Table 63 Display BBU Information
4.12.2
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays complete information about the BBU, such as status, capacity information, design information,
battery backup charge time, and properties.
Display BBU Status Information
Use the command in the following table to display complete information about the status of the BBU, such as
temperature and voltage, for the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 185 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
Table 64 Display BBU Status Information
4.12.3
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -GetBbuStatus –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays complete information about the BBU status, such as the temperature and voltage. The information
displays in the following formats:
BBU Status for Adapter: xx
Battery Type: XXXXXX(string)
Voltage: xx mV
Current: xx mA
Temperature: xx C°
Firmware Status: xx
Battery state: xx
Gas Gauge Status:
Fully Discharged: Yes/No
Fully Charged: Yes/No
Discharging: Yes/No
Initialized: Yes/No
Remaining Time Alarm: Yes/No
Remaining Capacity Alarm: Yes/No
Discharge Terminated: Yes/No
Over Temperature: Yes/No
Charging Terminated: Yes/No
Over Charged: Yes/No
Additional status information displays differently for iBBU and BBU.
For iBBU:
Relative State of Charge: xx
Charger System State: xx
Charger System Ctrl: xx
Charging Current: xx mA
Absolute State of Charge: xx%
Max Error: xx%
For BBU:
Relative State of Charge: xx
Charger Status: xx
Remaining Capacity: xx mAh
Full Charge Capacity: mAh
isSOHGood: Yes/No
Display BBU Capacity
Use the command in the following table to display the BBU capacity for the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 186 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
Table 65 Display BBU Capacity Information
4.12.4
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -GetBbuCapacityInfo –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays BBU capacity information. The information displays in the following formats:
BBU Capacity Info for Adapter: x
Relative State of Charge: xx%
Absolute State of Charge: xx%
Remaining Capacity: xx mAh
Full Charge Capacity: xx mAh
Run Time to Empty: xxx Min
Average Time to Empty: xxx Min
Average Time to Full: xxx Min
Cycle Count: xx
Max Error: xx%
Display BBU Design Parameters
Use the command in the following table to display BBU design parameters for the selected controllers.
Table 66 Display BBU Design Parameters
4.12.5
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -GetBbuDesignInfo –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays information about the BBU design parameters. The information displays in the following formats:
BBU Design Info for Adapter: x
Date of Manufacture: mm/dd, yyyy
Design Capacity: xxx mAh
Design Voltage: mV
Serial Number: 0xhhhh
Pack Stat Configuration: 0xhhhh
Manufacture Name: XXXXXX(String)
Device Name: XXXXXX(String)
Device Chemistry: XXXXXX(String)
Display Current BBU Properties
Use the command in the following table to display the current BBU properties for the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 187 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
Table 67 Display Current BBU Properties
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -GetBbuProperties –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays current properties of the BBU. The information displays in the following formats:
BBU Properties for Adapter: x
Auto Learn Period: xxx Sec
Next Learn Time: xxxx Sec
Learn Delay Interval=<value>: Value in hours, not greater than 168 hours (7 days)
Auto-Learn Mode=<value>: Value can be 0, 1, or 2.
NOTE If the battery type is IBBU08, then the BBU mode is displayed as a part of GetBbuProperties.
NOTE When the value in the Auto Learn Mode is set from 1 (Disabled) to 0 (Enabled), the controller firmware
resets the battery module properties to initiate an immediate battery learn cycle. The Learn Delay Interval field
and the Next Learn Time field will not be updated until the battery relearn is completed. Once the relearning
cycle is completed, the value in the Next Learn Time field and in the Learn Delay Interval field will display the
new time (in seconds) of the next battery learning cycle.
4.12.6
Start BBU Learning Cycle
Use the command in the following table to start the BBU learning cycle on the selected controllers. A learning cycle is
a battery calibration operation performed by the controller periodically (approximately every three months) to
determine the condition of the battery.
Table 68 Start BBU Learning Cycle
4.12.7
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -BbuLearn -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Starts the learning cycle on the BBU. No parameter is needed for this option.
Place Battery in Low-Power Storage Mode
Use the command in the following table to place the battery into Low-Power Storage mode on the selected
controllers. This mode saves battery power consumption.
Table 69 Place Battery in Low-Power Storage Mode
4.12.8
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -BbuMfgSleep -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Places the battery in Low-Power Storage mode. The battery automatically exits this state after 5 seconds.
Set BBU Properties
Use the command in the following table to set the BBU properties on the selected controllers after reading from the
file.
LSI Corporation
- 188 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Options for Displaying Logs Kept at the Firmware Level
Table 70 Set BBU Properties
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -SetBbuProperties -f<fileName> -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the BBU properties on the selected controllers after reading from the file (.ini file). The information
displays in the following format:
autoLearnPeriod : 1800Sec
nextLearnTime : 12345678Sec seconds past 1/1/2000
learnDelayInterval: 24hours – Not greater than 7 days
autoLearnMode: 0, 0 – Enabled, 1 - Disabled, 2 – WarnViaEvent.
bbuMode: Some examples of the values for this property are Mode 4 - Standard 48 hour with visible learn
cycles., Mode 1 - 12 hour with transparent learn cycle, and Mode 3 - 24 hour with transparent learn cycle. To
view all the values for this property, run the command MegaCli -adpBBucmd -getbbumodes -aN.
NOTE You can change only two of these parameters: learnDelayInterval and autoLearnMode.
NOTE If the battery type is IBBU08, then in autoLearnmode, the WarnViaEvent is not supported.
4.12.9
Seal the Gas Gauge EEPROM Write Access
Use the command in the following table to seal the gas gauge EEPROM write access on the selected controllers.
Table 71 Seal the Gas Gauge EEPROM Write Access
4.13
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -BbuMfgSeal -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Seals the gas gauge EEPROM write access.
Options for Displaying Logs Kept at the Firmware Level
Use the commands in this section to select the display settings for the event log and the BBU terminal log, which are
kept at the firmware level.
4.13.1
Event Log Management
Use the command in the following table to manage the event entries in the event log for the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 189 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Options for Displaying Logs Kept at the Firmware Level
Table 72 Event Log Management
Convention
MegaCli –AdpEventLog –GetEventLogInfo –aN | –GetEvents {-info -warning critical -fatal} | GetSinceShutdown {-info -warning -critical -fatal} |
GetSinceReboot {-info -warning -critical -fatal} | IncludeDeleted {-info warning -critical -fatal} | {GetLatest <number> {-info -warning -critical fatal} } -f <filename> | Clear -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL | {GetCCIncon} -f <filename>
-LX| -L0,2,5...|-LALL -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages event log entries. The following are the settings you can select on a single controller, multiple
controllers, or all controllers:
-GetEventlogInfo: Displays overall event information such as total number of events, newest sequence
number, oldest sequence number, shutdown sequence number, reboot sequence number, and clear sequence
number.
-GetEvents: Gets event log entry details. The information shown consists of total number of entries
available at the firmware side since the last clear and details of each entries of the error log. Start_entry
specifies the initial event log entry when displaying the log.
-info: Informational message. No user action is necessary.
-warning: A component may be close to a failure point.
-critical: A component has failed, but the system has not lost data.
-fatal: A component has failed, and data loss has occurred or will occur.
-GetSinceShutdown: Displays all of the events since last controller shutdown.
-GetSinceReboot: Displays all of the events since last controller reboot.
-IncludeDeleted: Displays all events, including deleted events.
-GetLatest: Displays the latest number of events, if any exist. The event data will be written to a file (.txt)
in reverse order.
-Clear: Clears the event log for the selected controllers.
-GetCCIncon: Displays the events relating to inconsistent data found during a consistency check. The event
data will be written to a file (.txt).
NOTE -AdpEventLog does not support the file option in PCLI.
Examples of Event Log Management
Following are examples of some of the properties of the Event Log Management command.

MegaCli -AdpEventLog -GetEvents - warning -f abc.txt -a0
Displays the event log details and warns you that a component may be close to a failure point. The event log
details is written in the abc.txt file.

MegaCli -AdpEventLog -GetSinceReboot -f event.txt a0
Displays all the events since the last controller reboot. All the event data is written in the event.txt file.

MegaCli -AdpEventLog -GetCCIncon -f abc.txt a0
Displays the events relating to inconsistent data found during a consistency check and writes all the event data in
the abc.txt file.
4.13.2
Set BBU Terminal Logging
Use the command in the following table to set the BBU terminal logging for the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 190 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Configuration-Related Options
Table 73 Set BBU Terminal Logging
4.14
Convention
MegaCli –FwTermLog -Bbuoff |–BbuoffTemp|-Bbuon|-BbuGet|Dsply|Clear -aN|
-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets BBU terminal logging options. The following are the settings you can select on a single controller, multiple
controllers, or all controllers:
-Bbuoff: While storing the TTY log in DRAM, BBU is not used for buffering. In the case of power loss, this log
is lost.
–BbuoffTemp: TTY BBU buffering will be set to off only for this boot.
-Bbuon: While storing the TTY log in DRAM, BBU is used for buffering. The Log is preserved even in the case of
power loss.
-BbuGet: This parameter gives the current BBU state, i.e., if BBU is on or off for TTY history.
- Dsply: Displays the TTY log (firmware terminal log) entries with details on the given adapters. The
information shown consists of the total number of entries available at a firmware side.
-Clear: Clears the TTY log.
Configuration-Related Options
You can specify the drives by using the Enclosure ID:Slot ID for SAS controllers. This option assumes that all drives are
connected to the controller through an enclosure. If the drives are not connected to an enclosure, they are assumed to
be connected to Enclosure 0. In this case no slot exists, so you can use the pdlist command to get the slot
equivalent number. (This option applies to all commands that use the Enclosure ID:Slot ID format.) MegaCLI expects
the input in [:S] format for directly attached devices.
In the following options, [E0:S0, E1:S1] specifies the enclosure ID and slot ID for the drive.
4.14.1
Create a RAID Drive Group from All Unconfigured Good Drives
Use the command in the following table to create one RAID drive group out of all of the Unconfigured Good drives,
and a hot spare, if desired. This command is for RAID levels 0, 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60. All free drives are used to create a new
drive group and, if desired, one hot spare drive. If it is not possible to use all of the free drives, the command will abort
with a related error level. If drives of different capacities exist, the largest drive is used to make the hot spare.
NOTE The firmware supports only 32 drives per drive group. If more than 32 Unconfigured Good drives exist, MegaCLI
cannot configure any of the drives, and the command aborts.
LSI Corporation
- 191 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Configuration-Related Options
Table 74 Create a Drive Group from All of the Unconfigured Drives
Convention
MegaCli –CfgLDAdd -RX[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] [WT | WB] [NORA | RA] [Direct |
Cached] [CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-szXXX [-szYYY ...]] [-strpszM] [Hsp[E0:S0,...]] [-AfterLdX] | -Force [FDE|CtrlBased]aN
Description
Creates one RAID drive group out of all of the Unconfigured Good drives, and a hot spare, if desired. This is for
RAID levels 0, 1, 5, or 6. All free drives are used to create a new drive group and, if desired, one hot spare drive.
-Rx[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the RAID level and the drive enclosure/slot numbers used to construct a drive
group. E0: Enclosure number; S0: Slot number.
-WT (Write Through), WB (Write Back): Selects the write policy.
-NORA (No Read Ahead), RA (Read Ahead): Selects the read policy.
-Direct, -Cached: Selects the cache policy.
-CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
-szXXXXXXXX: Specifies the capacity for the virtual drive, where XXXX is a decimal number of MB. However,
the actual capacity of the virtual drive can be smaller, because the driver requires the number of blocks from
the drives in each virtual drive to be aligned to the stripe size. If multiple size options are specified, CT
configures the virtual drives in the order of the options entered in the command line. The configuration of a
particular virtual drive will fail if the remaining capacity of the drive group is too small to configure the virtual
drive with the specified capacity. This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space
available in the drive group.
-strpszM: Specifies the stripe size, where the stripe size values are 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB,
512 KB, or 1024 KB.
Hsp: Specifies the drive with which to make the hot spare.
-Force: Specifies that drive coercion is used to make the capacity of the drives compatible. Drive coercion is a
tool for forcing drives of varying capacities to the same capacity so they can be used in a drive group.
NOTE Previously, -szXXX expressed capacity in MB, but now you can enter the capacity in your choice of units.
For example, to create a virtual drive of 10 GB, enter the size as sz10GB. If you do not enter a unit, MB is the
default unit.
Examples of Create a RAID Drive Group from All Unconfigured Good Drives
Following are examples of some of the properties of the Create a RAID Drive Group from All Unconfigured-Good
Drives command.

MegaCli -CfgLDAdd r0[252:0] a0
Creates a RAID drive group for RAID level 0 for the selected drive (252:0).

MegaCli -CfgLDAdd r0[252:1] WB Direct sz10GB a0
Creates a RAID drive group for RAID level 0 for the selected drive (252:1) with WB write policy, a Direct cache
policy, and a capacity of 10 GB for the virtual drive.

MegaCli -CfgLDAdd r5[252:2,252:3,252:4] a0
Creates a RAID drive group for RAID level 5 for the selected drives (252:2, 252:3, 252:4).
4.14.2
Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration
Use the command in the following table to add a RAID level 0, 1, 5, or 6 configuration to the existing configuration on
the selected controller. For RAID levels 10, 50, or 60, see Section, Add RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configuration.
LSI Corporation
- 192 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Configuration-Related Options
Table 75 Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration
Convention
MegaCli –CfgLDAdd -R0|-R1|-R5|-R6[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] [WT | WB] [NORA | RA]
[Direct | Cached] [CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-szXXXXXXXX [-szYYYYYYYY
[... ]]] [-strpszM] [–Hsp[E5:S5,...]] [–afterLdX] [–Force] -aN
Description
Adds a RAID level 0, 1, 5, or 6 configuration to a specified controller. Even if no configuration is present, you
have the option to write the configuration to the controller.
Note that RAID 1 supports up to 32 drives in a single span of 16 drive groups. RAID 1 requires an even number
of drives, because data from one drive is mirrored to the other drive in each RAID 1 drive group.
-Rx[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the RAID level and the drive enclosure/slot numbers to construct a drive group.
-WT (Write Through), WB (Write Back): Selects the write policy.
-NORA (No Read Ahead), RA (Read Ahead): Selects the read policy.
-Cached, -Direct: Selects the cache policy.
[{CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU }]: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
-szXXXXXXXX: Specifies the capacity for the virtual drive, where XXXX is a decimal number of MB. However,
the actual capacity of the virtual drive can be smaller, because the driver requires the number of blocks from
the drives in each virtual drive to be aligned to the stripe size. If multiple size options are specified, CT
configures the virtual drives in the order of the options entered in the command line. The configuration of a
particular virtual drive will fail if the remaining capacity of the drive group is too small to configure the virtual
drive with the specified capacity. This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space
available in the drive group.
-strpszM: Specifies the stripe size, where the stripe size values are 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB,
512 KB, or 1024 KB.
Hsp[E5:S5,...]: Creates hot spares when you create the configuration. The new hot spares will be
dedicated to the virtual drive used in creating the configuration. This option does not allow you to create
global hot spares. To create global hot spares, you must use the -PdHsp command with proper
subcommands.
You can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in the virtual drive. You can
specify which free slot should be used by specifying the -afterLdX. This command is optional. By default,
the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual drive. This option is valid only if the virtual drive is
already used for configuration.
Examples of Adding RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration
Following are examples of some of the properties of the Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration command.

MegaCLI cfgldadd R0[21:1] a0
Adds RAID level 0 configuration to the selected drive (21:1).

MegaCLI cfgldadd R1[21:3,21:4] a0
Adds RAID level 1 configuration to the selected drives (21:3, 21: 4). RAID 1 requires an even number of drives.

MegaCLI cfgldadd R0 [21:1] Direct NORA WT strpsz8 a0
Adds a RAID level 0 configuration to the selected drive (21:1) with a Direct cache policy, a NORA read policy, a WT
write policy, and a stripe size of 8 KB.
4.14.3
Add RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configuration
Use the command in the following table to add a RAID 10, RAID 50, or RAID 60 configuration to the existing
configuration on the selected controller. For RAID levels 0, 1, 5, or 6, see Section, Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration.
LSI Corporation
- 193 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Configuration-Related Options
Table 76 Add RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configurations
Convention
MegaCli –CfgSpanAdd -R10|-R50|R60 –Array0[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] –
Array1[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] [...] [WT | WB] [NORA | RA] [Direct | Cached]
[CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-szXXXXXXXX [-szYYYYYYYY [... ]]] [-strpszM]
[–afterLdX] | -Force [FDE|CtrlBased] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Creates a RAID level 10, 50, or 60 (spanned) configuration from the specified drive groups. Even if no
configuration is present, you must use this option to write the configuration to the controller.
Note that RAID 10 supports up to 8 spans with a maximum of 32 drives in each span. (Some factors, such as the
type of controller, limit the number of drives you can use.) RAID 10 requires an even number of drives, because
data from one drive is mirrored to the other drive in each RAID 1 drive group. You can have an even number or
odd number of spans.
Multiple drive groups are specified using the –ArrayX[E0:S0,...] option. (Note that X starts from 0, not
1.) All of the drive groups must have the same number of drives. At least two drive groups must be provided.
The order of options {WT |WB} {NORA | RA} {Direct | Cached} is flexible.
-strpszM: Specifies the stripe size, where the stripe size values are 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB,
512 KB, or 1024 KB.
The size option, -szXXXXXXXX, can be accepted to allow slicing in the spanned drive groups if the controller
supports this feature. The [–afterLdX] option is accepted if the size option is accepted. CT exits and does
not create a configuration if the size or the -afterLdx option is specified, but the controller does not
support slicing in the spanned drive groups.
NOTE Previously, -szXXX expressed capacity in MB, but now you can enter the capacity in your choice of units.
For example, to create a virtual drive of 10 GB, enter the size as sz10GB. If you do not enter a unit, MB is the
default unit.
Examples of Adding RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configuration
Following are examples of some properties of the ADD RAID 10, 50, or 60 configuration command.

MegaCLI cfgspanadd R10 Array0[21:5,21:6] Array1[21:7,21:8] Direct NORA WT
strpsz8 a0
Creates a RAID level 10 configuration for the specified drive groups, with a Direct cache policy, a NORA read
policy, a WT write policy and a stripe size of 8 KB.

MegaCLI cfgspanadd R10 Array0[21:1,21:2] Array1[21:3,21:4] Direct WT strpsz64
a0
Creates a RAID level 10 configuration for the specified drive groups with a Direct cache policy, a WT write policy,
and a stripe size of 64 KB.
4.14.4
Clear the Existing Configuration
Use the command in the following table to clear the existing configuration on the selected controllers.
Table 77 Clear Existing Configuration
4.14.5
Convention
MegaCli –CfgClr -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Clears the existing configuration.
Save the Configuration on the Controller
Use the command in the following table to save the configuration for the selected controllers to the given file name.
LSI Corporation
- 194 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Configuration-Related Options
Table 78 Save Configuration on the Controller
4.14.6
Convention
MegaCli –CfgSave –f FileName -aN
Description
Saves the configuration for the selected controllers to the given file name.
Restore the Configuration Data from File
Use the command in the following table to read the configuration from the file and load it on the selected controllers.
You can restore the read/write properties and RAID configuration using hot spares.
Table 79 Restore Configuration Data from File
4.14.7
Convention
MegaCli –CfgRestore –f FileName -aN
Description
Reads the configuration from the file, and loads it on the controller. MegaCLI can store or restore all read and
write controller properties, all read and write properties for virtual drives, and the RAID configuration,
including hot spares. Note the following:

MegaCLI does not validate the setup when restoring the RAID configuration.

The -CfgSave option stores the configuration data and controller properties in the file. Configuration
data has only the device ID and sequence number information of the drives used in the configuration. The
CfgRestore option fails if the same device IDs of the drives are not present.
Manage Foreign Configuration Information
Use the command in the following table to manage configurations from other controllers, called foreign
configurations, for the selected controllers. You can scan, preview, import, and clear foreign configurations.
NOTE The actual status of virtual drives and drives can differ from the information displayed in the –Scan option. Run
the –Preview option before you import a foreign configuration.
Table 80 Manage Foreign Configuration Information
4.14.8
Convention
MegaCli -CfgForeign -Scan | [-SecurityKey sssssssssss] | -Dsply [x] | [SecurityKey sssssssssss] | -Preview [x] | [-SecurityKey sssssssssss] | Import [x] | [-SecurityKey sssssssssss] | -Clear [x] | [-SecurityKey
sssssssssss] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages foreign configurations. The options for this command follow:
-Scan: Scans and displays available foreign configurations.
-SecurityKey: This key is based on a user-provided string. The controller uses the security key to lock and
unlock access to the secure user data. This key is encrypted into the security key blob and stored on the
controller. If the security key is unavailable, user data is irretrievably lost. You must be careful to never lose the
security key.
-Preview: Provides a preview of the imported foreign configuration. The foreign configuration ID (FID) is
optional.
-Dsply: Displays the foreign configuration.
-Import: Imports the foreign configuration. The FID is optional.
-Clear [FID]: Clears the foreign configuration. The FID is optional.
Delete Specified Virtual Drives
Use the command in the following table to delete one, multiple, or all virtual drives on the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 195 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Virtual Drive-Related Options
Table 81 Delete Specified Virtual Drives
4.14.9
Convention
MegaCli –CfgLDDel –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Deletes the specified virtual drives on the selected controllers. You can delete one virtual drive, multiple virtual
drives, or all of the selected virtual drives on selected controllers.
Display the Free Space
Use the command in the following table to display the free space that is available to use for configuration on the
selected controllers.
Table 82 Display Free Space
4.15
Convention
MegaCli –CfgFreeSpaceInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays all of the free space available for configuration on the selected controllers. The information displayed
includes the number of drive groups, the number of spans in each drive group, the number of free space slots
in each drive group, the start block, and the size (in both blocks and megabytes) of each free space slot.
Virtual Drive-Related Options
You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the virtual drives and perform actions on them.
4.15.1
Display Virtual Drive Information
Use the command in the following table to display virtual drive information for the selected controllers.
Table 83 Display Virtual Drive Information
4.15.2
Convention
MegaCli –LDInfo –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays information about the virtual drives on the selected controllers.
This information includes the name, RAID level, RAID level qualifier, capacity in megabytes, state, stripe size,
number of drives, span depth, cache policy, access policy, and ongoing activity progress, if any, including
initialization, background initialization, consistency check, and reconstruction.
Change the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
Use the command in the following table to change the cache policy and access policy for the virtual drives on the
selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 196 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Virtual Drive-Related Options
Table 84 Change Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
4.15.3
Convention
MegaCli -LDSetProp {-Name LdNamestring} | -RW|RO|Blocked|RemoveBlocked |
WT|WB|ForcedWB [-Immediate] |RA|NORA| Cached|Direct | EnDskCache|DisDskCache | CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU |-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Allows you to change the following virtual drive parameters:
-WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
-Immediate: Indicates that the changes take place immediately.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead): Selects read policy.
-Cached, -Direct: Selects cache policy.
-CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
-RW, -RO, Blocked: Selects access policy.
-EnDskCache: Enables drive cache.
-DisDskCache: Disables drive cache.
Display the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
Use the command in the following table to display cache and access parameters for the virtual drives on the selected
controllers.
Table 85 Display Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
4.15.4
Convention
MegaCli –LDGetProp -Cache | -Access | -Name | -DskCache | -PSPolicy |
Consistency -Lx|-L0,1,2| -Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the cache and access policies of the virtual drives:
-Cache: -Cached, Direct: Displays cache policy.
-WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead): Selects read policy.
-Access: -RW, -RO, Blocked: Displays access policy.
-DskCache: Displays drive cache policy.
-PSPolicy: Displays the default and current power savings policy of the virtual drive.
-Consistency: Displays if the physical drive is consistent or not.
Manage Virtual Drives Initialization
Use the command in the following table to manage initialization of the virtual drives on the selected controllers.
Table 86 Manage Virtual Drive Initialization
Convention
MegaCli –LDInit {–Start [Fast | Full]} |-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply-Lx|L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Allows you to select the following actions for virtual drive initialization:
-Start: Starts the initialization (writing 0s) on the virtual drives and displays the progress (this is optional).
The fast initialization option initializes the first and last 8 Mbyte areas on the virtual drive. The full option allows
you to initialize the entire virtual drive.
-Abort: Aborts the ongoing initialization on the virtual drives.
-ShowProg: Displays the snapshot of the ongoing initialization, if any.
-ProgDsply: Displays the progress of the ongoing initialization. The routine continues to display the
progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed.
LSI Corporation
- 197 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.15.5
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Virtual Drive-Related Options
Manage a Consistency Check
Use the command in the following table to manage a data consistency check (CC) on the virtual drives for the selected
controllers.
Table 87 Manage Consistency Check
4.15.6
Convention
MegaCli -LDCC {-Start [-force]}|-Abort|-Suspend|-Resume|-ShowProg|-ProgDsply
-Lx|-L0,1,2|-LALL -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Allows you to select the following actions for a data CC:
-Start: Starts a CC on the virtual drives, then displays the progress (optional) and time remaining.
-Abort: Aborts an ongoing CC on the virtual drives.
-Suspend: Suspends the CC.
-Resume: Resumes a CC from the point where the CC was suspended.
-ShowProg: Displays a snapshot of an ongoing CC.
-ProgDsply: Displays ongoing CC progress. The progress displays until at least one CC is completed or a key
is pressed.
Schedule a Consistency Check
Use the command in the following table to schedule a consistency check (CC) on the virtual drives for the selected
controllers. There are options to set the mode, change the CC start time, set the delay time and display of the CC info.
Table 88 Schedule Consistency Check
4.15.7
Convention
MegaCli -AdpCcSched -Dsbl|-Info|{-ModeConc | -ModeSeq [-ExcludeLD -LN|L0,1,2] [-SetStartTime yyyymmdd hh ] [-SetDelay val ] } -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Schedules check consistency on the virtual drive of the selected adapter.
Dsbl: Disables a scheduled CC for the given adapters.
Info: Gets information about a scheduled CC for the given adapters.
ModeConc: The scheduled CC on all of the virtual drives runs concurrently for the given adapters.
ModeSeq: The scheduled CC on all of the virtual drives runs sequentially for the given adapters.
ExcludeLd: Specify the virtual drive numbers not included in the scheduled CC. The new list will overwrite
the existing list stored on the controller. This is optional.
StartTime: Sets the next start time. The date is in the format of yyyymmdd in decimal digits and followed by
a decimal number for the hour between 0 ~ 23 inclusively. This is optional.
SetDelay: Sets the execution delay between executions for the given adapters. This is optional.
Values: The value is the length of delay in hours. A value of 0 means continuous execution.
Manage a Background Initialization
Use the command in the following table to enable, disable, or suspend background initialization (BGI), as well as
display initialization progress on the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 198 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Virtual Drive-Related Options
Table 89 Manage Background Initialization
4.15.8
Convention
MegaCli –LDBI -Enbl|-Dsbl|-getSetting|-abort|-Suspend|-Resume|-ShowProg|ProgDsply –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages background initialization options. The following are the background initialization settings you can
select on a single controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers:
-Enbl, -Dsbl: Enables or disables the background initialization on the selected controllers.
-ProgDsply: Displays an ongoing background initialization in a loop. This function completes only when all
background initialization processes complete, or you press a key to exit.
-Abort: Aborts an ongoing background initializations.
-Suspend: Suspends the background initializations.
-Resume: Resumes a background initializations from the point where the background initializations was
suspended.
-ShowProg: Displays the current progress value.
- GetSetting: Displays current background initialization setting (Enabled or Disabled).
Perform a Virtual Drive Reconstruction
Use the command in the following table to perform a reconstruction of the virtual drives on the selected controllers.
Table 90 Virtual Drive Reconstruction
4.15.9
Convention
MegaCli -LDRecon {-Start -rX [{-Add | -Rmv} -Physdrv[E0:S0,...]]}|ShowProg|-ProgDsply -Lx -aN
Description
Controls and manages virtual drive reconstruction. The following are the virtual drive reconstruction settings
you can select on a single controller:
-Start: Starts a reconstruction of the selected virtual drive to a new RAID level.
-rX: Changes the RAID level of the virtual drive when you start reconstruction. You might need to add or
remove a drive to make this possible.
-Start –Add PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....]: Adds listed drives to the virtual drive and starts
reconstruction on the selected virtual drive.
-Start –Rmv PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....]: Removes one drive from the existing virtual drives and
starts a reconstruction.
-ShowProg: Displays a snapshot of the ongoing reconstruction process.
-ProgDsply: Allows you to view the ongoing reconstruction. The routine continues to display progress until
at least one reconstruction is completed or a key is pressed.
Display Information about Virtual Drives and Drives
Use the command in the following table to display information about the virtual drives and drives for the selected
controllers, such as the number of virtual drives, RAID level, and drive capacity.
LSI Corporation
- 199 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Virtual Drive-Related Options
Table 91 Display Virtual Drive and Drive Information
4.15.10
Convention
MegaCli –LDPDInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL|
Description
Displays information about the present virtual drives and drives on the selected controllers. The command
displays the following information.

The number of virtual drives.

The RAID level of the virtual drives.

The device world-wide name.

The device firmware level.

The device write-cache setting.

The device negotiated transfer speed (link speed) for each active or passive port.

The device’s disk group membership.

An indication if the device has flagged a SMART alerts.

The status of each physical port on the physical device (if it is active, passive or disabled).

The firmware version of the device.

The new PD state (UnConfigured - Shielded, Hot Spare - shielded, Configured shielded).

The Shield Counter value.

The last shield diagnostics completion time.

The drive capacity information, which includes raw capacity, coerced capacity, uncoerced capacity, drive
temperature, enclosure position and SAS address.

For SATA devices, it indicates if NCQ is supported/enabled or disabled.
Display the Bad Block Table
Use the command in the following table to check for bad block entries of virtual disks on the selected adapter.
Table 92 Display Virtual Drive and Drive Information
4.15.11
Convention
MegaCLI -GetBbtEntries -Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays information on the bad block entries of virtual disks on the selected adapters.
Recovering and Clearing Punctured Block Entries
You can recover and clear the punctured block area of a virtual drive.
ATTENTION This operation removes any data stored on the physical drives. Back up the good data on the drives before
making any changes to the configuration.
When a Patrol Read or a Rebuild operation encounters a media error on the source drive, it punctures a block on the
target drive to prevent the use of the data with the invalid parity. Any subsequent read operation to the punctured
block completes but with an error. Consequently, the puncturing of a block prevents any invalid parity generation
later while using this block.
To recover or clear the punctured block area of a virtual drive, run a Slow (or Full) Initialization to zero out and
regenerate new parity causing all bad block entries to be removed from the bad block table.
To run a Slow (or Full) Initialization, see Manage Virtual Drives Initialization.
LSI Corporation
- 200 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.15.12
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Virtual Drive-Related Options
Display the Number of Virtual Drives
Use the command in the following table to display the number of virtual drives attached to the controller.
Table 93 Display Number of Virtual Drives
4.15.13
Convention
MegaCli –LDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the number of virtual drives attached to the controller. The return value is the number of virtual
drives.
Clear the LDBBM Table Entries
Use the command in the following table to clear the LDBBM table entries.
Table 94 Clear the LDBBM Table Entries
4.15.14
Convention
MegaCli -LDBBMClr -Lx|-L0,1,2,...|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Clears the LDBBM table entries for the virtual drives on the selected adapters.
Display the List of Virtual Drives with Preserved Cache
Use the command in the following table to display the list of virtual drives that have preserved cache. Preserved cache
is cache that remains in the controller cache after a drive goes offline or missing and that has not been saved to a drive
yet. You can reboot and manage the preserved cache.
Table 95 Display the List of Virtual Drives with Preserved Cache
4.15.15
Convention
MegaCli -GetPreservedCacheList -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the list of virtual drives that have preserved cache.
Discard the Preserved Cache of a Virtual Drive
Use the command in the following table to discard the preserved cache of a virtual drives.
Table 96 Discard the Preserved Cache of a Virtual Drives
4.15.16
Convention
MegaCli -DiscardPreservedCache -Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -force -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Discard the preserved cache of the virtual drives.
Expand a Virtual Drive
Use the command in the following table to expand a virtual drive.
LSI Corporation
- 201 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Drive-Related Options
Table 97 Expand a Virtual Drive
4.16
Convention
MegaCli -LdExpansion -pN -dontExpandArray -Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|aALL
Description
Expands the virtual drive within the existing array or beyond the size of the existing array if you replace the
drives with larger drives.
-pN: Denotes the percentage of the array to use to expand the virtual drive. N ranges from 0 to 100 percent.
For example, -p30 indicates expansion up to 30 percent of available array size.
-dontExpandArray: Expand a virtual drive within the array, even when there is room to expand the array.
For example, you have created a 5-GB RAID 1 virtual drive with two 30-GB drives. The array size is 30 GB and the
virtual drive size is 5 GB. If you replace the two 30-GB, drives with two 60-GB drives, the array size is still 30 GB
(because of previous configuration). You have two options:

Expand the virtual drive within the array. Use the -dontExpandArray option to expand the virtual
drive up to 30 GB.

Expand the virtual drive beyond the existing array size. Use the -pN option to expand the virtual drive
beyond 30 GB and up to 60 GB (the size of the replacement drives)
Drive-Related Options
You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the drives and perform actions on them.
4.16.1
Display Drive Information
Use the command in the following table to display information about the drives on the selected controllers.
Table 98 Display Drive Information
4.16.2
Convention
MegaCli –PDInfo -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL|
Description
Provides information about the drives connected to the enclosure and controller slot. This includes
information such as the enclosure number, slot number, device ID, sequence number, drive type, capacity (if a
drive), foreign state, firmware state, inquiry data, device world-wide name, device firmware level, device writecache setting, device negotiated transfer speed (link speed) for each active or passive port, device’s disk group
membership, if the device has flagged a S.M.A.R.T. alert, the status of each physical port on the physical device
(if it is active, passive or disabled) and firmware version of the device.
For SAS devices, this includes additional information, such as the SAS address of the drive. For SAS expanders,
this command includes additional information, such as the number of devices connected to the expander.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives about which to
provide information.
Set the Drive State to Online
Use the command in the following table to set the state of a drive to Online. In an Online state, the drive is working
normally and is a part of a configured virtual drive.
Table 99 Set Drive State to Online
Convention
MegaCli –PDOnline -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Changes the drive state to Online.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
LSI Corporation
- 202 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.16.3
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Drive-Related Options
Set the Drive State to Offline
Use the command in the following table to set the state of a drive to Offline. In the offline state, the virtual drive is not
available to the RAID controller.
Table 100 Set Drive State to Offline
4.16.4
Convention
MegaCli –PDOffline -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Changes the drive state to Offline.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
Change the Drive State to Unconfigured-Good
Use the command in the following table to change the state of a drive from Unconfigured-Bad to Unconfigured-Good.
Table 101 Change Drive State to Unconfigured Good
4.16.5
Convention
MegaCli –PDMakeGood -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] | [-Force] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Changes the drive state to Unconfigured-Good.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
-Force: Force the drive to the Unconfigured-Good state.
Change the Drive State
Use the command in the following table to change the drive state, as it relates to hot spares, and to associate the drive
to an enclosure and to a drive group for the selected controllers.
Table 102 Change Drive State
4.16.6
Convention
MegaCli –PDHSP {–Set [{-Dedicated -ArrayN |-Array0,1...}] [-EnclAffinity] [nonRevertible] } | -Rmv -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Changes the drive state (as it relates to hot spares) and associates the drive to an enclosure and virtual drive on
a single controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers:
-Set: Changes the drive state to dedicated hot spare for the enclosure.
-Array0: Dedicates the hot spare to a specific drive group number N.
-EnclAffinity: Associates the hot spare to a selected enclosure.
-Rmv: Changes the drive state to Ready (removes the hot spare).
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
You can get the list of arrays by using the CLI command CfgDsply. In the results of the CfgDsply
command, the number associated with DISK GROUPS is the array number.
Manage a Drive Initialization
Use the command in the following table to manage a drive initialization on the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 203 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Drive-Related Options
Table 103 Drive Initialization
4.16.7
Convention
MegaCli –PDClear -Start |-Stop|-ShowProg |-ProgDsply PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages initialization or displays initialization progress on a single controller, multiple controllers, or all
controllers:
-Start: Starts initialization on the selected drives.
-Stop: Stops an ongoing initialization on the selected drives.
-ShowProg: Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the initialization. This option is
useful for running the application through scripts.
-ProgDsply: Displays the ongoing clear progress. The routine continues to display the initialization progress
until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed.
Rebuild a Drive
Use the command in the following table to start or stop a rebuild on a drive and display the rebuild progress. When a
drive in a RAID drive group fails, you can rebuild the drive by re-creating the data that was stored on the drive before it
failed.
Table 104 Rebuild a Drive
4.16.8
Convention
MegaCli –PDRbld –Start |-Stop|-Suspend|-Resume|-ShowProg |-ProgDsply –
PhysDrv [E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages a drive rebuild or displays the rebuild progress on a single controller, multiple controllers, or all
controllers. Note that the drive must meet the capacity requirements before it can be rebuilt, and it must be
part of a drive group:
-Start: Starts a rebuild on the selected drives and displays the rebuild progress (optional).
-Stop: Stops an ongoing rebuild on the selected drives.
-Suspend: Suspends the rebuild.
-Resume: Resumes the rebuild from the point that the rebuild was suspended.
-ShowProg: Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the rebuild. This option is
useful for running the application through scripts.
-ProgDsply: Displays the ongoing rebuild progress. This routine displays the rebuild progress until at least
one initialization is completed or a key is pressed.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
Locate the Drives and Activate LED
Use the command in the following table to locate the drives for the selected controllers and activate the Drive Activity
LED.
Table 105 Locate Drive and Activate LED
Convention
MegaCli -PdLocate {[-start] | -stop} -physdrv[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] -aN|-a0,1,2|aALL
Description
Locates the drives for the selected controllers and activates the Drive Activity LED.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
-Start: Activates LED on the selected physical drives.
-Stop: Stops active LED on the selected physical drives.
LSI Corporation
- 204 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.16.9
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Drive-Related Options
Mark the Configured Drive as Missing
Use the command in the following table to mark the configured drive as missing for the selected controllers.
Table 106 Mark Configured Drive as Missing
Convention
MegaCli –PDMarkMissing –PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Marks the offline drive as missing for the selected controllers.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
NOTE -PdMarkMissing works only on offline drives. If you want to make a configured drive as missing, first mark it
as offline, and then mark it as missing. When PdReplaceMissing is run, the drive becomes offline, and rebuild does
not start automatically. You have to start it explicitly.
Follow these steps to replace the PD or retrieve the PD:
4.16.10
1.
pdgetmissing. (This command reports the array and the row number needed for the next command.)
2.
pdreplacemissing. (Input the array and row number here.)
3.
pdonline.
Display the Drives in Missing Status
Use the command in the following table to mark the configured drive as missing for the selected controllers.
Table 107 Display Drives in MissingStatus
4.16.11
Convention
MegaCli –PDGetMissing -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the drives in missing status. The format follows.
No Row Column SizeExpected(MB)
0
x
y
zzzzzzzzz
Where x is the index to the drive groups, y is the index to the drive in that drive group, and zzzzzz is the
minimum capacity of the drive that can be used as a replacement.
Replace the Configured Drives and Start an Automatic Rebuild
Use the command in the following table to replace configured drives and start an automatic rebuild of the drive for
the selected controllers.
Table 108 Replace Configured Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild
4.16.12
Convention
MegaCli –PDReplaceMissing –PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -ArrayX -RowY -aN
Description
Replaces the configured drives that are identified as missing and then starts an automatic rebuild.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
Prepare the Unconfigured Drive for Removal
Use the command in the following table to prepare the unconfigured drives for removal from the selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 205 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Drive-Related Options
Table 109 Prepare Unconfigured Drives for Removal
4.16.13
Convention
MegaCli –PDPrpRmv [-Undo] – PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Prepares unconfigured drives for removal. The firmware spins down this drive. The drive state is set to
Unaffiliated, which marks it as offline even though it is not a part of a configuration.
-Undo: This option undoes this operation. If you select undo, the firmware marks this drive as Unconfigured
Good.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
Display Total Number of Drives
Use the command in the following table to display the total number of drives attached to an controller. Drives can be
attached directly or through enclosures.
Table 110 Display Number of Drives Attached to an Controller
4.16.14
Convention
MegaCli –PDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the total number of drives attached to an controller. Drives can be attached directly or through
enclosures. The return value is the number of drives.
Display List of Physical Devices
Use the command in the following table to display a list of the physical devices connected to the selected controllers.
Table 111 Display List of Physical Devices Attached to Controllers
4.16.15
Convention
MegaCli –PDList –aN|-a0,1..|-aAll|
Description
Displays information about all drives and other devices connected to the selected controllers. This command
displays the following information

The information such as the drive type

The capacity (if a drive)

The serial number

The drive temperature, enclosure position

The device world-wide name

The device firmware level

The device write-cache setting

The device negotiated transfer speed (link speed) for each active or passive port, device’s disk group
membership

If the device has flagged a S.M.A.R.T. alert

The status of each physical port on the physical device (if it is active, passive or disabled) and firmware
version of the device.
For SAS devices, it includes additional information such as the SAS address of the device.
For SAS expanders, it includes additional information, such as the number of drives connected to the
expander.
For SATA devices, it indicates whether NCQ is supported/enabled or disabled.
Download Firmware to the Physical Devices
Use the command in the following table to download firmware to the physical devices connected to the selected
controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 206 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Drive-Related Options
Table 112 Download Firmware to the Physical Devices
Convention
MegaCli -PdFwDownload [offline][ForceActivate] {[-SataBridge] PhysDrv[0:1]}|{-EncdevId[devId]} -f <filename> -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Flashes the firmware with the file specified at the command line. The firmware files used to flash a physical
device can be of any format. The CLI utility assumes that you provide a valid firmware image, and it flashes the
same. The physical device needs to do error checking.
-SataBridge: Allows you to download the SATA bridge firmware in online mode.
-Physdrv[0:1]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives. Flashes the firmware to
only one physical drive.
-EncdevId[devId]: Specifies the enclosure device ID. See Section, Display Enclosure Information for more
enclosure information.
NOTE The PdFwDownload command does not support LSI SAS1 expander firmware upgrade.
4.16.16
Configure All Free Drives into a RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration for a Specific Controller
Use the command in the following table to download firmware to the physical devices connected to the selected
controllers.
Table 113 Configure All Free Drives into a RAID 0, 1, 5 or 6 Configuration for a Specific Controller
Convention
MegaCli -CfgAllFreeDrv -rX [-SATAOnly] [-SpanCount XXX] [WT|WB] [NORA|RA]
[Direct|Cached] [CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-strpszM] [-HspCount XX [HspType -Dedicated|-EnclAffinity|-nonRevertible]]| [FDE|CtrlBased] [Default| -Automatic| -None| -Maximum| -MaximumWithoutCaching] [-Cache] -aN
Description
Adds all of the unconfigured physical drives to a RAID level 0, 1, 5, or 6 configuration on a specified controller.
Even if no configuration is present, you have the option to write the configuration to the controller.
rX[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the RAID level and the physical drive enclosure/slot numbers to construct a disk
group.
WT (Write Through), WB (Write Back): Selects the write policy.
NORA (No Read Ahead),RA (Read Ahead) Selects the read policy.
[Direct | Cached]: Selects the cache policy.
[{CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU }]: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
szXXXXXXXX: Specifies the size for the virtual disk, where XXXX is a decimal number of MB. However, the
actual size of the virtual drive might be smaller, because the driver requires the number of blocks from the
physical drives in each virtual drive to be aligned to the stripe size.
If multiple size options are specified, CT configures the virtual drives in the order of the options entered in the
command line. The configuration of a particular virtual drive fails if the remaining size of the array is too small
to configure the virtual drive with the specified size. This option can also be used to create a configuration on
the free space available in the array.
strpszM: Specifies the stripe size, where the stripe size values are 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB,
512 KB, or 1024 MB.
Hsp[E5:S5,...]: Creates hot spares when you create the configuration. The new hot spares are dedicated
to the virtual drive used to create the configuration. This option does not allow you to create global hot spares.
To create global hot spares, you must use the -PdHsp command with the proper subcommands.
You can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in the virtual drive.
AfterLdX: This command is optional. By default, the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual
drive. This option is valid only if the virtual disk is already used for configuration.
FDE|CtrlBased: If the controller supports the security feature, this option enables FDE/controller-based
encryption on the virtual disk.
Automatic: The firmware shall apply the best power savings mode for the virtual drive, based on the IO
profile and drive's capabilities.
None: No power saving on virtual drives.
Maximum: Maximum power saving on virtual drives.
LSI Corporation
- 207 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.16.17
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Drive-Related Options
Set the Mapping Mode of the Drives to the Selected Controllers
Use the command in the following table to set the mapping mode of the physical devices connected to the selected
controllers.
Table 114 Set the Mapping Mode of the Drive to the Selected Controller
4.16.18
Convention
MegaCli -DirectPdMapping -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the mapping mode of the drives connected to the specified controllers.
Enbl: Enables the direct physical drive mapping mode.
Dsbl: Disables the direct physical drive mapping mode.
Dsply: Displays the current state of the direct physical drive mapping.
Secure Erase for Virtual Drives and Physical Drives
Use the command in the following table to the perform the secure erase operation on a virtual drive or a physical
drive.
The command in this section performs a secure erase. It performs a series of write operations to a drive that overwrites
every user-accessible sector of the drive with specified patterns.
Table 115 Secure Erase for Virtual Drives and Physical Drives
4.16.19
Convention
MegaCli -SecureErase Start[Simple|[Normal [ |ErasePattern
ErasePatternA|ErasePattern ErasePatternA ErasePattern ErasePatternB]]|
[Thorough [ |ErasePattern ErasePatternA|ErasePattern ErasePatternA
ErasePattern ErasePatternB]]]| Stop | ShowProg | ProgDsply [-PhysDrv
[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] | -Lx|-L0,1,2|-LALL] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
The SecureErase command performs a series of write operations to a drive that overwrite every useraccessible sector of the drive with specified patterns. It can be repeated in multiple passes using different data
patterns for enhanced security.
Perform the Copyback Operation on the Selected Drive
Use the command in the following table to the perform the copyback operation on the selected drive.
The copyback feature allows you to copy data from a source drive of a virtual drive to a destination drive that is not a
part of the virtual drive. Copyback is often used to create or restore a specific physical configuration for a drive group
(for example, a specific arrangement of drive group members on the device I/O buses).
Typically, when a drive fails or is expected to fail, the data is rebuilt on a hot spare. The failed drive is replaced with a
new disk. Then the data is copied from the hot spare to the new drive, and the hot spare reverts from a rebuild drive to
its original hot spare status. The copyback operation runs as a background activity, and the virtual drive is still
available online to the host.
LSI Corporation
- 208 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Enclosure-Related Options
Table 116 Perform the Copyback Operation on the Selected Drive
4.17
Convention
MegaCli -PDCpyBk -Start | -Stop|-Suspend|-Resume|-ShowProg|-ProgDsply PhysDrv[E0:S0] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Performs the copyback operation on the selected physical drive.
Start: Initializes the copyback operation on the selected drive.
Stop: Stops the copyback operation on the selected drive.
Suspend: Suspends the copyback operation.
Resume: Resumes a copyback operation from the point that the copyback operation was suspended.
ShowProg: Displays a snapshot of the ongoing copyback operation.
ProgDsply: Allows you to view the ongoing copyback operation. The routine continues to display progress
until at least one copyback is completed or a key is pressed.
-Physdrv[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the physical drive enclosure and the slots for the drives.
Enclosure-Related Options
The commands in this section are used for enclosures.
4.17.1
Display Enclosure Information
Use the command in the following table to display enclosure information for selected controllers.
Table 117 Display Enclosure Information
Convention
MegaCli –EncInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays information about the enclosure for the selected controllers. The following properties are displayed.

The enclosure type.

The enclosure serial number.

The ESM serial number.

The firmware version installed.

The chassis status.

The chassis temperature or threshold status (for example, normal, high, and so on). It is the same as
enclosure temperature from enclosure status.

The fan status (for example, normal, missing, and so on).

The power supply count.

The power supply status for each installed power supply.

The VPD field replaceable unit (FRU) part number.

The enclosure zoning mode.

The enclosure vendor identifier.
NOTE If the properties, FRU Part Number, Enclosure Serial Number, ESM Serial Number, and Enclosure Zoning
Mode are not applicable to your enclosure, N/A is displayed for these fields.
4.17.2
Display Enclosure Status
Use the command in the following table to display the status of the enclosure for selected controllers.
LSI Corporation
- 209 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Flashing the Firmware
Table 118 Display Enclosure Status
4.17.3
Convention
MegaCli –EncStatus -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the status of the enclosure for the selected controllers.
Upgrade the Firmware without Restarting
Use the command in the following table to upgrade the firmware in the enclosure without restarting the enclosure.
Table 119 Upgrade the Firmware without Restarting
4.18
Convention
PdFwDownload [offline][ForceActivate] {[-SataBridge] -PhysDrv[0:1] }|{EncdevId[devId1]} -f <filename> -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
The ForceActivate suboption enables you to upgrade the firmware in the enclosure and activate the
upgraded firmware without restarting the enclosure.
Flashing the Firmware
The options in this section describe the functionality of the existing flash application. The firmware flash options do
not require input from the user.
4.18.1
Flash the Firmware with the ROM File
Use the command in the following table to flash the firmware with the ROM file specified at the command line for the
selected controllers.
Table 120 Flash Firmware with ROM File
4.18.2
Convention
MegaCli –AdpFwFlash –f filename [-NoSigChk] [-NoVerChk]-aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Flashes the firmware with the ROM file specified at the command line.
The –NoSigChk option forces the application to flash the firmware even if the check word on the file does not
match the required check word for the controller. This option flashes the firmware only if the existing firmware
version on the controller is lower than the version on the ROM image.
If you specify –NoVerChk, the application flashes the controller firmware without checking the version of the
firmware image. The version check applies only to the firmware (APP.ROM) version.
This command also supports the “Mode 0” flash functionality. For Mode 0 flash, the controller number is not
valid. There are two possible methods:

Select which controller to flash after the controllers are detected.

Flash the firmware on all present controllers.

The option generates an XML output data.
Flash the Firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM File
Use the command in the following table to flash the firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM file specified at the command
line for the selected controllers. This command is only supported for MS-DOS.
LSI Corporation
- 210 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
SAS Topology
Table 121 Flash Firmware in Mode 0 with ROM File
4.19
Convention
MegaCli –AdpM0Flash –f filename
Description
Flashes the firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM file listed on the command line.
This option supports the Mode 0 flash functionality. For Mode 0 flash, the controller number is not valid. The
method to handle this function, is to flash the firmware on all present controllers which are compatible with
the image.
SAS Topology
The commands in this section are used to display SAS topology.
Use the command in the following table to display the PHY connection information for physical PHY M on the
selected controllers. Each PHY can form one side of the physical link in a connection with a PHY on a different device.
The physical link contains four wires that form two differential signal pairs. One differential pair transmits signals, and
the other differential pair receives signals. Both differential pairs operate simultaneously and allow concurrent data
transmission in both the receive and the transmit directions. PHYs are contained within ports.
A port can contain a single PHY or can contain multiple PHYs. A narrow port contains a single PHY, and a wide port
contains multiple PHYs.
Table 122 Display PHY Connection Information
4.20
Convention
MegaCli –PHYInfo -phyM –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays PHY connection information for physical PHY M on the controllers.
Diagnostic-Related Options
The commands in this section are used to run diagnostic tests.
4.20.1
Start Controller Diagnostics
Use the command in the following table to start the controller diagnostic for a set amount of time.
Table 123 Start Diagnostics Setting
4.20.2
Convention
MegaCli –AdpDiag [val] –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the amount of time for the controller diagnostic to run.
Val: Indicates the time in seconds for the controller diagnostic to run.
Perform a Full Stroke Seek Test
Use the command in the following table to perform a full stroke seek. This command is only supported for MS-DOS.
LSI Corporation
- 211 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Recovery (Snapshot)-Related Options
Table 124 Start Full Stroke Seek Test
4.20.3
Convention
MegaCli -FullStrSeekTest a0
Description
This CLI function is used for testing the server's power supply capability to withstand all drives doing a full
stroke seek. Upon receipt of the CLI command the firmware ceases normal operation, seeks all the drives to
cylinder 0, and waits 5 seconds. After 5 seconds, it seeks for all drives to the last cylinder. The Full Stroke Seek
Test is a continuous operation that runs until power cycle
Start Battery Test
Use the command in the following table to start the battery test. This command requires a system reboot.
Table 125 Start Battery Test
4.21
Convention
MegaCli –AdpBatTest –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Starts the battery test. This command requires that you turn off the power to the system, and then turn on the
power to reboot the system.
Recovery (Snapshot)-Related Options
The commands in this section are used to perform actions with the Recovery advanced software, also known as
Snapshot (LSIP200038104).
The Recovery feature uses Snapshot technology to offer a simplified way to recover lost data and provides protection
for any volume, including the boot volume. You can use the Recovery feature to take snapshots of a volume at
designated point-in-time (PiT) and restore the volume or files from those points in case data is deleted, whether
accidentally or maliciously. MegaRAID Recovery supports up to eight snapshots of PiTs for each volume.
4.21.1
Enable the Snapshot Feature
Use the command in the following table to enable the snapshot feature on a selected virtual drive.
Table 126 Enable the Snapshot Feature
4.21.2
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -Enbl -szXXX SnapshotRepositoryLD N [-AutoSnapshot]
[AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot] -Lx -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Enables the snapshot on the source virtual drive for the corresponding snapshot target virtual drive.
-szXXX: Specifies the size in MB on for the virtual drive, where XXX is a decimal number of MB.
SnapshotRepositoryLD N: Specifies the repository LD number.
-AutoSnapshot: Optional parameter, if specified, enables the AutoSnapshot for the source virtual drive.
-AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot: Optional parameter, if specified, enables the
AutoDeletOldestSnapshot for the source virtual drive.
-Lx: x specifies the source LD number on which to enable snapshot.
Disable the Snapshot Feature
Use the command in the following table to enable the snapshot feature on a selected virtual drive.
LSI Corporation
- 212 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Recovery (Snapshot)-Related Options
Table 127 Disable the Snapshot Feature
4.21.3
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -Dsbl -Lx -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Disables the snapshot on the source virtual drive.
-Lx: x specifies the source LD number on which to disable snapshot.
Take a Snapshot of a Volume
Use the command in the following table to take a snapshot of a volume at designated point-in-time.
Table 128 Take Snapshot of Volume
4.21.4
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -TakeSnapshot [-snapshotName name] [-CreateView [-ViewName
view_name] [-RW|RO|Blocked] [-szXXX]] -LN|-L0,1,2 -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Takes a snapshot of a volume at designated point-in-time.
-snapshotName name: (Optional) If specified, the snapshot is created with the name you enter for it.
-CreateView: (Optional) If specified, this option creates a view for the snapshot. A view contains the content
from the point-in-time (PiT) when the snapshot was made.
-ViewName view_name: (Optional) Specifies the name of the view you created.
-RW|RO|Blocked: (Optional) Specifies the access policy of the view.
-szXXX: Specifies the size of the view in MB where XXX is a decimal number.
-LN: N specifies the source LD number for the command.
Set the Snapshot Properties
Use the command in the following table to set the snapshot properties.
Table 129 Set the Snapshot Properties
4.21.5
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -SetProp {-AutoSnapshot -val} | {-AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot
-val} -Lx -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the Snapshot properties, such as AutoSnapshot and AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot.
-AutoSnapshot: If the value is 0, this command disables the AutoSnapshot feature on source virtual
drive. If the value is 1, it enables the AutoSnapshot feature on source virtual drive.
-AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot: If the value is 0, this command disables the
AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot feature on the source virtual drive. If the value is 1, it enables the
AutoDeleteOldestSnapshot feature on the source virtual drive.
-Lx: x specifies the source LD number for the command.
Delete a Snapshot
Use the command in the following table to delete a snapshot.
LSI Corporation
- 213 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Recovery (Snapshot)-Related Options
Table 130 Delete a Snapshot
4.21.6
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -DeleteSnapshot [SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss | -all] [force|-y] -LN| -L0,1,2 -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Deletes the snapshot and the associated view if -Force or -Y is specified.
-SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss: (Optional) If used, this action deletes the snapshot with the time
stamp that is specified in command line, if it is the oldest PiT.
-force: If specified, this action deletes the snapshot even if it has the view associated with it.
-y: If specified, this action deletes the snapshot even if it has the view associated with it.
-LN: N specifies the source LD number for the command.
-L0,1,2: Specifies the command is for LDs 0, 1, and 2. You can select more than one LD.
Create a View
Use the command in the following table to create a view. A view contains the content from the PiT when the snapshot
was made.
Table 131 Create a View
4.21.7
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -CreateView -SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss [-viewName
NameString] [-RW|RO|Blocked] [-szXXX] -Lx -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL \n", appNameP);
Description
Creates the view on a particular snapshot.
-SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss: Creates the view on the snapshot with the time stamp
yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss.
-viewName NameString: (Optional) Specifies the name of the view.
-RW|RO|Blocked: (Optional) Specifies the access policy of the view.
-szXXX: (Optional) Specifies the size of the view in MB where XXX is a decimal number.
-Lx: x specifies the source LD number for the command.
Delete a View
Use the command in the following table to a view.
Table 132 Delete a View
4.21.8
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -DeleteView [-SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss] -Lx -aN|a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Deletes the view.
-SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss: (Optional) If specified, this action deletes the view on the
snapshot with the time stamp yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss.
-Lx: x specifies the source LD number for the command.
Roll Back to an Older Snapshot
Use the command in the following table to roll the virtual drive back to an older snapshot.
LSI Corporation
- 214 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Recovery (Snapshot)-Related Options
Table 133 Roll Back to an Older Snapshot
4.21.9
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -Rollback -SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss [-Force|-Y] -Lx
-aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Rolls back the virtual drive to an old snapshot. The Rollback option is supported by Preboot MegaCli not by the
OS level MegaCli.
-SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss: Specifies the snapshot with the time stamp yyyymmdd
hh:mm:ss to which it has to roll back.
-Force: If specified, this option overrides the warning message and causes a rollback to an older snapshot.
-Y: If specified, this option overrides the warning message and causes a rollback to an older snapshot.
-Lx: x specifies the source LD number for the command.
Display Snapshot and View Information
Use the command in the following table to display information about the snapshot and the view.
Table 134 Display Snapshot and View Information
4.21.10
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -Info [-SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss | -ViewTime
yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss] -Lx -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays snapshot and view information for the source virtual drive. If the virtual drive is a repository virtual
drive, it displays the LD information, the number of source virtual drives mapped and their target IDs and the
number of holes.
-SnapshotTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss: (Optional) If specified, this displays the snapshot information for
the snapshot with the time stamp yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss.
-ViewTime yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss: (Optional) If specified, this displays the view information for the view
with the time stamp yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss and the associated snapshot information.
-Lx: x specifies the source LD number for the command.
Clean the Recoverable Free Space on the Drives in a Virtual Drive
Use the command in the following table to clean the recoverable free space on the drives in a snapshot repository
virtual drive. The free space is unused space on the drives in a virtual drive.
Table 135 Clean the Recoverable Free Space on the Drives in a Virtual Drive
4.21.11
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -Clean -Lx -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Cleans the recoverable free space on the drives in a snapshot repository virtual drive.
-Lx: x specifies the LD number for the command. The LD must be a repository virtual drive.
Display the Information for a Specific View
Use the command in the following table to display the information for a specific view if you specify the view target ID.
Table 136 Display the Information for a Specific View
Convention
MegaCli -Snapshot -GetViewInfo [-ViewTargetId N ] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the view information about a particular view if you specify the -ViewTargetId. Otherwise, it
displays the information about all of the views.
-ViewTargetId N: (Optional) If specified, this displays the information about the view with the specified
target ID.
LSI Corporation
- 215 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.21.12
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Fast Path-Related Options
Enable the Snapshot Scheduler
The snapshot scheduler in the MegaRAID Storage Manager software helps you automate the creation of point-in-time
(PiT) on one or more virtual discs. You can schedule the snapshot as monthly, weekly, daily, or hourly. The scheduler
does not support biweekly, alternate days, and so on.
NOTE The MegaRAID Storage Manager software or OEM applications must be running to flush file system buffers and
take snapshots when snapshot schedule expires. The system does not support snapshot creation through BMC
(sideband) and snapshot on volumes, which are used for virtual machine creation under virtualized environment. To
flush the file system buffers, you should interface with the hypervisor.
4.22
Fast Path-Related Options
The command in this section displays information about the Fast Path option.
MegaRAID Fast Path is a high-performance IO accelerator for CacheCade SSD Read Caching software drive groups
connected to a MegaRAID controller card. CacheCade SSD Read Caching software has a read performance advantage
over HDDs and uses less power. This feature dramatically boosts storage subsystem bandwidth and overall
transactional application performance when used with a 6 Gb/s MegaRAID SATA+SAS controller.
The Fast Path feature supports full optimization of CacheCade SSD Read Caching software and hard disk drive (HDD)
virtual drive groups to deliver a three-fold improvement in read and write IOPS compared to MegaRAID controllers
not using Fast Path technology. Also, Fast Path software is faster and more cost-effective than current flash-based
adapter card solutions.
4.23
Dimmer Switch-Related Options
The following tables display command information about the Dimmer Switch option.
4.23.1
Display Selected Adapter Properties
Use the command in the following table to display the selected adapter properties.
LSI Corporation
- 216 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Dimmer Switch-Related Options
Table 137 Display the Selected Adapter Properties
4.23.2
Convention
MegaCLI -AdpGetProp CacheFlushInterval
|RebuildRate|PatrolReadRate|BgiRate|CCRate|
ReconRate|SpinupDriveCount|SpinupDelay|
CoercionMode|ClusterEnable|PredFailPollInterval
|BatWarnDsbl|EccBucketSize|EccBucketLeakRate|
EccBucketCount|AbortCCOnError|AlarmDsply|
SMARTCpyBkEnbl|SSDSMARTCpyBkEnbl|NCQDsply|
MaintainPdFailHistoryEnbl|RstrHotSpareOnInsert
|DisableOCR|EnableJBOD|DsblCacheBypass|BootWithPinnedCache|
AutoEnhancedImportDsply|AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl|EnblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs|
SpinDownTime|DefaultSnapshotSpace|DefaultViewSpace|AutoSnapshotSpace|
CopyBackDsbl|LoadBalanceMode| UseFDEOnlyEncrypt|UseDiskActivityForLocate|
DefaultLdPSPolicy|DisableLdPsInterval|
DisableLdPsTime|SpinUpEncDrvCn|SpinUpEncDelay -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays selected adapter properties.
The possible settings follow:
DefaultLdPSPolicy: Default LD power savings policy.
DisableLdPsInterval: LD power savings are disabled for yy hours beginning at disableLdPSTime.
DisableLdPsTime: LD power savings shall be disabled at xx minutes from 12:00 am.
SpinUpEncDrvCnt: Maximum number of drives within an enclosure to spin up at one time.
SpinUpEncDelay: Number of seconds to delay among spinup groups within an enclosure.
Set the Properties on the Selected Adapter
Use the command in the following table to set the properties on the selected adapter.
Table 138 Set the Properties on the Selected Adapter
Convention
MegaCLI -AdpSetProp{CacheFlushInterval -val}|{ RebuildRate val}|{PatrolReadRate -val}| {BgiRate -val}|{CCRate -val}|{ReconRate -val}|
{SpinupDriveCount -val}|{SpinupDelay -val}| {CoercionMode val}|{ClusterEnable -val}| {PredFailPollInterval -val}|{BatWarnDsbl -val}
|{EccBucketSize -val}|{EccBucketLeakRate -val} |{AbortCCOnError val}|AlarmEnbl|AlarmDsbl| AlarmSilence|{SMARTCpyBkEnbl -val}|
{SSDSMARTCpyBkEnbl -val}|NCQEnbl|NCQDsbl| {MaintainPdFailHistoryEnbl -val}|
{RstrHotSpareOnInsert -val}| {EnblSpinDownUnConfigDrvs -val}|{DisableOCR val}|{BootWithPinnedCache -val}|
AutoEnhancedImportEnbl|AutoEnhancedImportDsbl | {CopyBackDsbl val}|{AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl -val}|{LoadBalanceMode val}|{UseFDEOnlyEncrypt -val}|{DsblSpinDownHsp -val}|{SpinDownTime val}|{EnableJBOD -val} | {DsblCacheBypass -val}|{useDiskActivityForLocate val}| {SpinUpEncDrvCnt -val}|{SpinUpEncDelay -val}|{-ENABLEEGHSP -val}|{ENABLEEUG -val }|{ENABLEESMARTER -val}|-aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the properties on the selected adapters.
The possible settings follow:
SpinUpEncDrvCnt: Max number of drives within an enclosure to spin up at one time. Values: 0 to 255.
SpinUpEncDelay: Number of seconds to delay among spinup groups within an enclosure. Values: 0 to 255.
ENABLEEGHSP: Enable global hot spare is 3 bits or adapter level for setting hot spare properties. Values: 0 –
Disable, 1 – Enable.
ENABLEEUG: Enable unconfigured good for emergency is 3 bits or adapter level for setting hot spare
properties. Values: 0 – Disable, 1 – Enable.
ENABLEESMARTER: Emergency for SMARTer is 3 bits or adapter level for setting hot spare properties. Values:
0 –Disable, 1 – Enable.
LSI Corporation
- 217 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.23.3
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Dimmer Switch-Related Options
Display the Power-Saving Level on the Virtual Disk
Use the command in the following table to display the power-saving level on the virtual disk.
Table 139 Display the Power Saving Level on the Virtual Disk
4.23.4
Convention
MegaCLI -LDSetPowerPolicy -Default| -Automatic| -None| -Maximum| MaximumWithoutCaching -Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the power-saving level on the virtual disk.
Add a RAID Level to a Specified Adapter
Use the command in the following table to add a RAID level to a specified adapter.
Table 140 Add a RAID Level to a Specified Adapter
4.23.5
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgLdAdd -rX[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] [WT|WB] [NORA|RA] [Direct|Cached]
[CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-szXXX [-szYYY ...]] [-strpszM] [Hsp[E0:S0,...]] [-AfterLdX] [-Force] | [FDE|CtrlBased] [-Default| Automatic| -None| -MaximumWithCaching| -MaximumWithoutCaching] -aN
Description
-CfgLdAdd:Adds a RAID level 0, 1, 5, or 6 to a specified adapter. Even if no configuration is present, you have
the option to write the configuration to the adapter.
The possible parameters follow:
Rx[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the RAID level and the physical drive enclosure/slot numbers to construct a disk
array.
WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead) : Selects read policy.
[Direct | Cached]: Selects cache policy.
[{CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU }]: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
szXXXXXXXX: Specifies the size for the virtual disk, where XXXX is a decimal number of Mbytes. However, the
actual size of the virtual disk may be smaller, because the driver requires the number of blocks from the
physical drives in each virtual disk to be aligned to the stripe size. If multiple size options are specified, CT will
configure the virtual disks in the order of the options entered in the command line. The configuration of a
particular virtual disk fails if the remaining size of the array is too small to configure the virtual disk with the
specified size. This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array.
strpszM: Specifies the strip size, where the strip size values are 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB,
512 MB, or 1024 MB.
Hsp[E5:S5,...]: Creates hot spares when you create the configuration. The new hot spares will be
dedicated to the virtual disk used in creating the configuration. This option does not allow you to create global
hot spares. To create global hot spares, you must use the -PdHsp command with the proper subcommands.
You can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in the virtual disk.
AfterLdX: This command is optional. By default, the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual
disk. This option is valid only if the virtual disk is already used for configuration.
-Force: This option forces the creation of virtual disk in situations where the application finds that it is
convenient to create the virtual disk only with user's consent.
FDE|CtrlBased: If the controller supports the security feature, this option enables FDE/control-based
encryption on the virtual disk.
[-Default| -Automatic| -None| -MaximumWithCaching| -MaximumWithoutCaching]: If
the controller supports power savings on virtual disk, these options specify the possible levels of power
savings that can be applied on a virtual disk.
Create a RAID Level
Use the command in the following table to create a RAID level 10, 50, 60 (spanned configuration).
LSI Corporation
- 218 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Dimmer Switch-Related Options
Table 141 Create a RAID Level 10, 50, 60 (Spanned) Configuration
4.23.6
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgSpanAdd -r10 -Array0[E0:S0,E1:S1] -Array1[E0:S0,E1:S1] [ArrayX[E0:S0,E1:S1] ...] [WT|WB] [NORA|RA] [Direct|Cached]
[CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU][-strpszM][-szXXX[-szYYY ...]][-AfterLdX][Force]| [FDE|CtrlBased] [-Default| -Automatic| -None| -MaximumWithCaching| MaximumWithoutCaching] -aNMegaCLI -CfgSpanAdd -r50 Array0[E0:S0,E1:S1,E2:S2,...] -Array1[E0:S0,E1:S1,E2:S2,...] [ArrayX[E0:S0,E1:S1,E2:S2,...] ...] [WT|WB] [NORA|RA] [Direct|Cached]
[CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU][-strpszM][-szXXX[-szYYY ...]][-AfterLdX][Force]| [FDE|CtrlBased] [-Default| -Automatic| -None| -MaximumWithCaching| MaximumWithoutCaching] -aN
Description
-CfgSpanAdd:Creates a RAID level 10, 50, or 60 (spanned) configuration from the specified arrays. Even if no
configuration is present, you must use this option to write the configuration to the adapter.
The possible parameters are:
Rx: Spcecifies the RAID Level.
ArrayX[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the Array and the physical drive enclosure/slot numbers to construct a disk
array.
WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead): Selects read policy.
[Direct | Cache]: Selects cache policy.
[{CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU}]: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
szXXXXXXXX: Specifies the size for the virtual disk, where XXXX is a decimal number of Mbytes. However, the
actual size of the virtual disk may be smaller, because the driver requires the number of blocks from the
physical drives in each virtual disk to be aligned to the stripe size. If multiple size options are specified, CT will
configure the virtual disks in the order of the options entered in the command line. The configuration of a
particular virtual disk fails if the remaining size of the array is too small to configure the virtual disk with the
specified size. This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array.
strpszM: Specifies the strip size, where the strip size values are 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024 MB.
AfterLdX: This command is optional. By default, the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual
disk. This option is valid only if the virtual disk is already used for configuration.
-Force: This option forces the creation of virtual disk in situations where the application finds that it is
convenient to create the virtual disk only with user's consent.
FDE|CtrlBased: If the controller supports the security feature, this option enables FDE/Ctrl based
encryption on the virtual disk.
[-Default| -Automatic| -None| -MaximumWithCaching| -MaximumWithoutCaching]: If
the controller supports power savings on virtual disk, these options specify the possible levels of power
savings that can be applied on a virtual disk.
Add the Unconfigured Drive to a Specified Adapter
Use the command in the following table to add the unconfigured drives to an adapter.
LSI Corporation
- 219 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Dimmer Switch-Related Options
Table 142 Add the Unconfigured Physical Drive to RAID Level 0, 1, 5, 6 to a Specified Adapter
4.23.7
Convention
MegaCLI -CfgAllFreeDrv -rX [-SATAOnly] [-SpanCount XXX] [WT|WB] [NORA|RA]
[Direct|Cached] [CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-strpszM] [-HspCount XX [HspType -Dedicated|-EnclAffinity|-nonRevertible]] | [FDE|CtrlBased] [Default| -Automatic| -None| -MaximumWithCaching| -MaximumWithoutCaching] -aN
Description
Adds all the unconfigured physical drives to RAID level 0, 1, 5, or 6 configuration to a specified adapter. Even if
no configuration is present, you have the option to write the configuration to the adapter.
The possible parameters are:
Rx[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the RAID level and the physical drive enclosure/slot numbers to construct a disk
array.
WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead): Selects read policy.
[Direct | Cached]: Selects cache policy.
[{CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU}]: Specifies whether to use write cache when the BBU is bad.
szXXXXXXXX: Specifies the size for the virtual disk, where XXXX is a decimal number of Mbytes. However, the
actual size of the virtual disk may be smaller, because the driver requires the number of blocks from the
physical drives in each virtual disk to be aligned to the strip size. If multiple size options are specified, CT will
configure the virtual disks in the order of the options entered in the command line. The configuration of a
particular virtual disk fails if the remaining size of the array is too small to configure the virtual disk with the
specified size. This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array.
strpszM: Specifies the strip size, where the strip size values are 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB,
512 MB, or 1024 MB.
Hsp[E5:S5,...]: Creates hot spares when you create the configuration. The new hot spares will be
dedicated to the virtual disk used in creating the configuration. This option does not allow you to create global
hot spares. To create global hot spares, you must use the -PdHsp command with the proper subcommands.
You can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in the virtual disk.
AfterLdX: This command is optional. By default, the application uses the first free slot available in the virtual
disk. This option is valid only if the virtual disk is already used for configuration.
FDE|CtrlBased: If controller support security feature, this option enables FDE/Ctrl based encryption on
virtual disk.
[-Default| -Automatic| -None| -MaximumWithCaching| -MaximumWithoutCaching]: If
the controller supports power savings on virtual disk, these options specify the possible levels of power
savings that can be applied on a virtual disk.
Display the Cache and Access Policies
Use the command in the following table to display the cache and access policies of the virtual disks.
Table 143 Display the Cache and Access Policies of the Virtual Disks
Convention
MegaCLI -LDGetProp -Cache | -Access | -Name | -DskCache | -PSPolicy |
Consistency -Lx|-L0,1,2|-LALL -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the cache and access policies of the virtual disks.
The possible parameters follow:
Cache: Cached, Direct: Displays cache policy.
WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead): Selects read policy.
Access: -RW, -RO, Blocked: Displays access policy.
DskCache: Displays physical disk cache policy.
PSPolicy: Displays the default and current power savings policy of the virtual disk.
LSI Corporation
- 220 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.24
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Performance Monitoring Options
Performance Monitoring Options
The commands in this section are used to monitor the performance of the system.
4.24.1
Start Performance Data Collection
Use this command to start the collection of performance data for the time interval (in minutes) specified by you. Once
the specified time has elapsed, the performance data collection stops.
Table 144 Start Performance Data Collection
4.24.2
Convention
MegaCli -perfmon -start -interval <val> -aN
Description
-perfmon: Specifies collection of performance data.
The possible parameters are:
-start: Starts the performance data collection.
-interval: The time interval (in minutes) that you specified for which you want the performance data
collection. The default value is 5 minutes.
Stop Performance Data Collection
Use this command if the performance data collection is already running and you want to stop the collection of
performance data.
Table 145 Stop Performance Data Collection
4.24.3
Convention
MegaCli -perfmon -stop -aN
Description
-perfmon: Specifies collection of performance data.
The possible parameters are:
-stop: Stops the performance data collection.
Save Performance Data
Use this command to save the performance data collection in a file.
Table 146 Save Performance Data
4.25
Convention
MegaCli -perfmon -getresults -f <Filename> -aN
Description
-perfmon: Specifies collection of performance data.
The possible parameters are:
-getresults: Specifies saving the performance data collection.
-f: Specifies the file name in which the performance data is to be saved. The format of the file is CSV.
Miscellaneous Commands
The commands in this section are used to display various information.
LSI Corporation
- 221 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
4.25.1
Chapter 4: MegaRAID Command Tool
Miscellaneous Commands
Display the Version
Use this command to display the CLI version, the version of the device driver, the version of the Unified extended
firmware interface (UEFI) device driver, the firmware versions for the attached physical device, and the enclosure.
Table 147 Display the Version
4.25.2
Convention
MegaCli -Version -Cli | Ctrl | Driver | Pd | Uefi aN (Uefi works only for EFI)
Description
Displays the firmware versions and other code levels installed on the controller, the CLI version, the version of
the device driver, the version of the UEFI device driver, the firmware versions for the attached physical device,
and enclosure in a list as location information, model string, and the firmware version.
Display the MegaCLI Version
Use the command in the following table to display the version number of the MegaCLI utility.
Table 148 Display the MegaCLI Version
4.25.3
Convention
MegaCli –v
Description
Displays the version number of the MegaCLI utility.
Display Help for MegaCLI
Use the command in the following table to display help information for the MegaCLI utility.
Table 149 Display Help for MegaCLI
4.25.4
Convention
MegaCli –h|–Help|?
Description
Displays help for the MegaCLI utility.
Display Summary Information
Use the command in the following table to show summary information for the MegaCLI utility.
Table 150 Display Summary Information
Convention
MegaCli -ShowSummary [-f filename] –aN
Description
Displays a summary of the system information, controller information, the drive information, the virtual drive
information, and the enclosure information.
LSI Corporation
- 222 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Chapter 5: Using MegaRAID Advanced Software
Chapter 5: Using MegaRAID Advanced Software
NOTE The MegaRAID advanced software offered by the MegaRAID Storage Manager software for certain MegaRAID
SAS 6Gb/s RAID controllers is described in the ServerView RAID Manager User Guide.
LSI Corporation
- 223 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Appendix A Events and Messages
Appendix A Events and Messages
This appendix lists the MegaRAID Storage Manager events that can appear in the event log.
MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and performance of all controllers in the workstation and
the devices attached to them. When an event occurs, such as the start of an initialization, an event message appears in
the log at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager main menu window. The messages are also logged in the
Windows Application log (Event Viewer).
A.1
Error Levels
Each message that appears in the event log has a Severity level that indicates the severity of the event, as shown in
the following table.
Table 151 Event Error Levels
Severity Level
A.2
Meaning
Information
Informational message. No user action is necessary.
Warning
Some component might be close to a failure point.
Critical
A component has failed, but the system has not lost data.
Fatal
A component has failed, and data loss has occurred or will occur.
Event Messages
The following table lists all of the MegaRAID Storage Manager event messages. The event message descriptions
include placeholders for specific values that are determined when the event is generated. For example, in message
No. 1 in the Event Messages table, “%s” is replaced by the firmware version, which is read from the firmware when the
event is generated.
Table 152 Event Messages
Number
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x0000
Information
MegaRAID firmware initialization
started (PCI ID
%04x/%04x/%04x/%04x)
Logged at firmware initialization.
0x0001
Information
MegaRAID firmware version %s
Logged at firmware initialization to display firmware version.
0x0002
Fatal
Unable to recover cache data from
TBBU
Currently not logged.
0x0003
Information
Cache data recovered from TBBU
successfully
Currently not logged.
0x0004
Information
Configuration cleared
Logged when controller configuration is cleared.
0x0005
Warning
Cluster down; communication with
peer lost
Currently not logged.
0x0006
Information
Virtual drive %s ownership changed Currently not logged.
from %02x to %02x
0x0007
Information
Alarm disabled by user
Logged when user disables alarm.
0x0008
Information
Alarm enabled by user
Logged when user enables alarm.
0x0009
Information
Background initialization rate
changed to %d%%
Logged to display background initialization progress
indication in percentage.
0x000a
Fatal
Controller cache discarded due to
memory/battery problems
Logged on cache discard due to hardware problems.
LSI Corporation
- 224 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x000b
Fatal
Unable to recover cache data due to Currently not logged.
configuration mismatch
0x000c
Information
Cache data recovered successfully
Logged when cache data is successfully recovered after
reboot.
0x000d
Fatal
Controller cache discarded due to
firmware version incompatibility
Logged when cache data discarded because of firmware
version mismatch.
0x000e
Information
Consistency Check rate changed to
%d%%
Logged to display Consistency check progress indication
percentage.
0x000f
Fatal
Fatal firmware error: %s
Logged in case of fatal errors and also while entering debug
monitor.
0x0010
Information
Factory defaults restored
Logged while controller is reset to factory defaults.
0x0011
Information
Flash downloaded image corrupt
Logged to inform downloaded flash image is corrupt.
0x0012
Critical
Flash erase error
Logged in case of flash erase failure, generally after flash
update.
0x0013
Critical
Flash timeout during erase
Logged to indicate flash erase operation timed out.
0x0014
Critical
Flash error
Generic unknown internal error during flash update flash.
0x0015
Information
Flashing image: %s
Logged to display flash image name string before getting
updated to controller.
0x0016
Information
Flash of new firmware images
complete
Logged to inform successful updation of flash image(s).
0x0017
Critical
Flash programming error
Logged to notify, write failure during flash update, not being
allowed usually due to internal controller settings.
0x0018
Critical
Flash timeout during programming
Logged to indicate flash write operation timed out.
0x0019
Critical
Flash chip type unknown
Logged during flash update tried with unsupported flash
chip type.
0x001a
Critical
Flash command set unknown
Logged while unsupported flash command set detected,
most likely because of unsupported flash chip.
0x001b
Critical
Flash verify failure
Logged when compare operation fails between written flash
data and original data.
0x001c
Information
Flush rate changed to %d seconds
Logged to notify modified cache flush frequency in seconds.
0x001d
Information
Hibernate command received from
host
Logged to inform about reception of hibernation command
from host to controller, generally during host shutdown.
0x001e
Information
Event log cleared
Logged when controller log has been cleared.
0x001f
Information
Event log wrapped
Logged when controller log has been wrapped around, when
the maximum logs are written.
0x0020
Fatal
Multi-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x,
ELOG=%x, (%s)
Logged to notify ECC multi bit error in memory, ELOG: ecc
info (source, type, syndrome), ECAR:ecc address.
0x0021
Warning
Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x,
ELOG=%x, (%s)
Logged to notify ECC single bit error in memory, ELOG: ecc
info (source, type, syndrome), ECAR:ecc address.
0x0022
Fatal
Not enough controller memory
Logged to notify fatal controller condition, when you run out
of memory to allocate.
0x0023
Information
Patrol Read complete
Logged when patrol read completes.
0x0024
Information
Patrol Read paused
Logged when patrol read is paused.
0x0025
Information
Patrol Read Rate changed to %d%% Logged to indicate progress of patrol read in percentage.
0x0026
Information
Patrol Read resumed
Logged when patrol read is resumed.
0x0027
Information
Patrol Read started
Logged when patrol read is started.
LSI Corporation
- 225 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x0028
Information
Reconstruction rate changed to
%d%%"
Logged to indicate progress of reconstruction in percentage.
0x0029
Information
Drive group modification rate
changed to %d%%
Logged to indicate the change in Drive group modification
frequency.
0x002a
Information
Shutdown command received from
host
Logged when shutdown command is received from host to
controller.
0x002b
Information
Test event: %s
General controller event, with a generic string.
0x002c
Information
Time established as %s; (%d seconds Logged when controller time was set form host, also
since power on)
displaying time since power on in seconds.
0x002d
Information
User entered firmware debugger
0x002e
Warning
Background Initialization aborted on Logged to inform about user aborted background
%s
initialization on displayed LD number.
0x002f
Warning
Background Initialization corrected
medium error (%s at %lx
0x0030
Information
Background Initialization completed Logged to inform Background Initialization completion on
on %s
displayed LD.
0x0031
Fatal
Background Initialization completed Logged to inform Background Initialization completion with
with uncorrectable errors on %s
error on displayed LD.
0x0032
Fatal
Background Initialization detected
Logged to inform Background Initialization completion with
uncorrectable double medium errors double medium error on displayed PD, PDLBA and LD in that
(%s at %lx on %s)
order.
0x0033
Critical
Background Initialization failed on
%s
Logged to inform Background Initialization failure on
displayed LD.
0x0034
Progress
Background Initialization progress
on %s is %s
Logged to inform Background Initialization progress in
percentage of displayed LD.
0x0035
Information
Background Initialization started on Logged to inform Background Initialization started for
%s
displayed LD.
0x0036
Information
Policy change on %s from %s to %s
Logged to inform the changed policy for displayed LD with
old and new policies.
0x0038
Warning
Consistency Check aborted on %s
Logged to inform aborted Consistency check for displayed
LD.
0x0039
Warning
Consistency Check corrected
medium error (%s at %lx
Logged when Consistency check corrected medium error.
0x003a
Information
Consistency Check done on %s
Logged when Consistency check has completed successfully
on the LD.
0x003b
Information
Consistency Check done with
corrections on %s
Logged when Consistency check completed and
inconsistency was found during check and was corrected.
0x003c
Fatal
Logged when uncorrectable double medium error are
Consistency Check detected
uncorrectable double medium errors detected while consistency check.
(%s at %lx on %s)
0x003d
Critical
Consistency Check failed on %s
Logged when Consistency check failed as fatal error was
found.
0x003e
Fatal
Consistency Check completed with
uncorrectable data on %s
Logged when Uncorrectable error occurred during
consistency check.
0x003f
Warning
Consistency Check found
Logged when consistency check finds inconsistency parity
inconsistent parity on %s at strip %lx on a strip.
LSI Corporation
- 226 -
Logged when user enters controller debug shell.
logged to inform about corrected medium error on displayed
LD number, LBALBA number, PD number and PDLBA number
in that order.
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x0040
Warning
Consistency Check inconsistency
logging disabled on %s (too many
inconsistencies)
0x0041
Progress
Consistency Check progress on %s is Logs Consistency Check progress, the progress is logged only
%s
if the progress is greater than 1% at an interval of every 15
seconds.
0x0042
Information
Consistency Check started on %s
Logged when consistency check has started
0x0043
Warning
Initialization aborted on %s
Logged when Consistency check is aborted by you or for
some other reason.
0x0044
Critical
Initialization failed on %s
Logged when initialization has failed.
0x0045
Progress
Initialization progress on %s is %s
Logs initialization progress, the progress is logged only if the
progress is greater than 1% at an interval of every 15 seconds
0x0046
Information
Fast initialization started on %s
Logged when quick initialization has started on a LD. The
parameter to decide Quick init or Full init is passed by you.
0x0047
Information
Full initialization started on %s
Logged when full initialization has started.
0x0048
Information
Initialization complete on %s
Logged when initialization has completed successfully.
0x0049
Information
LD Properties updated to %s (from
%s)
Logged when LD properties has been changed.
0x004a
Information
Reconstruction complete on %s
Logged when reconstruction has completed successfully.
0x004b
Fatal
Reconstruction of %s stopped due to Logged when reconstruction has finished due to failure (un
unrecoverable errors
recoverable errors).
0x004c
Fatal
Reconstruct detected uncorrectable Logged while reconstructing if an unrecoverable double
double medium errors (%s at %lx on medium error is encountered.
%s at %lx)
0x004d
Progress
Reconstruction progress on %s is %s Logs reconstruction progress, the progress is logged only if
the progress is greater than 1% at an interval of every 15
seconds.
0x004e
Information
Reconstruction resumed on %s
Logged when reconstruction resumes after a power cycle.
0x004f
Fatal
Reconstruction resume of %s failed
due to configuration mismatch
Logged when reconstruction resume failed due to
configuration mismatch.
0x0050
Information
Reconstruction started on %s
Logged on start of reconstruction on a LD.
0x0051
Information
State change on %s from %s to %s
Logged when there is change in LD state. The event gives the
new and old state. The state could be one of the following,
LDS_OFFLINE, LDS_PARTIALLY_DEGRADED, LDS_DEGRADED,
LDS_OPTIMAL.
0x0052
Information
Drive Clear aborted on %s
Logged when PD clear is aborted.
0x0053
Critical
Drive Clear failed on %s (Error %02x) Logged when drive clear is failed and the even is logged
along with error code.
0x0054
Progress
Drive Clear progress on %s is %s
Logs drive clear progress, the progress is logged only if the
progress is greater than 1% at an interval of every 15 seconds.
0x0055
Information
Drive Clear started on %s
Logged when drive clear started on a PD.
0x0056
Information
Drive Clear completed on %s
Logged when PD clear task is completed successfully on a PD.
0x0057
Warning
Error on %s (Error %02x)
Logged if Read returns with Uncorrectable error or same
errors on both the drives or write long returns with an error
(ie. puncture operation could failed).
0x0058
Information
Format complete on %s
Logged when Format has completed.
0x0059
Information
Format started on %s
Logged when format unit is started on a PD.
LSI Corporation
- 227 -
Logged when consistency check finds too many inconsistent
parity (greater than 10) and the inconsistency parity logging
is disabled.
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x005a
Critical
Hot Spare SMART polling failed on
%s (Error %02x)
??? To ask Sanjay TR Sanjay
0x005b
Information
Drive inserted: %s
Logged when drive is inserted and slot/enclosure fields of PD
are updated.
0x005c
Warning
Drive %s is not supported
Logged when the drive is not supported; reason could be the
number of drive has exceeded the MAX supported drives or
an unsupported drive is inserted like a SATA drive in SAS only
enclosure or could be a unsupported drive type.
0x005d
Warning
Patrol Read corrected medium error Logged when Patrol read has successfully completed
on %s at %lx
recovery read and recovered data.
0x005e
Progress
Patrol Read progress on %s is %s
Logs patrol read progress, the progress is logged only if the
progress is greater than 1% at an interval of every 15 seconds.
0x005f
Fatal
Patrol Read found an uncorrectable
medium error on %s at %lx
Logged when Patrol read is unable to recover data.
0x0060
Critical
Predictive failure: CDB: %s
Logged when a failure is found during smart (predictive
failure) poll.
0x0061
Fatal
Patrol Read puncturing bad block on Logged when patrol read punctures a block due to
%s at %lx
unrecoverable medium error.
0x0062
Information
Rebuild aborted by user on %s
Logged when the user aborts a rebuild operation.
0x0063
Information
Rebuild complete on %s
Logged when the rebuild operation on a logical drive on a
physical drive (which may have multiple LDs) is completed.
0x0064
Information
Rebuild complete on %s
Logged when rebuild operation is completed for all logical
drives on a given physical drive.
0x0065
Critical
Rebuild failed on %s due to source
drive error
Logged if one of the source drives for the rebuild operation
fails or is removed.
0x0066
Critical
Rebuild failed on %s due to target
drive error
Logged if the target rebuild drive (on which rebuild
operation is going on) fails or is removed from the controller.
0x0067
Progress
Rebuild progress on %s is %s
Logged to indicate the progress (in percentage) of the
rebuild operation on a given physical drive.
0x0068
Information
Rebuild resumed on %s
Logged when the rebuild operation on a physical drive
resumes.
0x0069
Information
Rebuild started on %s
Logged when the rebuild operation is started on a physical
drive.
0x006a
Information
Rebuild automatically started on %s Logged when the rebuild operation kicks in on a spare.
0x006b
Critical
Rebuild stopped on %s due to loss of Logged when the rebuild operation is stopped due to loss of
cluster ownership
ownership.
0x006c
Fatal
Reassign write operation failed on
%s at %lx
0x006d
Fatal
Unrecoverable medium error during Logged when the rebuild I/O encounters an unrecoverable
rebuild on %s at %lx
medium error.
0x006e
Information
Corrected medium error during
recovery on %s at %lx
0x006f
Fatal
Unrecoverable medium error during Logged when the recovery for a failed I/O encounters a
recovery on %s at %lx
medium error.
0x0070
Information
Drive removed: %s
Logged when a drive is removed from the controller.
0x0071
Warning
Unexpected sense: %s, CDB%s,
Sense: %s
Logged when an I/O fails due to unexpected reasons and
sense data needs to be logged.
0x0072
Information
State change on %s from %s to %s
Logged when the state of a drive is changed by the firmware
or by you.
LSI Corporation
- 228 -
Logged when a check condition or medium error is
encountered for a reassigned write.
Logged when recovery completed successfully and fixed a
medium error.
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x0073
Information
State change by user on %s from %s Not logged by the firmware.
to %s
0x0074
Warning
Redundant path to %s broken
Not logged by the firmware.
0x0075
Information
Redundant path to %s restored
Not logged by the firmware
0x0076
Information
Dedicated Hot Spare Drive %s no
longer useful due to deleted drive
group
Not logged by the firmware.
0x0077
Critical
SAS topology error: Loop detected
Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device as a loop
was detected.
0x0078
Critical
SAS topology error: Unaddressable
device
Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device as an
unaddressable device was found.
0x0079
Critical
SAS topology error: Multiple ports to Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device multiple
the same SAS address
ports with same SAS address were detected.
0x007a
Critical
SAS topology error: Expander error
Not logged by the firmware.
0x007b
Critical
SAS topology error: SMP timeout
Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device due to
SMP timeout.
0x007c
Critical
SAS topology error: Out of route
entries
Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device as
expander route table is out of entries.
0x007d
Critical
SAS topology error: Index not found Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device as
expander route table out of entries.
0x007e
Critical
SAS topology error: SMP function
failed
Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device due to
SMP function failure.
0x007f
Critical
SAS topology error: SMP CRC error
Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device due to
SMP CRC error.
0x0080
Critical
SAS topology error: Multiple
subtractive
Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device as a
subtractive-to-subtractive link was detected.
0x0081
Critical
SAS topology error: Table to table
Logged when device discovery fails for a SAS device as
table-to-table link was detected.
0x0082
Critical
SAS topology error: Multiple paths
Not logged by the firmware.
0x0083
Fatal
Unable to access device %s
Logged when the inserted drive is bad and unusable.
0x0084
Information
Dedicated Hot Spare created on %s
(%s)
Logged when a drive is configured as a dedicated spare.
0x0085
Information
Dedicated Hot Spare %s disabled
Logged when a drive is removes as a dedicated spare.
0x0086
Critical
Dedicated Hot Spare %s no longer
useful for all drive groups
Logged when an array with a dedicated spare is resized. The
hot spare (dedicated to this array and possibly others) will
not be applicable to other arrays.
0x0087
Information
Global Hot Spare created on %s (%s) Logged when a drive is configured as a global hot spare.
0x0088
Information
Global Hot Spare %s disabled
Logged when a drive configured as global host spare fails or
is unconfigured by you.
0x0089
Critical
Global Hot Spare does not cover all
drive groups
Logged when the global hotspare is too small (or doesn't
meet the SAS/SATA restricitons) to cover certain arrays.
0x008a
Information
Created %s}
Logged as soon as the new logical drive created is added to
the firmware configuration.
0x008b
Information
Deleted %s}
Logged when the firmware removes an LD from it's
configuration upon a user request from the applications.
0x008c
Information
Marking LD %s inconsistent due to
active writes at shutdown
Logged when we have active writes on one of the target
disks of a Raid 5 LD at the time of shutdown.
LSI Corporation
- 229 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x008d
Information
Battery Present
Logged during firmware initialization when we check if there
is a battery present and the check turns out true. This event is
also logged when a battery is inserted or replaced with a new
one and the battery present check returns true.
0x008e
Warning
Battery Not Present
Logged if the user has not disabled "Battery Not Present"
warning at the boot time or if a battery has been removed.
0x008f
Information
New Battery Detected
Logged when we have a subsequent boot after a new battery
has been inserted.
0x0090
Information
Battery has been replaced
Logged when a new battery has been replaced with an old
battery.
0x0091
Critical
Battery temperature is high
Logged when we detect that the battery temperature is high
during the periodic battery status check.
0x0092
Warning
Battery voltage low
Not logged by the firmware.
0x0093
Information
Battery started charging
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
battery is getting charged.
0x0094
Information
Battery is discharging
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
battery is getting discharged.
0x0095
Information
Battery temperature is normal
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
temperature of the battery is normal.
0x0096
Fatal
Battery has failed and cannot
support data retention. Please
replace the battery.
Logged when there is not enough capacity left in battery for
expected data retention time. Battery has to be replaced.
0x0097
Information
Battery relearn started
logged when the battery relearn started, initiated either by
the user or automatically.
0x0098
Information
Battery relearn in progress
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
battery relearn is in progress.
0x0099
Information
Battery relearn completed
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
battery relearn is complete.
0x009a
Critical
Battery relearn timed out
Not logged by the firmware.
0x009b
Information
Battery relearn pending: Battery is
under charge
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
battery relearn is requested but yet to start.
0x009c
Information
Battery relearn postponed
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
battery relearn is requested but postponed as there is valid
pinned cache present. This event can also be logged when
learn delay interval has been explicitly set.
0x009d
Information
Battery relearn will start in 4 days
Logged as part of providing battery learn cycle information
when auto learn is enabled.
0x009e
Information
Battery relearn will start in 2 day
Logged as part of providing battery learn cycle information
when auto learn is enabled.
0x009f
Information
Battery relearn will start in 1 day
Logged as part of providing battery learn cycle information
when auto learn is enabled.
0x00a0
Information
Battery relearn will start in 5 hours
Logged as part of providing battery learn cycle information
when auto learn is enabled.
0x00a1
Information
Battery removed
Logged as part of periodic monitoring of the battery status
when a battery has been removed.
0x00a2
Information
Current capacity of the battery is
below threshold
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
capacity of the battery is below threshold.
0x00a3
Information
Current capacity of the battery is
above threshold
Logged as part of monitoring the battery status when the
capacity of the battery is above threshold.
LSI Corporation
- 230 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x00a4
Information
Enclosure (SES) discovered on %s
Logged when an Enclosure (SES) is discovered for the first
time.
0x00a5
Information
Enclosure (SAFTE) discovered on %s Not logged by the firmware.
0x00a6
Critical
Enclosure %s communication lost
Logged when the communication with an enclosure has
been lost.
0x00a7
Information
Enclosure %s communication
restored
Logged when the communication with an enclosure has
been restored
0x00a8
Critical
Enclosure %s fan %d failed
Logged when an enclosure fan has failed.
0x00a9
Information
Enclosure %s fan %d inserted
Logged when an enclosure fan has been inserted newly.
0x00aa
Critical
Enclosure %s fan %d removed
Logged when an enclosure fan has been removed.
0x00ab
Critical
Enclosure %s power supply %d failed Not logged by the firmware.
0x00ac
Information
Enclosure %s power supply %d
inserted
Logged when power supply has been inserted to an
enclosure.
0x00ad
Critical
Enclosure %s power supply %d
removed
Logged when power supply has been removed from an
enclosure.
0x00ae
Critical
Enclosure %s SIM %d failed
Logged when the enclosure SIM has failed.
0x00af
Information
Enclosure %s SIM %d inserted
Logged when an enclosure SIM has been inserted.
0x00b0
Critical
Enclosure %s SIM %d removed
Logged when an enclosure initialization was completed but
later the SIM was removed.
0x00b1
Warning
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d Logged when the enclosure services process has detected a
below warning threshold
temperature lower than a normal operating temperature or
lower than the value indicated by the LOW WARNING
THRESHOLD field in the Threshold In diagnostic page.
0x00b2
Critical
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d Logged when the enclosure services process has detected a
below error threshold
temperature lower than a safe operating temperature or
lower than the value indicated by the LOW CRITICAL
THRESHOLD field in the Threshold In diagnostic page.
0x00b3
Warning
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d Logged when the enclosure services process has detected a
above warning threshold
temperature higher than a normal operating temperature or
higher than the value indicated by the HIGH WARNING
THRESHOLD field in the Threshold In diagnostic page.
0x00b4
Critical
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d Logged when the enclosure services process has detected a
above error threshold
temperature higher than a safe operating temperature or
higher than the value indicated by the HIGH CRITICAL
THRESHOLD field in the Threshold In diagnostic page.
0x00b5
Critical
Enclosure %s shutdown
Logged when an unrecoverable condition is detected in the
enclosure.
0x00b6
Warning
Enclosure %s not supported; too
many enclosures connected to port
Logged when the maximum allowed enclosures per port is
exceeded.
0x00b7
Critical
Enclosure %s firmware mismatch
Logged when two ESMs have different firmware versions.
0x00b8
Warning
Enclosure %s sensor %d bad
Logged when the device is present on the phy, but the status
does not indicate its presence.
0x00b9
Critical
Enclosure %s phy %d bad
Logged when the status indicates a device presence, but
there is no corresponding SAS address is associated with the
device.
0x00ba
Critical
Enclosure %s is unstable
Logged when the enclosure services process reports the
sense errors.
0x00bb
Critical
Enclosure %s hardware error
Logged when a critical or an unrecoverable enclosure failure
has been detected by the enclosure services process.
LSI Corporation
- 231 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x00bc
Critical
Enclosure %s not responding
Logged when there is no response from the enclosure.
0x00bd
Information
SAS/SATA mixing not supported in
enclosure; Drive %s disabled
Logged when the SAS/SATA mixing in an enclosure is being
violated.
0x00be
Information
Enclosure (SES) hotplug on %s was
detected, but is not supported
Not reported to the user.
0x00bf
Information
Clustering enabled
Logged when the clustering is enabled in the controller
properties.
0x00c0
Information
Clustering disabled
Logged when the clustering is disabled in the controller
properties.
0x00c1
Information
Drive too small to be used for
auto-rebuild on %s
Logged when the size of the drive is not sufficient for
auto-rebuild.
0x00c2
Information
BBU enabled; changing WT virtual
drives to WB
Logged when changing WT virtual drives to WB and the BBU
status is good.
0x00c3
Warning
BBU disabled; changing WB virtual
drives to WT
Logged when changing WB virtual drives to WT and the BBU
status is bad.
0x00c4
Warning
Bad block table on drive %s is 80%
full
Logged when the Bad block table on a drive is 80% full.
0x00c5
Fatal
Bad block table on drive %s is full;
unable to log block %lx
Logged when the Bad block table on a drive is full and not
able to add the bad block in the Bad block table.
0x00c6
Information
Consistency Check Aborted due to
ownership loss on %s
Logged when the Consistency Check is aborted due to
ownership is lost.
0x00c7
Information
Background Initialization (BGI)
Aborted Due to Ownership Loss on
%s
Logged when the Background Initialization (BGI) is aborted
due to ownership loss.
0x00c8
Critical
Battery/charger problems detected; Logged when the battery is not presented or removed and
SOH Bad
SOH is bad.
0x00c9
Warning
Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x,
ELOG=%x, (%s); warning threshold
exceeded
Logged when the Single-bit ECC errors exceeded the
warning threshold.
0x00ca
Critical
Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x,
ELOG=%x, (%s); critical threshold
exceeded
Logged when the Single-bit ECC errors exceeded the critical
threshold.
0x00cb
Critical
Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x,
ELOG=%x, (%s); further reporting
disabled
Logged when the Single-bit ECC errors exceeded all the
thresholds and disable further logging.
0x00cc
Critical
Enclosure %s Power supply %d
switched off
Logged when the enclosure services process has detected
that the Enclosure Power supply is switched off and it was
switched on earlier.
0x00cd
Information
Enclosure %s Power supply %d
switched on
Logged when the enclosure services process has detected
that the Enclosure Power supply is switched on and it was
switched off earlier.
0x00ce
Critical
Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable Logged when the enclosure services process has detected
removed
that the Enclosure Power supply cable is removed and it was
inserted earlier.
0x00cf
Information
Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable Logged when the enclosure services process has detected
inserted
that the Enclosure Power supply cable is inserted and it was
removed earlier.
0x00d0
Information
Enclosure %s Fan %d returned to
normal
LSI Corporation
- 232 -
Logged when the enclosure services process has detected
that the current status of a fan is good and it was failed
earlier.
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x00d1
Information
BBU Retention test was initiated on
previous boot
Logged when the Battery Retention test was initiated on
previous boot.
0x00d2
Information
BBU Retention test passed
Logged when the Battery Retention test passed successfully.
0x00d3
Critical
BBU Retention test failed!
Logged when the Battery Retention test failed.
0x00d4
Information
NVRAM Retention test was initiated
on previous boot
Logged when the NVRAM Retention test was initiated on
previous boot.
0x00d5
Information
NVRAM Retention test passed
Logged when the NVRAM Retention test passed successfully.
0x00d6
Critical
NVRAM Retention test failed!
Logged when the NVRAM Retention test failed.
0x00d7
Information
%s test completed %d passes
successfully
Logged when the controller diagnsotics test passes
successfully.
0x00d8
Critical
%s test FAILED on %d pass. Fail data: Logged when the controller diagnsotics test fails.
errorOffset=%x goodData=%x
badData=%x
0x00d9
Information
Self check diagnostics completed
Logged when Self check diagnostics is completed.
0x00da
Information
Foreign Configuration detected
Logged when Foreign Configuration is detected.
0x00db
Information
Foreign Configuration imported
Logged when Foreign Configuration is imported.
0x00dc
Information
Foreign Configuration cleared
Logged when Foreign Configuration is cleared.
0x00dd
Warning
NVRAM is corrupt; reinitializing
Logged when NVRAM is corrupt and re-initialized.
0x00de
Warning
NVRAM mismatch occurred
Logged when NVRAM mismatch occurs.
0x00df
Warning
SAS wide port %d lost link on PHY
%d
Logged when SAS wide port lost link on a PHY.
0x00e0
Information
SAS wide port %d restored link on
PHY %d
Logged when a SAS wide port restored link on a PHY.
0x00e1
Warning
SAS port %d, PHY %d has exceeded
the allowed error rate
Logged when a SAS PHY on port has exceeded the allowed
error rate.
0x00e2
Warning
Bad block reassigned on %s at %lx to Logged when a Bad block is reassigned on a drive from a
%lx
error sector to a new sector.
0x00e3
Information
Controller Hot Plug detected
0x00e4
Warning
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d Logged when an Enclosure temperature sensor differential is
differential detected
detected.
0x00e5
Information
Drive test cannot start. No qualifying Logged when Disk test cannot start. No qualifying disks
drives found
found.
0x00e6
Information
Time duration provided by host is
not sufficient for self check
Logged when Time duration provided by the host is not
sufficient for self check.
0x00e7
Information
Marked Missing for %s on drive
group %d row %d
Logged when a physical drive is Marked Missing on an array
at a particular row.
0x00e8
Information
Replaced Missing as %s on drive
group %d row %d
Logged when a physical drive is Replaced Missing on an array
at a particular row.
0x00e9
Information
Enclosure %s Temperature %d
returned to normal
Logged when an Enclosure temperature returns to normal.
0x00ea
Information
Enclosure %s Firmware download in Logged when Enclosure a Firmware download is in progress.
progress
(ask SUMANT PATRO what is Enclosure a Firmware??
0x00eb
Warning
Enclosure %s Firmware download
failed
Logged when Enclosure a Firmware download failed. (ask
SUMANT PATRO what is Enclosure a Firmware??
0x00ec
Warning
%s is not a certified drive
Logged if the drive is not certified.
0x00ed
Information
Dirty cache data discarded by user
Logged when Dirty cache data is discarded by the user.
LSI Corporation
- 233 -
Logged when a Controller Hot Plug is detected.
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x00ee
Information
Drives missing from configuration at Logged when physical drives are missing from configuration
boot
at boot.
0x00ef
Information
Virtual drives (VDs) missing drives
and will go offline at boot: %s
Logged when virtual drives missing drives and will go offline
at boot.
0x00f0
Information
VDs missing at boot: %s
Logged when virtual drives missing at boot.
0x00f1
Information
Previous configuration completely
missing at boot
Logged when Previous configuration completely missing at
boot.
0x00f2
Information
Battery charge complete
Logged when Battery charge is completed.
0x00f3
Information
Enclosure %s fan %d speed changed Logged when an Enclosure fan speed changed.
0x00f4
Information
Dedicated spare %s imported as
global due to missing arrays
0x00f5
Information
%s rebuild not possible as SAS/SATA Logged when a rebuild is not possible as SAS/SATA is not
is not supported in an array
supported in an array.
0x00f6
Information
SEP %s has been rebooted as a part Logged when SEP has been rebooted as part of enclosure
of enclosure firmware download. SEP firmware download. It will be unavailable until reboot
will be unavailable until this process completes.
completes.
0x00f7
Information
Inserted PD: %s Info: %s
Logged when a physical drive is inserted.
0x00f8
Information
Removed PD: %s Info: %s
Logged when a physical drive is removed.
0x00f9
Information
VD %s is now OPTIMAL
Logged when a logical drive state changes to OPTIMAL.
0x00fa
Warning
VD %s is now PARTIALLY DEGRADED Logged when a logical drive state changes to a partially
degraded state.
0x00fb
Critical
VD %s is now DEGRADED
Logged when a logical drive state changes to degraded state.
0x00fc
Fatal
VD %s is now OFFLINE
Logged when a logical drive state changes to offline state.
0x00fd
Warning
Battery requires reconditioning;
please initiate a LEARN cycle
Logged when a Battery requires reconditioning; please
initiate a LEARN cycle.
0x00fe
Warning
VD %s disabled because RAID-5 is
not supported by this RAID key
Logged when a virtual drive is disabled because RAID-5 is not
supported by this RAID key.
0x00ff
Warning
VD %s disabled because RAID-6 is
not supported by this controller
Logged when a virtual drive is disabled because RAID-6 is not
supported by this controller.
0x0100
Warning
VD %s disabled because SAS drives
are not supported by this RAID key
Logged when a virtual drive is disabled because SAS drives
are not supported by this RAID key.
0x0101
Warning
PD missing: %s
Logged to provide information about the missing drive
during boot.
0x0102
Warning
Puncturing of LBAs enabled
Currently not logged in the firmware.
Logged when a Dedicated spare is imported as global due to
missing arrays.
0x0103
Warning
Puncturing of LBAs disabled
Currently not logged in the firmware.
0x0104
Critical
Enclosure %s EMM %d not installed
Logged when Enclosure SIM is not installed.
0x0105
Information
Package version %s
Prints the Package version number.
0x0106
Warning
Global affinity Hot Spare %s
commissioned in a different
enclosure
Logged when a hot spare that is a part of an enclosure is
commissioned in a different enclosure.
0x0107
Warning
Foreign configuration table overflow Logged when the number of GUIDs to import exceeds the
total supported by the firmware.
0x0108
Warning
Partial foreign configuration
imported, PDs not imported:%s
Logged when all the foreign configuration drives could not
be imported.
0x0109
Information
Connector %s is active
Logged during initial boot when a SAS MUX connector is
found for the controller.
LSI Corporation
- 234 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x010a
Information
Board Revision %s
Logged during boot.
0x010b
Warning
Command timeout on PD %s,
CDB:%s
Logged when command to a PD Timesout.
0x010c
Warning
PD %s reset (Type %02x)
Logged when PD is reset.
0x010d
Warning
VD bad block table on %s is 80% full Logged when number of Bad Blocks entries is at 80 % of what
can be supported in the firmware.
0x010e
Fatal
VD bad block table on %s is full;
unable to log block %lx (on %s at
%lx)
0x010f
Fatal
Uncorrectable medium error logged Logged when an uncorrectable medium error is detected.
for %s at %lx (on %s at %lx)
0x0110
Information
VD medium error corrected on %s at Logged on the corrected medium error.
%lx
0x0111
Warning
Bad block table on PD %s is 100% full Logged when Bad block table is 100 % Full. Any more media
errors on this physical drive will not be logged in the bad
block table.
0x0112
Warning
VD bad block table on PD %s is 100% Logged when Bad block table is 100 % Full. Any more media
full
errors on this logical drive will not be logged in the bad block
table.
0x0113
Fatal
Controller needs replacement, IOP is Currently not logged in the firmware.
faulty
0x0114
Information
CopyBack started on PD %s from PD Logged when copyback is started.
%s
0x0115
Information
CopyBack aborted on PD %s and src Logged when copyback is aborted.
is PD %s
0x0116
Information
CopyBack complete on PD %s from
PD %s
Logged when number of Bad Blocks exceed what can be
supported in the firmware.
Logged when copyback is completed.
0x0117
Progress
CopyBack progress on PD %s is %s
Logged to provide the copyback progress.
0x0118
Information
CopyBack resumed on PD %s from
%s
Logged when copyback operation is resumed.
0x0119
Information
CopyBack automatically started on
PD %s from %s
Logged on automatic start of copyback.
0x011a
Critical
CopyBack failed on PD %s due to
source %s error
Logged when the source physical drive of a copyback fails.
The copyback stops and rebuild starts on the destination
physical drive.
0x011b
Warning
Early Power off warning was
unsuccessful
Currently not logged in the firmware.
0x011c
Information
BBU FRU is %s
Logged only for IBM.
0x011d
Information
%s FRU is %s
Logged if FRU data is present. Logged only for IBM.
0x011e
Information
Controller hardware revision ID %s
Currently not used in the firmware.
0x011f
Warning
Foreign import shall result in a
backward incompatible upgrade of
configuration metadata
Currently not used in the firmware.
0x0120
Information
Redundant path restored for PD %s
Logged when new path is added for the physical drives.
0x0121
Warning
Redundant path broken for PD %s
Logged when one path is removed.
0x0122
Information
Redundant enclosure EMM %s
inserted for EMM %s
Logged when an enclosure is added.
LSI Corporation
- 235 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x0123
Information
Redundant enclosure EMM %s
removed for EMM %s
0x0124
Warning
Patrol Read can't be started, as PDs Logged when none of the disks can start PR.
are either not ONLINE, or are in a VD
with an active process, or are in an
excluded VD
0x0125
Information
Copyback aborted by user on PD %s Logged when copyback is aborted by the user.
and src is PD %s
0x0126
Critical
Copyback aborted on hot spare %s
from %s, as hot spare needed for
rebuild
0x0127
Warning
Copyback aborted on PD %s from PD Logged when copyback is stopped for a higher priority
%s, as rebuild required in the array
rebuild operation on a drive.
0x0128
Fatal
Controller cache discarded for
Logged when pinned cache lines are discarded for a LD.
missing or offline VD %s
When a VD with cached data goes
offline or missing during runtime, the
cache for the VD is discarded.
Because the VD is offline, the cache
cannot be saved.
0x0129
Information
Copyback cannot be started as PD
%s is too small for src PD %s
Logged when destination PD is too small for copy back.
0x012a
Information
Copyback cannot be started on PD
%s from PD %s, as SAS/SATA is not
supported in an array
Logged when there is a SAS/SATA mixing violation for the
destination PD.
0x012b
Information
Microcode update started on PD %s Logged when PD Firmware download starts.
0x012c
Information
Microcode update completed on PD Logged when PD Firmware download completes.
%s
0x012d
Warning
Microcode update timeout on PD %s Logged when PD Firmware download does not complete
and times out.
0x012e
Warning
Microcode update failed on PD %s
Logged when PD Firmware download fails.
0x012f
Information
Controller properties changed
Logged when any of the controller properties has changed.
0x0130
Information
Patrol Read properties changed
Currently not logged in the firmware.
0x0131
Information
CC Schedule properties changed
Logged when consistency check scheduling property has
changed.
0x0132
Information
Battery properties changed
Logged when any of the BBU properties has changed.
0x0133
Warning
Periodic Battery Relearn is pending.
Please initiate manual learn cycle as
Automatic learn is not enabled
Logged when BBU periodic relearn is pending.
0x0134
Information
Drive security key created
Logged when controller lock key is created.
0x0135
Information
Drive security key backed up
Logged when controller lock key is backed up.
0x0136
Information
Drive security key from escrow,
verified
Logged when controller lock key is verified from escrow.
0x0137
Information
Drive security key changed
Logged when controller lock key is re-keyed.
0x0138
Warning
Drive security key, re-key operation
failed
Logged when controller lock re-key operation failed.
0x0139
Warning
Drive security key is invalid
Logged when the controller lock is not valid.
0x013a
Information
Drive security key destroyed
Logged when the controller lock key is destroyed.
LSI Corporation
- 236 -
Logged when an enclosure is removed
Logged when copyback is aborted on a Hotspare.
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x013b
Warning
Drive security key from escrow is
invalid
Logged when the controller escrow key is not valid. This
escrow key can not unlock any drive.
0x013c
Information
VD %s is now secured
Logged when secure LD is created.
0x013d
Warning
VD %s is partially secured
Logged when all the drives in the array are not secure.
0x013e
Information
PD %s security activated
Logged when PD security key is set.
0x013f
Information
PD %s security disabled
Logged when security key is removed from an FDE drive.
0x0140
Information
PD %s is reprovisioned
Logged when PD security is cleared.
0x0141
Information
PD %s security key changed
Logged when PD lock key is re-keyed.
0x0142
Fatal
Security subsystem problems
detected for PD %s
Logged when PD security can not be set.
0x0143
Fatal
Controller cache pinned for missing
or offline VD %s
Logged when LD cache is pinned.
0x0144
Fatal
Controller cache pinned for missing
or offline VDs: %s
Logged when pinned cache is found during OCR.
0x0145
Information
Controller cache discarded by user
for VDs: %s
Logged when LD pinned cache is discarded by the user.
0x0146
Information
Controller cache destaged for VD %s Logged when LD pinned cache is recovered.
0x0147
Warning
Consistency Check started on an
inconsistent VD %s
Logged when consistency check is started on an inconsistent
LD.
0x0148
Warning
Drive security key failure, cannot
access secured configuration
Logged when an invalid lock key is detected.
0x0149
Warning
Drive security password from user is Not logged.
invalid
0x014a
Warning
Detected error with the remote
battery connector cable
Not logged.
0x014b
Information
Power state change on PD %s from
%s to %s
Logged when PD power state (spun up, spun down,
in-transition) changes.
0x014c
Information
Enclosure %s element (SES code
0x%x) status changed
Not logged.
0x014d
Information
PD %s rebuild not possible as
Logged when mixing violation occurs due to HDD/SSD
HDD/CacheCade software mix is not mismatch.
supported in a drive group
0x014e
Information
Copyback cannot be started on PD
%s from %s, as HDD/CacheCade
software mix is not supported in a
drive group
Logged when copyback could not be started on a PD
because HDD/CacheCade software mix was not supported in
a drive group.
0x014f
Information
VD bad block table on %s is cleared
Logged when a VD bad block table was cleared.
0x0150
Caution
SAS topology error: 0x%lx
Logged when a SAS topology error occurred.
0x0151
Information
VD cluster of medium errors
Logged when medium errors were corrected for a PD for a
corrected for %s at %lx (on %s at %lx) LD.
0x0152
Information
Controller requests a host bus rescan Logged when controller requested a host bus rescan.
0x0153
Information
Controller repurposed and factory
defaults restored
Logged when controller repurposed and factory defaults
were restored.
0x0154
Information
Drive security key binding updated
Logged when drive security key binding was updated.
0x0159
Critical
Controller encountered a fatal error
and was reset
Logged when a controller encountered a fatal error and was
reset.
LSI Corporation
- 237 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x015a
Information
Snapshots enabled on %s
(Repository %s)
Logged when snapshot was enabled on a LD.
0x015b
Information
Snapshots disabled on %s
(Repository %s) by the user
Logged when snapshot was disabled on a LD by the user.
0x015c
Critical
Snapshots disabled on %s
(Repository %s), due to a fatal error
Logged when snapshot was disabled on a LD due to a fatal
error.
0x015d
Information
Snapshot created on %s at %s
Logged when snapshot was created on a LD.
0x015e
Information
Snapshot deleted on %s at %s
Logged when snapshot was deleted on a LD.
0x015f
Information
View created at %s to a snapshot at
%s for %s
Logged when view was created at a LD.
0x0160
Information
View at %s is deleted, to snapshot at Logged when View at a LD was deleted
%s for %s
0x0161
Information
Snapshot rollback started on %s
from snapshot at %s
Logged when snapshot rollback was started on a LD.
0x0162
Fatal
Snapshot rollback on %s internally
aborted for snapshot at %s
Logged when snapshot rollback was internally aborted.
0x0163
Information
Snapshot rollback on %s completed Logged when snapshot rollback on a LD was completed.
for snapshot at %s
0x0164
Information
Snapshot rollback progress for
snapshot at %s, on %s is %s
Logged to report snapshot rollback progress on a LD.
0x0165
Warning
Snapshot space for %s in snapshot
repository %s, is 80%% full
Logged when snapshot space for a LD in a snapshot
repository was 80% full.
0x0166
Critical
Snapshot space for %s in snapshot
repository %s, is full
Logged when snapshot space for a LD in a snapshot
repository was full.
0x0167
Warning
View at %s to snapshot at %s, is
Logged when view at a LD to a snapshot was 80% full on a
80%% full on snapshot repository %s snapshot repository.
0x0168
Critical
View at %s to snapshot at %s, is full
on snapshot repository %s
Logged when view at a LD to a snapshot was full on a
snapshot repository.
0x0169
Critical
Snapshot repository lost for %s
Logged when snapshot repository was lost for a LD.
0x016a
Warning
Snapshot repository restored for %s Logged when snapshot repository was restored for a LD.
0x016b
Critical
Snapshot encountered an
unexpected internal error: 0x%lx
Logged when snapshot encountered an unexpected internal
error.
0x016c
Information
Auto Snapshot enabled on %s
(snapshot repository %s)
Logged when auto snapshot was enabled.
0x016d
Information
Auto Snapshot disabled on %s
(snapshot repository %s)
Logged when auto Snapshot was disabled.
0x016e
Critical
Configuration command could not
be committed to disk, please retry
Logged when configuration command could not be
committed to disk and was asked to retry.
0x016f
Information
COD on %s updated as it was stale
Logged when COD in DDF is updated due to various reasons.
0x0170
Warning
Power state change failed on %s
(from %s to %s)
Logged when power state change failed on a PD.
0x0171
Warning
%s is not available
Logged when a LD was not available.
0x0172
Information
%s is available
Logged when a LD was available.
0x0173
Information
%s is used for CacheCade with
capacity 0x%lx logical blocks
Logged when a LD was used for CacheCade with the
indicated capacity in logical blocks.
0x0174
Information
%s is using CacheCade %s
Logged when a LD was using CacheCade.
0x0175
Information
%s is no longer using CacheCade %s Logged when a LD was no longer using CacheCade.
LSI Corporation
- 238 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x0176
Critical
Snapshot deleted due to resource
constraints for %s in snapshot
repository %s
Logged when the snapshot is deleted due to resource
constraints in snapshot repository.
0x0177
Warning
Auto Snapshot failed for %s in
snapshot repository %s
Logged when the Auto Snapshot is failed for a VD in
snapshot repository.
0x0178
Warning
Controller reset on-board expander
Logged when the chip reset issued to on-board expander.
0x0179
Warning
CacheCade (%s) capacity changed
and is now 0x%lx logical blocks
Logged when the CacheCade capacity is changed along with
the current capacity.
0x017a
Warning
Battery cannot initiate transparent
learn cycles
Logged when the Battery cannot initiate transparent learn
cycles.
0x017b
Information
Premium feature %s key was applied Logged when the Premium feature key was applied.
for - %s
0x017c
Information
Snapshot schedule properties
changed on %s
0x017d
Information
Snapshot scheduled action is due on Logged when the Snapshot scheduled action is due.
%s
0x017e
Information
Performance Metrics: collection
command 0x%lx
Logged during the Performance Metrics collection.
0x017f
Information
Premium feature %s key was
transferred - %s
Logged when the Premium feature key was transferred.
0x0180
Information
Premium feature serial number %s
Logged when displaying the Premium feature serial number.
0x0181
Warning
Premium feature serial number
mismatched. Key-vault serial num %s
Logged when Premium feature serial number mismatched.
0x0182
Warning
Battery cannot support data
retention for more than %d hours.
Please replace the battery
Logged during the Battery monitoring and it displays the
remaining data retention time of the battery.
0x0183
Information
%s power policy changed to %s
(from %s)
Logged when the power policy of an LD is changed.
0x0184
Warning
%s cannot transition to max power
savings
Logged when LD cannot transition to max power savings.
0x0185
Information
Host driver is loaded and operational This event is not reported to the user.
0x0186
Information
%s mirror broken
Logged when the mirror is broken for an LD.
Logged when the Snapshot schedule properties changed.
0x0187
Information
%s mirror joined
Logged when joining the LD with its broken mirror.
0x0188
Warning
%s link %d failure in wide port
This event is not reported to the user.
0x0189
Information
%s link %d restored in wide port
This event is not reported to the user.
0x018a
Information
Memory module FRU is %s
This event is not reported to the user.
0x018b
Warning
Cache-vault power pack is
This event is not reported to the user.
sub-optimal. Please replace the pack
0x018c
Warning
Foreign configuration auto-import
did not import any drives
Logged when the Foreign configuration auto-import did not
import any drives.
0x018d
Warning
Cache-vault microcode update
required
Logged when the BMU is not in Normal mode and
Cache-vault microcode update required.
0x018e
Warning
CacheCade (%s) capacity exceeds
maximum allowed size, extra
capacity is not used
Logged when CacheCade capacity exceeds maximum
allowed size, extra capacity is not used.
0x018f
Warning
LD (%s) protection information lost
Logged when the protection information is lost for an LD.
0x0190
Information
Diagnostics passed for %s
Logged when the SHIELD Diagnostics passed for a PD.
LSI Corporation
- 239 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x0191
Critical
Diagnostics failed for %s
Logged when the SHIELD Diagnostics failed for a PD.
0x0192
Information
Server Power capability Diagnostic
Test Started
Logged when the Server Power capability Diagnostic Test
starts.
0x0193
Information
Drive Cache settings enabled during Logged when the Drive Cache settings enabled during
rebuild for %s
rebuild for a PD.
0x0194
Information
Drive Cache settings restored after
rebuild for %s
Logged when the Drive Cache settings restored after rebuild
for a PD.
0x0195
Information
Drive %s commissioned as
Emergency spare
Logged when the Drive commissioned as Emergency spare.
0x0196
Warning
Reminder: Potential non-optimal
configuration due to drive %s
commissioned as emergency spare
Logged when the PD being imported is an Emergency Spare.
0x0197
Information
Consistency Check suspended on %s Logged when the Consistency Check is suspended on an LD.
0x0198
Information
Consistency Check resumed on %s
0x0199
Information
Background Initialization suspended Logged when the Background Initialization is suspended on
on %s
an LD.
0x019a
Information
Background Initialization resumed
on %
Logged when the Background Initialization is resumed on an
LD.
0x019b
Information
Reconstruction suspended on %s
Logged when the Reconstruction is suspended on an LD.
0x019c
Information
Rebuild suspended on %
Logged when the Rebuild is suspended on a PD.
0x019d
Information
Copyback suspended on %s
Logged when the Copyback is suspended on a PD.
0x019e
Information
Reminder: Consistency Check
suspended on %
Logged as a reminder when the Consistency Check is
suspended on an LD.
0x019f
Information
Reminder: Background Initialization Logged as a reminder when the Background Initialization is
suspended on %s
suspended on an LD.
0x01a0
Information
Reminder: Reconstruction
suspended on %s
0x01a1
Information
Reminder: Rebuild suspended on %s Logged as a reminder when the Rebuild is suspended on a
PD.
0x01a2
Information
Reminder: Copyback suspended on
%s
Logged as a reminder when the Copyback is suspended on a
PD.
0x01a3
Information
Reminder: Patrol Read suspended
Logged as a reminder when the Patrol Read is suspended.
Logged when the Consistency Check is resumed on an LD.
Logged as a reminder when the Reconstruction is suspended
on an LD.
0x01a4
Information
Erase aborted on %s
Logged when the Erase is aborted on a PD.
0x01a5
Critical
Erase failed on %s (Error %02x)
Logged when the Erase is failed on a PD along with the error.
0x01a6
Progress
Erase progress on %s is %s
Logged to display the Erase progress on a PD along with its
current progress.
0x01a7
Information
Erase started on %s
Logged when Erase is started on a PD.
0x01a8
Information
Erase completed on %s
Logged when the Erase is completed on a PD.
0x01a9
Information
Erase aborted on %s
Logged when the Erase is aborted on an LD.
0x01aa
Critical
Erase failed on %s
Logged when the Erase is failed on an LD.
0x01ab
Progress
Erase progress on %s is %s
Logged to display the Erase progress on an LD along with its
current progress.
0x01ac
Information
Erase started on %s
Logged when the Erase is started on an LD.
0x01ad
Information
Erase complete on %s
Logged when the Erase is complete on an LD.
0x01ae
Warning
Potential leakage during erase on %s Logged to inform the Potential leakage during erase on an
LD.
LSI Corporation
- 240 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Number
Appendix A Events and Messages
Severity
Level
Event Text
Generic Conditions when each event occurs
0x01af
Warning
Battery charging was suspended due Logged when the Battery charging was suspended due to
to high battery temperature
high battery temperature.
0x01b0
Information
NVCache firmware update was
successful
This event is not reported to the user.
0x01b1
Warning
NVCache firmware update failed
This event is not reported to the user.
0x01b2
Fatal
%s access blocked as cached data in This event is not reported to the user.
CacheCade is unavailable
0x01b3
Information
CacheCade disassociate started on
%s
This event is not reported to the user.
0x01b4
Information
CacheCade disassociate completed
on %s
This event is not reported to the user.
0x01b5
Critical
CacheCade disassociate failed on %s This event is not reported to the user.
0x01b6
Progress
CacheCade disassociate progress on This event is not reported to the user.
%s is %s
0x01b7
Information
CacheCade disassociate aborted by
user on %s
0x01b8
Information
Link speed changed on SAS port %d Logged when the Link speed changed on SAS port and PHY.
and PHY %d
0x01b9
Warning
Advanced Software Options was
deactivated for - %s
This event is not reported to the user.
0x01ba
Information
%s is now accessible
This event is not reported to the user.
0x01bb
Information
%s is using CacheCade
This event is not reported to the user.
0x01bc
Information
%s is no longer using CacheCade
This event is not reported to the user.
0x01bd
Information
Patrol Read aborted on %s
Logged when the Patrol Read is aborted on a PD.
LSI Corporation
- 241 -
This event is not reported to the user.
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Appendix B MegaCLI Error Messages
Appendix B MegaCLI Error Messages
This appendix lists the MegaCLI software error messages.
The MegaCLI Configuration Utility is a command line interface application you can use to manage MegaRAID SAS
RAID controllers. See MegaRAID Command Tool for more information about the MegaCLI utility and commands.
B.1
Error Messages and Descriptions
Each message that appears in the event log has an error level that indicates the severity of the event, as shown in the
following table.
Table 153 Error Messages and Descriptions
Number
Event Text
0x00
Command completed successfully
0x01
Invalid command
0x02
DCMD opcode is invalid
0x03
Input parameters are invalid
0x04
Invalid sequence number
0x05
Abort isn't possible for the requested command
0x06
Application 'host' code not found
0x07
Application already in use - try later
0x08
Application not initialized
0x09
Given array index is invalid
0x0a
Unable to add missing drive to array, as row has no empty slots
0x0b
Some of the CFG resources conflict with each other or the current config
0x0c
Invalid device ID / select-timeout
0x0d
Drive is too small for requested operation
0x0e
Flash memory allocation failed
0x0f
Flash download already in progress
0x10
Flash operation failed
0x11
Flash image was bad
0x12
Downloaded flash image is incomplete
0x13
Flash OPEN was not done
0x14
Flash sequence is not active
0x15
Flush command failed
0x16
Specified application doesn't have host-resident code
0x17
LD operation not possible - CC is in progress
0x18
LD initialization in progress
0x19
LBA is out of range
0x1a
Maximum LDs are already configured
0x1b
LD is not OPTIMAL
0x1c
LD Rebuild is in progress
0x1d
LD is undergoing reconstruction
0x1e
LD RAID level is wrong for requested operation
LSI Corporation
- 242 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Appendix B MegaCLI Error Messages
Number
Event Text
0x1f
Too many spares assigned
0x20
Scratch memory not available - try command again later
0x21
Error writing MFC data to SEEPROM
0x22
Required HW is missing (i.e. Alarm or BBU)
0x23
Item not found
0x24
LD drives are not within an enclosure
0x25
PD CLEAR operation is in progress
0x26
Unable to use SATA(SAS) drive to replace SAS(SATA)
0x27
Patrol Read is disabled
0x28
Given row index is invalid
0x2d
SCSI command done, but non-GOOD status was received-see mf.hdr.extStatus for SCSI_STATUS
0x2e
IO request for MFI_CMD_OP_PD_SCSI failed - see extStatus for DM error
0x2f
Matches SCSI RESERVATION_CONFLICT
0x30
One or more of the flush operations failed
0x31
Firmware real-time currently not set
0x32
Command issues while firmware in wrong state (i.e., GET RECON when op not active)
0x33
LD is not OFFLINE - IO not possible
0x34
Peer controller rejected request (possibly due to resource conflict)
0x35
Unable to inform peer of communication changes (retry might be appropriate)
0x36
LD reservation already in progress
0x37
I2C errors were detected
0x38
PCI errors occurred during XOR/DMA operation
0x39
Diagnostics failed - see event log for details
0x3a
Unable to process command as boot messages are pending
0x3b
Returned in case if foreign configurations are incomplete
0x3d
Returned in case if a command is tried on unsupported hardware
0x3e
CC scheduling is disabled
0x3f
PD CopyBack operation is in progress
0x40
Selected more than one PD per array
0x41
Microcode update operation failed
0x42
Unable to process command as drive security feature is not enabled
0x43
Controller already has a lock key
0x44
Lock key cannot be backed-up
0x45
Lock key backup cannot be verified
0x46
Lock key from backup failed verification
0x47
Rekey operation not allowed, unless controller already has a lock key
0x48
Lock key is not valid, cannot authenticate
0x49
Lock key from escrow cannot be used
0x4a
Lock key backup (pass-phrase) is required
0x4b
Secure LD exist
0x4c
LD secure operation is not allowed
LSI Corporation
- 243 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Appendix B MegaCLI Error Messages
Number
Event Text
0x4d
Reprovisioning is not allowed
0x4e
Drive security type (FDE or non-FDE) is not appropriate for requested operation
0x4f
LD encryption type is not supported
0x50
Cannot mix FDE and non-FDE drives in same array
0x51
Cannot mix secure and unsecured LD in same array
0x52
Secret key not allowed
0x53
Physical device errors were detected
0x54
Controller has LD cache pinned
0x55
Requested operation is already in progress
0x56
Another power state set operation is in progress
0x57
Power state of device is not correct
0x58
No PD is available for patrol read
0x59
Controller reset is required
0x5a
No EKM boot agent detected
0x5b
No space on the snapshot repository VD
0x5c
For consistency SET PiTs, some PiT creations might fail and some succeed
0xFF
Invalid status - used for polling command completion
LSI Corporation
- 244 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Appendix C History of Technical Changes
Appendix C History of Technical Changes
This appendix lists all the technical changes made to this guide for all the previous releases.
Table 154 History of Technical Changes
Version and Date
80-00156-01 Rev. K, February 2011
Description of Changes
Added Shield State, on page Shield State, in the WebBIOS section.
Added Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit Information, on page Viewing and Changing Battery
Backup Unit Information, in the WebBIOS section.
Added Viewing Enclosure Properties, on page Viewing Enclosure Properties, in the WebBIOS section.
Added SSD Disk Cache Policy, on page SSD Disk Cache Policy, in the WebBIOS section.
Added Emergency Spare, on pageEmergency Spare, in the WebBIOS section.
Added Emergency Spare for Controllers, on page Emergency Spare for Controllers, in the WebBIOS section.
Updated Viewing and Expanding a Virtual Drive, on page Viewing and Expanding a Virtual Drive, in the
WebBIOS section.
Added Shield State, on page Shield State, in the MSM section.
Added Logical View Shield State, on page Logical View Shield State, in the MSM section.
Added Viewing the Physical Drive Properties, on page Viewing the Physical Drive Properties, in the MSM
section.
Added Viewing Server Profile of a Drive in Shield State, on page Viewing Server Profile of a Drive in Shield
State, in the MSM section.
Added Displaying the Virtual Drive Properties, on page Displaying the Virtual Drive Properties, in the MSM
section.
Added Emergency Spare, on page Emergency Spare, in the MSM section.
Added SSD Disk Cache Policy, on page SSD Disk Cache Policy, in the MSM section.
Added Non-SED Secure Erase Support, on page Non-SED Secure Erase Support, in the MSM section.
Added Rebuild Write Cache, on page Rebuild Write Cache, in the MSM section.
Added Background Suspend or Resume Support, on page Background Suspend or Resume Support, in the
MSM section.
Added Enclosure Properties, on page Enclosure Properties, in the MSM section.
Updated Monitoring Battery Backup Units, on page Monitoring Battery Backup Units, in the MSM section.
80-00156-01, Rev. J, September 2010 Added Managing Software Licensing, on page Managing Software Licensing, in the WebBIOS section.
Added EKM and LKM in the WebBIOS section.
Added Import Foreign Drive in EKM/EKM Secured Locked Drive, in the WebBIOS section.
Added Enable the Snapshot Scheduler in the WebBIOS section.
Added WebBIOS Dimmer Switch, on page WebBIOS Dimmer Switch, in the WebBIOS section.
Added Software Licensing, EKM and LKM, Dimmer Switch, and other sections in WebBIOS Configuration
Utility.
Added SafeStore Security Options, on page SafeStore Security Options, in the MegaCLI section.
Added Enable the Snapshot Scheduler, on page Enable the Snapshot Scheduler, in the MegaCLI section.
Added Enhanced Dimmer Switch Power Settings, on page Enhanced Dimmer Switch Power Settings, in the
Configuration section.
Added MegaRAID Software Licensing, on page MegaRAID Software Licensing, in the Using MegaRAID
Advanced Software section.
Added Software Licensing, EKM and LKM, Dimmer Swtich, and other sections in the Using MegaRAID
Advanced Software section.
80-00156-01, Rev. I, June 2010
Updated the document with changes to the software utilities. Added Chapter 11 for the MegaRAID
advanced software features.
80-00156-01, Rev. H, July 2009
Documented the Full Disk Encryption (FDE) feature.
80-00156-01, Rev. G, June 2009
Updated the MegaRAID Storage Manager chapters.
LSI Corporation
- 245 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Appendix C History of Technical Changes
Version and Date
80-00156-01, Rev. F, March 2009
Description of Changes
Updated the WebBIOS Configuration Utility, MegaRAID Storage Manager, and MegaCLI chapters.
80-00156-01, Rev. E, December 2008 Added the Overview chapter. Updated the WebBIOS Configuration Utility, MegaRAID Storage Manager,
and MegaCLI chapters.
80-00156-01, Rev. D, April 2008
Updated the RAID Overview section. Updated the WebBIOS Configuration Utility and the MegaRAID
Storage Manager. Updated the MegaCLI commands.
80-00156-01, Rev. C, July 2007,
Version 2.
Updated operating system support for MegaCLI.
80-00156-01, Rev. B, June 2007,
Version 2.0
Updated the WebBIOS Configuration Utility and the MegaRAID Storage Manager. Updated the MegaCLI
commands. Added the RAID Introduction chapter.
80-00156-01, Rev. A, August 2006,
Version 1.1
Corrected the procedure for creating RAID 10 and RAID 50 drive groups in the WebBIOS Configuration
Utility.
DB15-000339-00, December 2005,
Version 1.0
Initial release of this document.
LSI Corporation
- 246 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Glossary
Glossary
This appendix provides a glossary for terms used in this document.
A
Absolute state of
charge
Predicted remaining battery capacity expressed as a percentage of Design Capacity. Note
that the Absolute State of Charge operation can return values greater than 100 percent.
Access policy
A virtual drive property indicating what kind of access is allowed for a particular virtual
drive. The possible values are Read/Write, Read Only, or Blocked.
Alarm enabled
A controller property that indicates whether the controller’s onboard alarm is enabled.
Alarm present
A controller property that indicates whether the controller has an onboard alarm. If
present and enabled, the alarm is sounded for certain error conditions.
Array
See drive group.
Auto learn mode
The controller performs the learn cycle automatically in this mode. This mode offers the following
options:

BBU Auto Learn: Firmware tracks the time since the last learn cycle and performs a learn cycle
when due.

BBU Auto Learn Disabled: Firmware does not monitor or initiate a learn cycle. You can
schedule learn cycles manually.

BBU Auto Learn Warn: Firmware warns about a pending learn cycle. You can initiate a learn
cycle manually. After the learn cycle is complete, the firmware resets the counter and warns
you when the next learn cycle time is reached.
Auto learn period
Time between learn cycles. A learn cycle is a battery calibration operation performed
periodically by the controller? to determine the condition of the battery.
Average time to
empty
One-minute rolling average of the predicted remaining battery life.
Average time to full
Predicted time to charge the battery to a fully charged state based on the one minute
rolling average of the charge current.
B
Battery module
version
Current revision of the battery pack module.
Battery replacement
Warning issued by firmware that the battery can no longer support the required data
retention time.
Battery retention time
Time, in hours, that the battery can maintain the contents of the cache memory.
Battery status
Operating status of the battery. Possible values are Missing, Optimal, Failed, Degraded
(need attention), and Unknown.
Battery type
Possible values are intelligent Battery Backup Unit (BBU), intelligent Battery Backup Unit
(iBBU), intelligent Transportable Battery Backup Unit (iTBBU), and ZCR Legacy.
BBU present
A controller property that indicates whether the controller has an onboard battery
backup unit to provide power in case of a power failure.
BGI rate
A controller property indicating the rate at which the background initialization of virtual
drives will be carried out.
BIOS
Basic Input/Output System. The computer BIOS is stored on a flash memory chip. The
BIOS controls communications between the microprocessor and peripheral devices, such
as the keyboard and the video controller, and miscellaneous functions, such as system
messages.
LSI Corporation
- 247 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Glossary
C
Cache
Fast memory that holds recently accessed data. Use of cache memory speeds subsequent
access to the same data. When data is read from or written to main memory, a copy is also
saved in cache memory with the associated main memory address. The cache memory
software monitors the addresses of subsequent reads to see if the required data is
already stored in cache memory. If it is already in cache memory (a cache hit), it is read
from cache memory immediately and the main memory read is aborted (or not started).
If the data is not cached (a cache miss), it is fetched from main memory and saved in
cache memory.
Cache flush interval
A controller property that indicates how often the data cache is flushed.
Caching
The process of using a high speed memory buffer to speed up a computer system’s
overall read/write performance. The cache can be accessed at a higher speed than a drive
subsystem. To improve read performance, the cache usually contains the most recently
accessed data, as well as data from adjacent drive sectors. To improve write performance,
the cache can temporarily store data in accordance with its write back policies.
Capacity
A property that indicates the amount of storage space on a drive or virtual drive.
Coerced capacity
A drive property indicating the capacity to which a drive has been coerced (forced) to
make it compatible with other drives that are nominally the same capacity. For example,
a 4-GB drive from one manufacturer might be 4,196 MB, and a 4-GB from another
manufacturer might be 4,128 MB. These drives could be coerced to a usable capacity of
4,088 MB each for use in a drive group in a storage configuration.
Coercion mode
A controller property indicating the capacity to which drives of nominally identical
capacity are coerced (forced) to make them usable in a storage configuration.
Consistency check
An operation that verifies that all stripes in a virtual drive with a redundant RAID level are
consistent and that automatically fixes any errors. For RAID 1 drive groups, this operation
verifies correct mirrored data for each stripe.
Consistency check
rate
The rate at which consistency check operations are run on a computer system.
Controller
A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and memory or
between the microprocessor and a peripheral device such as a drive. RAID controllers
perform RAID functions such as striping and mirroring to provide data protection.
Copyback
The procedure used to copy data from a source drive of a virtual drive to a destination drive that is
not a part of the virtual drive. The copyback operation is often used to create or restore a specific
physical configuration for a drive group (for example, a specific arrangement of drive group
members on the device I/O buses). The copyback operation can be run automatically or manually.
Typically, a drive fails or is expected to fail, and the data is rebuilt on a hot spare. The failed drive is
replaced with a new drive. Then the data is copied from the hot spare to the new drive, and the hot
spare reverts from a rebuild drive to its original hot spare status. The copyback operation runs as a
background activity, and the virtual drive is still available online to the host.
Current
Measure of the current flowing to (+) or from (-) the battery, reported in milliamperes.
Current write policy
A virtual drive property that indicates whether the virtual drive currently supports Write Back mode
or Write Through mode.

In Write Back mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the
controller cache has received all of the data in a transaction.

In Write Through mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host
when the drive subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
Cycle count
The count is based on the number of times the near fully charged battery has been
discharged to a level below the cycle count threshold.
D
LSI Corporation
- 248 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Glossary
Default write policy
A virtual drive property indicating whether the default write policy is Write Through or
Write Back. In Write Back mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to
the host when the controller cache has received all of the data in a transaction. In Write
Through mode the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when
the drive subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
Design capacity
Designed charge capacity of the battery, measured in milliampere-hour units (mAh).
Design charge
capacity remaining
Amount of the charge capacity remaining, relative to the battery pack design capacity.
Design voltage
Designed voltage capacity of the battery, measured in millivolts (mV).
Device chemistry
Possible values are NiMH (nickel metal hydride) and LiON (lithium ion).
Device ID
A controller or drive property indicating the manufacturer-assigned device ID.
Device port count
A controller property indicating the number of ports on the controller.
Drive cache policy
A virtual drive property indicating whether the virtual drive cache is enabled, disabled, or
unchanged from its previous setting.
Drive group
A group of drives attached to a RAID controller on which one or more virtual drives can
be created. All virtual drives in the drive group use all of the drives in the drive group.
Drive state
A drive property indicating the status of the drive. A drive can be in one of the following states:

Unconfigured Good – A drive accessible to the RAID controller but not configured as a part of
a virtual drive or as a hot spare.

Hot Spare – A drive that is configured as a hot spare.

Online – A drive that can be accessed by the RAID controller and will be part of the virtual
drive.

Rebuild – A drive to which data is being written to restore full redundancy for a virtual drive.

Failed – A drive that was originally configured as Online or Hot Spare, but on which the
firmware detects an unrecoverable error.

Unconfigured Bad – A drive on which the firmware detects an unrecoverable error; the drive
was Unconfigured Good or the drive could not be initialized.

Missing – A drive that was Online, but which has been removed from its location.

Offline – A drive that is part of a virtual drive but which has invalid data as far as the RAID
configuration is concerned.

None – A drive with an unsupported flag set. An Unconfigured Good or Offline drive that has
completed the prepare for removal operation.
Drive state drive
subsystem
A collection of drives and the hardware that controls them and connects them to one or
more controllers. The hardware can include an intelligent controller, or the drives can
attach directly to a system I/O bus controller.
Drive type
A drive property indicating the characteristics of the drive.
E
EKM
External Key Management
Estimated time to
recharge
Estimated time necessary to complete recharge of the battery at the current charge rate.
Expected margin of
error
Indicates how accurate the reported battery capacity is in terms of percentage.
F
Fast initialization
A mode of initialization that quickly writes zeroes to the first and last sectors of the virtual
drive. This allows you to immediately start writing data to the virtual drive while the
initialization is running in the background.
LSI Corporation
- 249 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Glossary
Fault tolerance
The capability of the drive subsystem to undergo a single drive failure per drive group
without compromising data integrity and processing capability. LSI SAS RAID controllers
provides fault tolerance through redundant drive groups in RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and
60. They also support hot spare drives and the auto-rebuild feature.
Firmware
Software stored in read-only memory (ROM) or programmable ROM (PROM). Firmware is
often responsible for the behavior of a system when it is first turned on. A typical example
would be a monitor program in a system that loads the full operating system from drive
or from a network and then passes control to the operating system.
Foreign configuration
A RAID configuration that already exists on a replacement set of drives that you install in
a computer system. MegaRAID Storage Manager software allows you to import the
existing configuration to the RAID controller, or you can clear the configuration so you
can create a new one.
Formatting
The process of writing a specific value to all data fields on a drive, to map out unreadable
or bad sectors. Because most drives are formatted when manufactured, formatting is
usually done only if a drive generates many media errors.
Full charge capacity
Amount of charge that can be placed in the battery. This value represents the last
measured full discharge of the battery. This value is updated on each learn cycle when
the battery undergoes a qualified discharge from nearly full to a low battery level.
G
Gas gauge status
Hexadecimal value that represents the status flag bits in the gas gauge status register.
H
Hole
In MegaRAID Storage Manager, a hole is a block of empty space in a drive group that can
be used to define a virtual drive.
Host interface
A controller property indicating the type of interface used by the computer host system:
for example, PCIX.
Host port count
A controller property indicating the number of host data ports currently in use.
Host system
Any computer system on which the controller is installed. Mainframes, workstations, and
standalone desktop systems can all be considered host systems.
Hot spare
A standby drive that can automatically replace a failed drive in a virtual drive and prevent data from
being lost. A hot spare can be dedicated to a single redundant drive group or it can be part of the
global hot spare pool for all drive groups controlled by the controller.
When a drive fails, MegaRAID Storage Manager software automatically uses a hot spare to replace it
and then rebuilds the data from the failed drive to the hot spare. Hot spares can be used in RAID 1,
5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 storage configurations.
I
Initialization
The process of writing zeros to the data fields of a virtual drive and, in fault-tolerant RAID
levels, generating the corresponding parity to put the virtual drive in a Ready state.
Initialization erases all previous data on the drives. Drive groups will work without
initializing, but they can fail a consistency check because the parity fields have not been
generated.
IO policy
A virtual drive property indicating whether Cached I/O or Direct I/O is being used. In
Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache memory. In Direct I/O mode, reads are
not buffered in cache memory. Data is transferred to cache and the host concurrently. If
the same data block is read again, it comes from cache memory. (The IO Policy applies to
reads on a specific virtual drive. It does not affect the read ahead cache.)
L
LSI Corporation
- 250 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Glossary
Learning cycle
A battery calibration operation performed by a RAID controller periodically to determine
the condition of the battery. You can start battery learn cycles manually or automatically
Learn delay interval
Length of time between automatic learn cycles. You can delay the start of the learn cycles
for up to 168 hours (seven days).
Learn mode
Mode for the battery auto learn cycle. Possible values are Auto, Disabled, and Warning.
Learn state
Indicates that a learn cycle is in progress.
Load-balancing
A method of spreading work between two or more computers, network links, CPUs,
drives, or other resources. Load balancing is used to maximize resource use, throughput,
or response time.
Low-power storage
mode
Storage mode that causes the battery pack to use less power, which save battery power
consumption.
LKM
Local Key Management
M
Manufacturing date
Date on which the battery pack assembly was manufactured.
Manufacturing name
Device code that indicates the manufacturer of the components used to make the
battery assembly.
Max error
Expected margin of error (percentage) in the state of charge calculation.
For example, when Max Error returns 10 percent and Relative State of Charge returns 50 percent,
the Relative State of charge is more likely between 50 percent and 60 percent. The gas gauge sets
Max Error to 100 percent on a full reset. The gas gauge sets Max Error to 2 percent on completion of
a learn cycle, unless the gas gauge limits the learn cycle to the +512/–256-mAh maximum
adjustment values. If the learn cycle is limited, the gas gauge sets Max Error to 8 percent unless Max
Error was already below 8 percent. In this case Max Error does not change. The gas gauge
increments Max Error by 1 percent after four increments of Cycle Count without a learn cycle.
Maximum learn delay
from current start
time
Maximum length of time between automatic learn cycles. You can delay the start of a
learn cycle for a maximum of 168 hours (7 days).
Media error count
A drive property indicating the number of errors that have been detected on the drive
media.
Migration
The process of moving virtual drives and hot spare drives from one controller to another
by disconnecting the drives from one controller and attaching them to another one. The
firmware on the new controller will detect and retain the virtual drive information on the
drives.
Mirroring
The process of providing complete data redundancy with two drives by maintaining an
exact copy of one drive’s data on the second drive. If one drive fails, the contents of the
other drive can be used to maintain the integrity of the system and to rebuild the failed
drive.
Multipathing
The firmware provides support for detecting and using multiple paths from the RAID
controllers to the SAS devices that are in enclosures. Devices connected to enclosures
have multiple paths to them. With redundant paths to the same port of a device, if one
path fails, another path can be used to communicate between the controller and the
device. Using multiple paths with load balancing, instead of a single path, can increase
reliability through redundancy.
N
Name
A virtual drive property indicating the user-assigned name of the virtual drive.
Next learn time
Time at which the next learn cycle starts.
LSI Corporation
- 251 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Glossary
Non-redundant
configuration
A RAID 0 virtual drive with data striped across two or more drives but without drive
mirroring or parity. This provides for high data throughput but offers no protection in
case of a drive failure.
NVRAM
Acronym for nonvolatile random access memory. A storage system that does not lose the
data stored on it when power is removed. NVRAM is used to store firmware and
configuration data on the RAID controller.
NVRAM present
A controller property indicating whether an NVRAM is present on the controller.
NVRAM size
A controller property indicating the capacity of the controller’s NVRAM.
O
Offline
A drive is offline when it is part of a virtual drive but its data is not accessible to the virtual
drive.
P
Patrol read
A process that checks the drives in a storage configuration for drive errors that could lead
to drive failure and lost data. The patrol read operation can find and sometimes fix any
potential problem with drives prior to host access. This enhances overall system
performance because error recovery during a normal I/O operation might not be
necessary.
Patrol read rate
The user-defined rate at which patrol read operations are run on a computer system.
Predicted battery
capacity status (hold
24hr charge)
Indicates whether the battery capacity is capable of supporting a 24-hour data retention
time.
Product info
A drive property indicating the vendor-assigned model number of the drive.
Product name
A controller property indicating the manufacturing name of the controller.
R
RAID
A group of multiple, independent drives that provide high performance by increasing the number
of drives used for saving and accessing data.
A RAID drive group improves input/output (I/O) performance and data availability. The group of
drives appears to the host system as a single storage unit or as multiple virtual drives. Data
throughput improves because several drives can be accessed simultaneously. RAID configurations
also improve data storage availability and fault tolerance. Redundant RAID levels (RAID levels 1, 5, 6,
10, 50, and 60) provide data protection.
RAID 0
Uses data striping on two or more drives to provide high data throughput, especially for
large files in an environment that requires no data redundancy.
RAID 00
Uses data striping on two or more drives in a spanned drive group to provide high data
throughput, especially for large files in an environment that requires no data redundancy.
RAID 1
Uses data mirroring on pairs of drives so that data written to one drive is simultaneously
written to the other drive. RAID 1 works well for small databases or other small
applications that require complete data redundancy.
RAID 5
Uses data striping and parity data across three or more drives (distributed parity) to
provide high data throughput and data redundancy, especially for applications that
require random access.
RAID 6
Uses data striping and parity data across three or more drives (distributed parity) to
provide high data throughput and data redundancy, especially for applications that
require random access. RAID 6 can survive the failure of two drives.
RAID 10
A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1 that uses data striping across two mirrored drive
groups. It provides high data throughput and complete data redundancy.
LSI Corporation
- 252 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Glossary
RAID 50
A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 5 that uses data striping across two drive groups with
parity data. It provides high data throughput and complete data redundancy.
RAID 60
A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 6 that uses data striping across two drive groups with
parity data. It provides high data throughput and complete data redundancy. RAID 60
can survive the failure of two drives in each RAID set in the spanned drive group.
RAID level
A virtual drive property indicating the RAID level of the virtual drive.
LSI SAS RAID controllers support RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
RAID Migration
A feature in RAID subsystems that allows for changing a RAID level to another level
without powering down the system.
Raw capacity
A drive property indicating the actual full capacity of the drive before any coercion mode
is applied to reduce the capacity.
Read policy
A controller attribute indicating the current Read Policy mode. In Always Read Ahead
mode, the controller reads sequentially ahead of requested data and stores the
additional data in cache memory, anticipating that the data will be needed soon. This
speeds up reads for sequential data, but there is little improvement when accessing
random data. In No Read Ahead mode (known as Normal mode in WebBIOS), read ahead
capability is disabled.
Rebuild
The regeneration of all data to a replacement drive in a redundant virtual drive after a
drive failure. A drive rebuild normally occurs without interrupting normal operations on
the affected virtual drive, though some degradation of performance of the drive
subsystem can occur.
Rebuild rate
The percentage of central processing unit (CPU) resources devoted to rebuilding data
onto a new drive after a drive in a storage configuration has failed.
Reclaim virtual drive
A method of undoing the configuration of a new virtual drive. If you highlight the virtual
drive in the Configuration Wizard and click Reclaim, the individual drives are removed
from the virtual drive configuration.
Reconstruction rate
The user-defined rate at which a drive group modification operation is carried out.
Redundancy
A property of a storage configuration that prevents data from being lost when one drive
fails in the configuration.
Redundant
configuration
A virtual drive that has redundant data on drives in the drive group that can be used to rebuild a
failed drive. The redundant data can be parity data striped across multiple drives in a drive group,
or it can be a complete mirrored copy of the data stored on a second drive.
A redundant configuration protects the data in case a drive fails in the configuration.
Relative state of
charge
Predicted remaining battery capacity expressed as a percentage of Full Charge Capacity.
Remaining capacity
Amount of remaining charge capacity of the battery as stated in milliamp hours. This
value represents the available capacity or energy in the battery at any given time. The gas
gauge adjusts this value for charge, self-discharge, and leakage compensation factors.
Revertible hot spare
When you use the Replace Member procedure, after data is copied from a hot spare to a
new drive, the hot spare reverts from a rebuild drive to its original hot spare status.
Revision level
A drive property that indicates the revision level of the drive’s firmware.
Run time to empty
Predicted remaining battery life at the present rate of discharge in minutes.
S
SAS
Acronym for Serial-Attached SCSI. SAS is a serial, point-to-point, enterprise-level device
interface that leverages the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) protocol set. The SAS
interface provides improved performance, simplified cabling, smaller connectors, lower
pin count, and lower power requirements when compared to parallel SCSI.
LSI Corporation
- 253 -
MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide
June 2012
Glossary
SATA
Acronym for Serial Advanced Technology Attachment. A physical storage interface
standard. SATA is a serial link that provides point-to-point connections between devices.
The thinner serial cables allow for better airflow within the system and permit smaller
chassis designs.
SCSI device type
A drive property indicating the type of the device, such as drive.
Serial no.
A controller property indicating the manufacturer-assigned serial number.
Strip size
The portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group.
Stripe size
A virtual drive property indicating the length of the interleaved data segments that the
RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not including parity drives. For example,
consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each
drive in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB. The user
can select the stripe size.
Striping
A technique used to write data across all drives in a virtual drive.
Each stripe consists of consecutive virtual drive data addresses that are mapped in fixed-size units
to each drive in the virtual drive using a sequential pattern. For example, if the virtual drive includes
five drives, the stripe writes data to drives one through five without repeating any of the drives. The
amount of space consumed by a stripe is the same on each drive. Striping by itself does not provide
data redundancy. Striping in combination with parity does provide data redundancy.
Subvendor ID
A controller property that lists additional vendor ID information about the controller.
T
Temperature
Temperature of the battery pack, measured in Celsius.
U
Uncorrectable error
count
A controller property that lists the number of uncorrectable errors detected on drives
connected to the controller. If the error count reaches a certain level, a drive will be
marked as failed.
V
Vendor ID
A controller property indicating the vendor-assigned ID number of the controller.
Vendor info
A drive property listing the name of the vendor of the drive.
Virtual drive
A storage unit created by a RAID controller from one or more drives. Although a virtual
drive can be created from several drives, it is seen by the operating system as a single
drive. Depending on the RAID level used, the virtual drive can retain redundant data in
case of a drive failure.
Virtual drive state
A virtual drive property indicating the condition of the virtual drive. Examples include
Optimal and Degraded.
W
Write-back
In Write-Back Caching mode, the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host
when the controller cache has received all of the data in a drive write transaction. Data is written to
the drive subsystem in accordance with policies set up by the controller.
These policies include the amount of dirty/clean cache lines, the number of cache lines available,
and elapsed time from the last cache flush.
Write policy
See Default Write Policy.
Write-through
In Write-Through Caching mode, the controller sends a data transfer completion signal to
the host when the drive subsystem has received all of the data and has completed the
write transaction to the drive.
LSI Corporation
- 254 -
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement